Home

WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer User`s Manual - Electro

1. a 7 ame am eee x V 0 voce Vocis ijn oureur SS A A A CURRENT C 2 Sr woe0 0ur VGA th ZA to0240v ac carn carn carn carm ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS TALL TERMINALS TALL TERMINALS Q A TV MAX TO A Soov max To 7 1 760301 17 3 1 uondo gsn 3 2 USB Interface Functions and Specifications Reception Function You can specify the same settings as those specified by front panel key operations Receives output requests for measured and computed data setup data and error codes Transmission Function Outputs measured and computed data Outputs panel setup parameters and the status byte Outputs error codes that have occurred Switching between Remote and Local Modes When Switching from Local to Remote Mode Remote mode is activated when the COMMunicate REMote ON command is received from a controller while local mode is active The REMOTE indicator is turned ON All keys except the LOCAL key are disabled Settings entered in local mode are retained even when the WT3000 switches t
2. uondo zez su DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Sun LC D FT wave sone LOCAL OXO em s su n P amp amp Jm e grec mI fy scu p rss MISC key Press this key to configure communications Rear Panel RS 232 connector EIA 574 compliant For the 9 pin EIA 232 RS 232 Connector used to connect the WT3000 to the controller PC using an RS 232 interface cable serial asa VOLTAGE tN joia outeur VS amen n V aem 7 uen dC AV EXT cpap A sreco ETHERNET OGBASE IX meas starr ZA voco our GA o carn carn c carm ALL TERMINALS ALL T
3. 2 6 25 XON RS 2 6 6 25 On ERE ERES 2 5 COMMunicate WAIT 6 25 5 cec ci ra 6 24 CURSor BAR POS ItION lt X gt 22 6 26 2 CURSor BAR Y x DY 6 26 TACLOF 6 41 6 43 CURSO BAR ien iste rc s n 6 26 5 2 2 6 26 CURSor FFT POSItiON lt X gt eee 6 26 Command List Page CURSor FFTTTRACe x Lees 6 27 UD A CURSor FFT X lt x gt DX Y lt x gt DY 6 27 ACQuisition BYTeorder 2 6 17 CURSor FFT 22200 6 26 AC Quisition END arvana ees 6 17 CURSor FFT STATe ees ACQu isition FORMAE 5 rci titii tes 6 17 lt gt AC Quisition HOLD CURSor TRENd TRACe xe Ls iACQuUisition LENG nan 6 18 CURSor TRENd X lt x gt Y lt x gt DY AC Quisition SEND es 6 18 CURSor TRENG ses 6 27 ACQuisition S RAT sinite 6 18 CURSor TRENG STATe 6 27 CURSor WAVE PATH Ls 6 28 ACQuisition TRACe CURSor WAVE POSitionex s 6 28 ACQuiiSItIOTI iier cr tette es 6 17 CURSor WAVE TRACeexs es 6 28
4. 6 48 FILE SAVE ACQuisition TRACe 6 48 FILE SAVE ACQuisition TYPE 6 48 FILE SAVE ACQuisition 2202 2 4400 0 6 48 FILE SAVE ACQuisition EXEQCute 6 48 FILE SAVE ANAMing eene 6 48 FILE SAVE COMMent eene 6 48 FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle Functions 6 49 6 49 FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB dented ette FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal 6 50 FILE SAVE NUMeric TYPE 2 6 50 6 49 FILE SAVE NUMeric EXECute 6 49 FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal Function 6 50 _ 6 50 lt gt 6 50 FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGM 6 50 Index 6 IM 760301 17E FILE SAVE SETup EXEOute 6 50 FILE SAVE WAVE TRAQe 0 6 51
5. 6 108 STORG RTIMe iecit ERR 6 108 STORe S MODO ocior ett rt rn ef e 6 108 STORE STAR iind eic e Ce e renes 6 108 STORE STOP nci ba E ect ett i ed cd 6 108 STORE WAVE ALL ter 6 108 STORe WAVE U x I x SPEed TORQue 6 108 STORe WAVE ss 6 105 SYSTem CLOCK DISPIay 6 109 SYSTem CLOCKk SNTP GMTTime 6 109 5 6 109 SYSTem CLOCKk SNTP EXECute SYSTEM CLOCK TYPE iic ieas aai SYSTem CLOCK uate SYS Tem DAT SYSTemiEGCLGaBr eet rre potete one SYSTEM FONT SYSTemiKEOQGK crit reti rct ete der teer eet SYSTem LANGuage MENU SYSTem LANGuage MESSage 5 _ 2 6 110 SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh MODE SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh BACKground GRATicule CURSor esee 6 110 SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh 6 110 5 _ 6 111 SYSTem LCD COLor TEXT LET Ter BACKground BOXISUBISE rere SYSTem LCD COLorTEXT T SYSTe
6. 2 6 83 6 83 MOTor TORQue RATE UPPer LOWer 6 83 2 6 83 6 83 0 6 83 220 6 83 MOTOETORQU eere ee end 6 82 n ei rr 6 81 NUMeric CBCycle END 2 6 84 6 84 5 4 2 1 6 84 6 85 INUMeric CBCycle 6 84 6 85 NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion CLEar NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion DELete NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion ITEM lt x gt NUMeric LIST CLEar NUMeric LIST DELete NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion NUMber 6 87 NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion VALue 6 87 NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion 6 85 NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation CLEar 6 88 NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation DELete 6 88 NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation ITEM lt x gt 6 88
7. only on models with 2 to 4 elements PB PB Q B only on models with 4 elements DISPLAY FFT FFT1 OBJECT 01 DISPLAY FFT FFT1 OBJECT gt DISPLAY FFT FFT1 OBJECT U1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option SPEed TORQue are valid only on the motor version MV Syntax Example DISPlay Function Syntax Example Description DISPlay Function Syntax Example Description DISPlay Function Syntax Example Description DISPlay Function Syntax Example Description FFT FFT x STATe Turns ON OFF the FFT waveform display or queries the current setting DISPlay FFT FFT lt x gt STATe Boolean DISPlay FFT FFT lt x gt STATe lt x gt 1 2 FFT DISPLAY FFT FFT1 STATE ON DISPLAY FFT FFT1 STATE gt DISPLAY FFT FFT1 STATE 1 This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option FFT FORMat Sets the display format of the FFT waveform or queries the current setting DISPlay FFT FORMat SINGle DUAL DISPlay FFT FORMat DISPLAY FFT FORMAT SINGLE DISPLAY FFT FORMAT gt DISPLAY FFT FORMAT SINGLE This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option FFT POINt Sets the number of points of the FFT computation or queries the current setting DISPlay FFT POINt lt gt
8. tdt titre das 6 81 RM 1 3 multi line MESSAGES 11111 1 7 PST 5 5 pulse co nt 5 nennen tnn 6 82 N Page pulse 6 82 names and functions of parts 1 1 2 1 4 1 NL New Line ERR Q Page 5 4 normal integration mode ss NULL T nctlon is tentent nenne number of measurements ect 6 52 R Page numeric data format yssiron itanisaidia 6 97 numeric data Output 6 84 RATE 9 6 102 numeric display nentes 6 35 rated integration time sesseeeeennnn 6 19 numeric display 6 36 rated voltage 14444444444 6 55 NUMeric 6 84 DOWDF exe n REFER a RE XE 6 80 n meric list eiiis 6 92 real time integration mode 44 40 6 74 rear receiving function jc registers clearing of sssssssseeeeennetees 6 115 6 53 6
9. The meaning of each bit of the condition register is as follows BitO UPD Updating Set to 1 when the measured data is being updated The falling edge of UPD 1 gt 0 signifies the end of the updating Bit 1 ITG Integrate Busy Set to 1 while integration is in progress Bit2 ITM Integrate Timer Busy Set to 1 while the integration timer is running Bit3 SRB Store Recall Busy Set to 1 while storing or recalling data Bit4 FOV Frequency Over Set to 1 when the frequency is in error Bit5 Printing Set to 1 while the built in printer is in operation or while data is being output to a network printer suodey snieis Bit6 ACS Accessing Set to 1 when the PC card interface USB storage medium or network drive is being accessed Bit7 PLLE PLL Source Input Error Set to 1 when there is no input to the PLL source and synchronization cannot be achieved during harmonic measurement Bit8 _ OVR1 Element1 Measured Data Over Set to 1 when the voltage or current of element 1 is overrange Bit9 OVR2 Element2 Measured Data Over Set to 1 when the voltage or current of element 2 is overrange Bit 10 Element3 Measured Data Over Set to 1 when the voltage or current of element 3 is overrange Bit 11 OVR4 Element4 Measured Data Over Set to 1 when the voltage or current of element 4 is overrange Bit 14 OVRM Motor Measured Data Over Set to 1 when t
10. 6 40 PC card formatting of 6 47 manual d Pc Corrected Power ssssssssseseeeennennees 6 80 peak information erri 6 97 7 8 75 peak tee tlic erste aaa 6 70 MAX HOLD 6 79 oi eee mieten 6 80 maximum order to Measured 6 57 PILL SOURCG 6 58 Maximum relative voltage Change 6 86 inp H 6 86 maximum relative voltage Change 6 53 d 6 54 ce 5 1 measured order poles MUMBO 6 81 MENU se power factor 6 70 message 6 110 preset pattern o n 6 98 6 100 minimum order 16 DB TRBRSUTOC 6 57 6 60 1 5 2 8 4 4 printing 6 59 model 26114 program dala aoi onere 5 1 motor evaluation 6 81 program header 5 1 RE E RR 6 81 program MESSAGES 5 1
11. Car Ser ed VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE oureur Ce tay 1 N A 7 iux A sreo 27 ETHERNET 4 Q x rar pum 2 VIDEO OUT wn tA TERMINALS A 1000V MAX TO 100 240V ac FUSE 250V T 63A TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS A 1000 MAX TO 1000 MAX TO IM 760301 17E 1 1 1 2 QGP IB Interface Functions GP IB Interface Functions Listener Capability All of the information that you can set with the panel keys can be set through the GP IB interface except for turning ON OFF the power and setting the communication parameters Receives commands from a controller requesting the output of setup parameters measured computed data waveform data and other information Also receives status report commands Talker Capability Outputs setup parameters measured computed data waveform data and other information Note Talk only listen only
12. The contents of the selections for lt Period gt NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation VALue are as follows Function Queries the judgment results variable format If Period is omitted ALL is set Syntax NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation ALL Overall observation period Result VALue lt NR gt row of the numeric list in the flicker NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation VALue measurement display screen lt NRf gt 1 to 32 item number lt NRf gt 1 to 99 specified observation periods Example Example when lt NRf gt is specified Period is omitted from the response to NUMERIC FLICKER INFORMATION output items in the table above for which VALUE 1 gt 0 specification of lt Period gt is not required Example when lt NRf gt is omitted NUMERIC FLICKER INFORMATION NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation NUMber VALUE gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Function Sets the number of flicker judgment results Example in which NUMeric FORMat is set output by to FLOat NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation VALue NUMERIC FLICKER INFORMATION or queries the current setting VALUE gt 4 number of bytes four digits Syntax NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation data byte sequence NUMber lt NR gt ALL Description Only available with the flicker measurement NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation function FL option NUMber When lt is specified only the judgment lt NRf gt 1 to 32 ALL results for that item is output Ex
13. 6 74 NTEGrate RTIMe 6 74 iuit etes 6 74 QINTEGrate STATO neni etti 6 74 QINTEGrate STOD 6 74 lt gt ciet aeree 6 75 NTEGrate 6 74 6 76 MEASure AVERaging TYPE 6 77 MEASure AVERaging 2 6 76 MEASure AVERaging STATe 6 76 MEASure COMPensation EFFiciency 6 77 MEASure COMPensation V3AS 6 77 MEASure COMPensation WIRing ELEMent lt x gt 6 77 MEASure COMPensation WIRIng m MEASure COMPensation 6 77 IM 760301 17E Index 7 Index 519 6 78 MEASure DMeasure 2 6 77 MEASure DMeasure SIGMA 6 78 5 lt gt eee 6 78 MEASure EFFiciency UDEF xs 22 6 78 MEASure EFFiciency eee 6 78 MEASure FREQuenoy ITEMaxs 6 79 MEASure FREQuenoy 22 020000 1 6 79 MEASure FUNCtionex EXPRess
14. App 2 Appendix 3 IEEE 488 2 1992 cta fete tbe m aiio baa RR ER IHRER a App 5 vi IM 760301 17E Chapter 1 Interface 1 1 Names and Functions of Parts Front Panel REMOTE indicator Turns ON when the WT3000 is in the remote mode controlled via communications LOCAL key Press this key to clear the remote mode controlled via communications and enter the local mode in which key operations are enabled 91 40 WT3000 rower anatyzen Eu ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE o foro Qu Masi OH MoE auro us Gs gui MODE DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT LCD ieg gt co um p amp Ie een gm sem CA iad ws 5 Press this key to configure communications Rear Panel GP IB connector Connector used to connect the WT3000 to the controller PC using a GP IB cable
15. START 2005 1 1 0 0 0 INTEGrate STARt Function Starts integration Syntax INTEGrate STARt Example INTEGRATE START INTEGrate STATe Function Queries the integration condition Syntax INTEGrate STATe Example INTEGRATE STATE RESET Description The response information is as follows RESet Integration reset READy Waiting real time integration mode STARt Integration in progress STOP Integration stop ERRor Abnormal integration termination integration overflow power failure TIMeup Integration stop due to integration timer time INTEGrate STOP Function Stops integration Syntax INTEGrate STOP Example INTEGRATE STOP 6 74 IM 760301 17E 6 15 INTEGrate Group INTEGrate TIMer lt x gt Function Syntax Example Sets the integration timer time or queries the current setting INTEGrate TIMer lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt gt INTEGrate TIMer lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 0 0 to 10000 0 0 151 lt gt 10000 hour 2nd lt NRf gt 0 to 59 minute 3rd lt NRf gt 0 to 59 second INTEGRATE TIMER 1 0 0 INTEGRATE TIMER gt INTEGRATE TIMER 1 0 0 IM 760301 17E 6 75 6 16 Group nds this group deal with computation You can make the same settings and inquiries as when MEASURE AVG Frequency Meas Item menu
16. 22 6 42 DISPlay WAVE SVALue eee 6 42 DISPlay WAVE TDIV DISPlay WAVE TLABel 015 DISPlay WAVE TRIGger MODE DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SLOPe DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SOURce 5 DISPlay WAVE TRIGger 6 42 DISPlay WAVE VZoom U lt x gt I lt x gt 6 43 015 6 43 DISPlay WAVE VZoom 6 43 DISPlay WAVE U lt x gt l lt x gt SPEed TORQue MATH lt xs gt 6 43 DISPlay WAVE open pte Hee de 6 41 DIS Play RR aN REIS 6 29 FILE CDIRectory 6 47 FILE DELete IMAGe TIFF BMP PSCRipt PNG JPEG 6 47 FILE DELete NUMeric ASCii FLOat 6 47 FIEE DELete SETUD etti 6 47 FILE DELete WAVE BINary ASCii FLOat 6 47 FILE DRIVe FILE FORMat EXECute FILE FREE eo E meo E 6 47 FIEE EOAD ABORELE irren dace tts 6 47 FILE LOAD SETUp 22 6 47 6 48 eS 6 48
17. 6 115 FILE gro p iere tenter mee 6 47 file loading 6 47 22 tre ret eet tede 6 48 6 65 file operatlon erret trennen nennen 6 47 file saving Of terne tte 6 48 Iu n sees 5 6 e deca egeo et 6 22 6 69 FLICK r icri tmn 6 52 flicker judgment results 6 88 flicker measurement method 6 54 eee ine nee 2 8 free disk 4 8 422 6 47 froe SOWAT nein een 4 6 frequency filter essen 6 69 frequency for flicker 6 54 frequency measurement 6 79 front pariel eeepc 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 6 86 funtion NaMe tette eret 6 44 6 46 function selection lt function gt 1 6 44 G Page 1 6 GP IB cable ish aan 1 4 GPAB Control Mr 1 5 GP IB interface 1 2 GP IB interface specifications 1 3 OV ALCUIS rrr 6 41 Greenwich Mean 6 109 handshaking hardware harmonic measurement H
18. 6 68 INPut CURRent RANGe sse 6 67 INPut CURRent RANGe ALL eene 6 67 INPut CURRent SRATio ELEMent lt x gt 6 69 INPut CURRent SRATIO 6 69 INPut CURRent SRATio ALL ng AINPut C UBBenit 2 2 titres 6 66 INPut FILTer F REQuency ELEMent lt x gt 6 69 2 6 69 INPut FILTer FREQuency ALL 6 69 AINP t E FIETer EINE nat rette 6 69 INPut FIETor eniti mte 6 69 INPut FlLTer LINE ELEMent lt x gt ER INPut INDependent 4 4 6 70 i i suiit ete recte 6 70 NPU POVEST sass aiite eene 6 70 INPut SCALing STATe essen 6 70 INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor ELEMent lt x gt 6 70 INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor sess 6 70 INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor ALL AINPut S CALing ee tre ird etes 6 70 INPut SCALing STATe ELEMent lt x gt 6 71 INPut SCALing STATe ALL 6 70 INPut SYNChronize ELEMent lt x gt 6 71 INPut SYNCh
19. and SAV These common commands are not supported The extent of the self test using the TST command Executes all the MEMORY tests each internal memory of the Self Test menu of the MISC key The structure of the extended return status See chapter 7 Whether each command is processed in an overlap fashion or sequentially See section 5 5 Synchronization with the Controller and chapter 6 The description of the execution of each command See the functions of each command in chapter 6 User s Manual IM760301 01E and Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E App 6 IM 760301 17E Index Symbols Page SEND 5 1 6 38 TPOM a eii EE 6 73 Ulud 6 73 6 73 BP3W tO 3V3A conversion 2 6 78 SPAW 6 73 EUR X 6 73 6 38 8 value m T 6 38 A Page abbreviated sicot ret ues 5 4 absolute path nnne 6 48 ACQUISITION Gro p etaient itcr tpi 6 17 Cleri 1 5 address commands esee 1 7 Addressable mode eene 1 3 analog input group apparent power ASCII character codes App 1 assignment method entrent 6 55 auto calibratiorni
20. gt lt Function gt U LAMBda PHI FU Fl NONE U to FI NONE U to FI NONE U to FI NONE U to FI NONE U to FI NONE NONE lt Function gt U LAMBda PHI FU FI UPPeak UMPeak lt Element gt SIGMA SIGMB lt Element gt 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Order TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal lt Order gt TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal 6 98 IM 760301 17E 6 18 12 13 14 15 161030 31 to 45 46 to 60 61 to 75 76 to 90 91 to 255 Pattern 3 ITEM lt x gt 10 11 12 13 14 15 161029 30 31 to 44 45 46 to 59 60 61 to 74 75 76 to 89 90 91 to 255 Pattern 4 ITEM lt x gt ON Oa KR WD CFU CFI U to CFI U to CFI U to CFI U to CFI U to CFI NONE Functions U to WQ NONE U to WQ NONE U to WQ NONE U to WQ NONE U to WQ NONE NONE lt Function gt U IU LAMBda PHI FU MO a SIGMA SIGMB Element c c c c c c c la c c c SIGMA SIGMB Element ca l c TOTal T
21. MEASure DMeasure 5 Syntax Sets the delta computation mode for wiring unit XA or queries the current setting Syntax SIGMA OFF DIFFerence P3W3 V3A3 ST DT DT ST MEASure DMeasure SIGMA MEASURE DMEASURE SIGMA OFF MEASURE DMEASURE SIGMA gt MEASURE DMEASURE SIGMA OFF Description This command is valid only on models with the delta computation function DT option The selections are as shown below The wiring system of wiring unit XA determines the selectable modes OFF No delta computation single phase two wire system 1P2W only DIFFerence Differential voltage differential current single phase three wire system 1P3W three phase three wire system SP3W only P3W3_V3A3 3P3W to 3V3A conversion single phase three wire system 1P3W three phase three wire system 3P3W only ST_DT Star to Delta conversion three phase four wire system 8P4W only DT_ST Delta gt Star conversion three phase three wire three voltage three current system 3P3W 3V3A only Example MEASure DMeasure SIGMB Syntax Sets the delta computation mode for wiring unit or queries the current setting Syntax MEASure DMeasure SIGMB OFF DIFFerence P3W3 V3A3 ST DT DT ST MEASure DMeasure SIGMB MEASURE DMEASURE SIGMB OFF MEASURE DMEASURE SIGMB gt MEASURE DMEASURE SIGMB OFF Description This command is valid only on 4 element mode
22. PHIU 90 Required Required PHII ol Required Required Z Z Required Required RS Rs Required Required XS Xs Required Required RP Rp Required Required XP Xp Required Required UHDF Uhdf Required Required IHDF Ihdf Required Required PHDF Phdf Required Required UTHD Uthd Required Not required ITHD Ithd Required Not required PTHD Pthd Required Not required UTHF Uthf Required Not required ITHF Ithf Required Not required UTIF Utif Required Not required ITIF Required Not required HVF hvf Required Not required HCF hcf Required Not required PHI U1U2 QUi Uj Required Not required PHI 0103 QUi Uk Required Not required PHI 0111 QUi li Required Not required PHI 112 QUi lj Required Not required PHI U1I3 QUi Ik Required Not required Functions that require the delta computation function DT option DELTA1 AF1 Not required Not required DELTA2 AF2 Not required Not required DELTA3 AF3 Not required Not required DELTA4 AF4 Not required Not required Functions that require the motor version MV SPEed Speed Not required Not required TORQue Torque Not required Not required SYNCsp SyncSp Not required Not required SLIP Slip Not required Not required PM Pm Not required Not required 760301 17 6 45 6 7 DISPlay Group In addition the function listed below can be used for the following command DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL CURSor FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal Function HCOPy PRI
23. 6 54 FLICker PLT LIMit Sets the limit of the long term flicker value Plt or queries the current setting 6 55 FLICker PLT NVALue Sets constant N for the equation used to compute the long term flicker value or queries the current setting 6 55 FLICker PLT STATe Turns ON OFF judgment of the long term flicker value Plt or queries the current setting 6 55 FLICker PST Queries all settings related to the short term flicker value Pst 6 55 FLICker PST LIMit Sets the limit for the short term flicker value Pst or queries the current setting 6 55 IM 760301 17E 6 7 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page FLICker PST STATe Turns ON OFF judgment of the short term flicker value Pst or queries the current setting 6 55 FLICker RESet Resets measured flicker data 6 55 FLICker STARt Starts flicker measurement 6 55 FLICker STATe Queries the status of flicker measurement 6 55 FLICker UN Queries all settings related to rated voltage Un 6 55 FLICker UN MODE Sets the assignment method for rated voltage Un or queries the current setting 6 55 FLICker UN VALue Sets the predefined rated voltage Un or queries the current setting 6 56 HARMonics Group HARMonics Queries all settings related to harmonic measurement 6 57 HARMonics FBANd Sets the frequency bandwidth of the harmonic measurement or queries the current setting 6 57 HARMonics IEC Queries all settings related to IEC harmonic measurement 6 5
24. Element NR SIGMA SIGMB lt NRf gt 1 to 4 Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST ITEM1 U 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST ITEM1 gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST ITEM1 U 1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ORDer Function Sets the harmonic order cursor position in the data section on the numeric display list display or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ORDer lt NRf gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ORDer lt NRf gt 1 to 100 order Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST ORDER 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST ORDER gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST ORDER 1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option This command is valid when the cursor position DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST CURSor on the numeric display list display is ORDer 760301 17 6 37 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay VAL16 Function Syntax Example DISPlay NUMeric 1 VAL4 VAL8 Queries all settings related to the numeric display 4 8 value 16 value display DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VA
25. Sets the transition filter or queries the current setting Syntax STATus FILTer lt x gt RISE FALL BOTH NEVer STATus FILTer lt x gt x 1 to 16 Example STATUS FILTER2 RISE STATUS FILTER2 gt STATUS FILTER2 RISE Description Specify how each bit of the condition register is to change to set the event If RISE is specified the event is set when the bit changes from 0 to 1 For details on the transition see chapter 7 Status Report STATus QENable Function Sets whether to store messages other than errors to the error queue ON OFF or queries the current setting Syntax STATus QENable lt Boolean gt STATus QENable Example STATUS QENABLE ON STATUS QENABLE gt STATUS QENABLE 1 STATus OMESsage Function Sets whether to attach message information to the response to the STATus ERRor query ON OFF or queries the current setting Syntax STATus OMESsage Boolean STATus OMESsage Example STATUS QMESSAGE STATUS QMESSAGE gt STATUS QMESSAGE 1 IM 760301 17E 6 103 6 104 6 20 STATus Group STATus SPOL1 Serial Poll Function Executes serial polling Syntax STATus SPOL1 Example STATUS SPOLL gt STATUS SPOLL 0 Description This command is dedicated to the optional RS 232 USB or Ethernet interface An interface message is available for the GP IB interface IM 760301 17E
26. 0 2 0 ETA3 0 4 0 1 0 2 0 0 F4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 F12 0 F13 0 F14 0 Fl5 0 16 0 17 0 18 0 19 0 F20 0 FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle Function Queries all settings related to Cycle by Cycle measurement items saved to numeric data files or queries the current setting Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle FILE SAVE NUMERIC CBCYCLE gt FILE SAVE NUMERIC CBCYCLE ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 SIGMA 0 SIGMB 0 FREQ 1 U 1 1 P 1 S 1 0 1 LAMBDA 1 Description Only available with the Cycle by Cycle measurement function CC option Example FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle ALL Function Collectively turns ON OFF the output of all elements and functions when saving numeric data from Cycle by Cycle measurement to a file Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle ALL lt Boolean gt Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC CBCYCLE ALL ON Description Only available with the Cycle by Cycle measurement function CC option FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB Function Turns ON OFF the output of each element when saving numeric data from Cycle by Cycle measurement to a file Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB lt Boolean gt FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle ELEMent x SIGMA SIGMB lt gt 1 to 4 Example FILE SAVE ELEMENT1 ON
27. 1 Description Specify the file name without the extension FILE DRIVe Function Sets the target drive Syntax FILE DRIVe PCCard lt NRf gt NETWork USB lt NR gt lt NR gt lt NR gt PCCard PC card drive lt NRf gt Partition 0 to 3 NETWork Network drive USB USB memory drive 1st lt NRf gt ID number address 2nd lt NRf gt Partition 0 to 3 or LUN logical unit number 0 to 3 3rd lt NRf gt Partition 0 to 3 when LUN is specified Example FILE DRIVE PCCARD Description If the drive does not contain partitions omit the lt NRf gt corresponding to partitions NETWork be used when the Ethernet interface C7 option is installed USB can be used when the USB port peripheral device C5 option is installed The second or third lt NRf gt when USB is selected can be omitted if the drive is not partitioned or divided by LUN FILE FORMat EXECute Function Formats the PC card Syntax FILE FORMat EXECute Example FILE FORMAT EXECUTE FILE FREE Function Queries the free disk space bytes on the drive Syntax FILE FREE Example FILE FREE gt 163840 FILE LOAD ABORt Function _ Aborts file loading Syntax FILE LOAD ABORt Example FILE LOAD ABORT FILE LOAD SETup Function Loads the setup parameter file Syntax FILE LOAD SETup lt Filename gt Example FILE LOAD SETUP SETU
28. U I P S Q See the function selection list 1 of DISPlay group E page 6 44 S Element lt NRf gt SIGMA SIGMB lt NRf gt 9 1to 4 3 Order TOTal DC lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to i 5 100 AOUTPUT NORMAL CHANNEL1 U 1 TOTAL AOUTPUT NORMAL 1 gt AOUTPUT NORMAL CHANNEL1 U 1 TOTAL Description If Element is omitted element 1 is set f Order is omitted TOTal is set Element or Order is omitted from response to functions that do not need them AOUTput 1 IRTime Function Syntax Example Sets the rated integration time for the D A output of integrated values or queries the current setting AOUTput NORMal IRTime NRf lt NRf gt lt NRf gt AOUTput NORMal IRTime gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 0 0 to 10000 0 0 1st lt NRf gt 0 to 10000 hour 2nd lt NRf gt 0 to 59 minute 3rd lt NRf gt 0 to 59 second AOUTPUT NORMAL IRTIME 1 0 0 AOUTPUT NORMAL IRTIME gt AOUTPUT NORMAL IRTIME 1 0 0 IM 760301 17E 6 19 6 3 AOUTput Group AOUTput NORMal MODE lt x gt Function Sets the method of setting the rated value for the D A output items or queries the current setting Syntax AOUTput 1 MODE lt x gt FIXed MANual AOUTput 1 MODE lt x gt lt gt 1 to 20 output channel Example
29. 1 TRIGger MODE Function Syntax Example Sets the trigger mode or queries the current setting CBCycle TRIGger MODE AUTO NORMal CBCycle TRIGger MODE CBCYCLE TRIGGER MODE AUTO CBCYCLE TRIGGER MODE gt CBCYCLE TRIGGER MODE AUTO Description This is the same setting or query as with the sDISPlay WAVE TRIGger MODE command 1 Function Syntax Example Description 1 Function Syntax Example Description TRIGger SLOPe Sets the trigger slope or queries the current setting CBCycle TRIGger SLOPe RISE CBCycle TRIGger SLOPe CBCYCLE TRIGGER SLOPE RISE CBCYCLE TRIGGER SLOPE gt CBCYCLE TRIGGER SLOPE RISE This is the same setting or query as with the DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SLOPe command TRIGger SOURCe Sets the trigger source or queries the current setting CBCycle TRIGger SOURce 0 lt gt lt gt 1 CBCycle TRIGger SOURCe x 1 to 4 element EXTernal External trigger input Ext Clk CBCYCLE TRIGGER SOURCE 01 CBCYCLE TRIGGER SOURCE gt CBCYCLE TRIGGER SOURCE 01 This is the same setting or query as with the DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SOURce command IM 760301 17E 6 23 6 5 COMMunicate Group The commands in this group deal with communications There are no front panel keys that correspond t
30. 6 33 DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt UNIT 5 lt gt 2 6 33 DISPlay MATE iai retener 6 33 DISPlay MODE enne 6 35 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal 6 35 6 35 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL CURSor 6 35 2 2 6 36 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL PAGE 015 6 35 015 015 015 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ITEM lt x gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMaIT LIST ORDer DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST 6 36 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL1 6 CURSO ieiuna pem 6 38 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VALA4 VAL8 VAL 16 6 38 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PAGE 6 38 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL 16 BRBESelt etie elei et te 6 39 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 6 38 DISPlay TRENG ALL Lii 6 39 DISPlay TRENd CLEar 2
31. Boolean 1 1 0000 ELEMENT2 1 0000 Example INPUT CURRENT AUTO ALL ON ELEMENT3 1 0000 ELEMENT4 1 0000 INPUT SYNCHRONIZE ELEMENT1 I1 ELEMENT2 I2 ELEMENT3 I3 ELEMENT4 I4 INPUT NULL 0 6 66 IM 760301 17E 6 14 INPut Group INPut CURRent AUTO ELEMent lt x gt Function Turns ON OFF the current auto range of the element or queries the current setting INPut CURRent AUTO ELEMent x Boolean INPut CURRent AUTO ELEMent x x 1 to 4 element INPUT CURRENT AUTO ELEMENT1 ON INPUT CURRENT AUTO ELEMENT1 gt INPUT CURRENT AUTO ELEMENT1 1 Syntax Example INPut CURRent AUTO SIGMA SIGMB Function Collectively turns ON OFF the current auto range of all elements belonging to wiring unit ZA XB Syntax INPut CURRent AUTO SIGMA SIGMB Boolean Example INPUT CURRENT AUTO SIGMA ON Description INPut CURRent AUTO SIGMA is valid only on models with 2 to 4 elements INPut CURRent AUTO SIGMB is valid only on models with 4 elements This command is invalid if the wiring unit SA SB does not exist as a result of the wiring system setting INPut WIRing INPut CURRent MODE Function Queries the current mode of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent MODE Example INPUT CURRENT MODE gt INPUT CURRENT MODE ELEMENT1 5 ELEMENT2 RMS ELEMENT3 5 ELEMENT4 RMS INPut CURRent MODE ALL Function Collectively sets the
32. FILE SAVE NUMERIC CBCYCLE ELEMENT1 gt FILE SAVE NUMERIC CBCYCLE ELEMENT1 1 Description Only available with the Cycle by Cycle measurement function CC option FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle SIGMA is available for models with 2 elements or more Also to turn output ON wiring unit must exist per the wiring system setting command INPut WIRing FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle SIGMB is valid for models with 4 elements Also to turn output ON wiring unit XB must exist per the wiring system setting command INPut WIRing FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle lt Function gt Function Turns ON OFF the output of each function when saving numeric data from Cycle by Cycle measurement to a file or queries the current setting Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle lt Function gt lt Boolean gt FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle lt Function gt Function FREQ U 1 P S Q LAMBda SPEed TORQue PM Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC CBCYCLE U ON FILE SAVE NUMERIC CBCYCLE U gt FILE SAVE NUMERIC CBCYCLE U 1 Description Only available with the Cycle by Cycle function CC option SPEed TORQue PM is only available with the motor version FILE SAVE NUMeric EXECute Function Saves the numeric data to a file Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric EXECute lt Filename gt Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC EXECUTE NUM1 Description Speci
33. seen 6 79 V Page vector display 6 40 22 rta ro Lee Rene ce en 6 42 Voltage frequency 6 86 voltage measurement 6 71 voltage 6 72 6 82 ABI 6 70 Index 4 IM 760301 17E 22 6 23 CBCycle TRIGger MODE 6 23 waveform display BH 1 2 6 23 waveform display 6 112 CBCycle TRIGger SOURcoe 6 23 WAVefOrm grOUP cue aiiis ig 6 112 6 23 waveform label 6 CBOycle 6 21 Waveform MAPPING SENS D COMMunicate HEADer s 6 24 waveform total number of points 6 112 COMMunicate LOCKout 0 6 24 wiring compensation eee 6 77 COMMunicate OPSE s 6 24 Wiring SYSTEM ricerca con de sna eere t 6 73 COMMunicate OPSR 2222200 6 24 WT3000 manuals siiicar i COMMunicate OVERIap X Page COMMunicate STATus sse 6 25
34. 3 1 Namesiof 2 2 m 3 1 3 2 USB Interface Functions and Specifications 0 4 2 240 010 3 2 3 3 Connection via the USB 4 0 4 00000 nennen 3 3 3 4 Setting the USB Control ee 3 4 Ethernet Interface Option 4 1 Names and Functions 4 1 4 2 Ethernet Interface Functions and 4 2 4 3 Setting the Ethernet Control nennen nnne nnne nnns 4 4 Before Programming 5 1 55 065 m 5 1 MEME OO roe 5 3 5 3 Responses pe 5 4 5 4 5 5 5 5 Synchronization with the Controller 5 7 Communication Commands 6 1 aee o 6 1 6 2 ACQUISILION eric tein tete ere fis cts 6 17 6 3 Group nnne 6 19 64 CBCycle Group ELE 6 21 6 5 COMMunicate Group 6 24 6 6 CURSOF PED De iR E 6 26 6 7 EI STIEVEC oo rc 6 29 68 eat LIE 6 47 n ES dle Ciclo 6 52 610 HARMonics
35. Commands There are three types of commands program headers that are sent from the controller to the instrument They differ in their program header formats Common Command Header Commands that are defined in the IEEE 488 2 1992 are called common commands The header format of a common command is shown below An asterisk is always placed in the beginning of a command Common command example CLS Compound Header Dedicated commands used by the instrument are classified and arranged in a hierarchy according to their functions The format of a compound header is shown below A colon must be used to specify a lower hierarchy Compound header example DISPlay MODE Simple Header These commands are functionally independent and do not have a hierarchy The format of a simple header is shown below Simple header example HOLD Note A mnemonic is a character string made up of alphanumeric characters When Concatenating Commands Command Group A command group is a group of commands that have common compound headers arranged in a hierarchy A command group may contain sub groups Example Group of commands related to harmonic measurement INTEGrate INTEGrate MODE INTEGrate ACAL INTEGrate TIMer INTEGrate RTIMe INTEGrate RTIMe STARt INTEGrate RTIMe END INTEGrate STARt INTEGrate STOP INTEGrate RESet When Concatenating Commands of the Same Group The instrument stores the hierarchic
36. DISPlay CBCycle lt gt lt Function gt lt Element gt DISPlay CBCycle lt gt lt gt 1 to 5 item number Function FREQ U 1 P S Q LAMBda SPEed TORQue PM Element lt NRf gt SIGMA SIGMB lt NRf gt 1 to 4 DISPLAY 1 0 1 DISPLAY CBCYCLE ITEM1 gt DISPLAY 1 U 1 Description Only available with the Cycle by Cycle function CC option When Function FREQ SPEed TORQue PM Element need not be specified Element is omitted from the response When Element is omitted Element 1 is set SPEed TORQue PM is only available with the motor version DISPlay CBCycle PAGE Function Syntax Example Sets the number of the displayed page of the Cycle by Cycle display or queries the current setting DISPlay CBCycle PAGE lt NRf gt DISPlay CBCycle PAGE lt NRf gt 1 to 150 page number DISPLAY CBCYCLE PAGE 1 DISPLAY CBCYCLE PAGE gt DISPLAY CBCYCLE PAGE 1 Description Only available with the Cycle by Cycle function CC option When a page number is set the cursor moves to the top of the specified page DISPlay FFT Function Queries all settings related to the FFT waveform display Syntax DISPlay FFT Example DISPLAY FFT gt DISPLAY FFT FORMAT SINGLE POINT 20000 WINDOW RECTANGLE SCOPE 0 10000 VSCALE LOG SPECTRUM LINE FFT
37. Front Panel REMOTE indicator Turns ON when the WT3000 is in the remote mode controlled via communications LOCAL key Press this key to clear the remote mode controlled via communications and enter the local mode in which key operations are enabled YOKOGAWA W T3000 745398 oves warn E VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE H wove auro E TO DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT 8 L D T wave sane LOCAL 107 lt gt gt mae A U w 9 Cae Ene em n 5 Press this key to configure communications Rear Panel USB connector for connecting to a PC A connector used to connect the WT3000 to the controller such as a PC using a USB cable For the connection procedure see page 3 3
38. ITEM FORM USER eren LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET 1 Y To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys SCALING FILTER AVG MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER SET measure pme source CURSOR O NULL In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 in the User s Manual IM760301 01E IMAGE SAVE MENU STORE SET pt MENU e 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Remote Control soft key to display the Remote Ctrl menu 3 Pressthe Device soft key to select GP IB Only the communication interface selected here is enabled The WT3000 does not accept commands that are transmitted to other unselected communication interfaces 4 Press the cursor keys to set the address Device System Overview GP 1B Remote Control Enter the following settings when using a controller to set information that can be specified through key operation on the WT3000 or when outputting setup parameters or output waveform display data to the controller Address Set the address of the WT3000 within the following range for the addressable mode 0 to 30 Each device that can
39. OPC lt PMT gt Read the response to OPC INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent lt PMT gt COMMunicate OPSE is a command used to select the target Here media access is specified Because does not generate a response until the overlap operation is completed the loading of the file will have been completed by the time the response to is read Note Most commands are sequential commands Overlap commands are indicated as overlap commands in chapter 6 All other commands are sequential commands Achieving Synchronization without Using Overlap Commands Even for sequential commands synchronization is sometimes required to correctly query the measured data If you wish to query the most recent numeric data on every time measured data is updated for example sending the s NUMeric NORMal1 VALue command at arbitrary timing can cause data that is the same as the previous data to be received This is because the WT3000 returns the current measured data regardless of whether the measured data has been updated since the previous query In this case the following method must be used to synchronize with the end of the updating of the measured data Using the STATus CONDition query The STATus CONDition query is used to query the contents of the condition register page 7 7 You can determine whether the measured data is being updated by reading bit O of the condition
40. STORE MODE STORE STORE MODE STORE MODE STORE Example 6 106 IM 760301 17E 6 21 STORe Group STORe NUMeric Function Queries all settings related to the storage of numeric data Syntax STORe NUMeric Example STORE NUMERIC gt STORE NUMERIC NORMAL 1 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 SIGMA 0 SIGMB 0 U 1 1 P 1 S 1 0 1 LAMBDA 1 PHI 1 FU 1 FI 1 UPPEAK 0 UMPEAK 0 IPPEAK 0 IMPEAK 0 CFU 0 0 PC 0 TIME 0 WH 0 WHP 0 WHM 0 AH 0 AHP 0 AHM 0 WS 0 WO 0 2 0 ETA3 0 4 0 1 0 2 0 0 F4 0 F5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 F12 0 F13 0 F14 0 F15 0 16 0 17 0 18 0 F19 0 20 0 STORe NUMeric NORMal Function Queries all settings related to the stored items of numeric data Syntax STORe NUMeric NORMal Example STORE NUMERIC NORMAL gt STORE NUMERIC 1 1 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 SIGMA 0 SIGMB 0 U 1 I 1 P 1 S 1 Q 1 LAMBDA 1 PHI 1 FU 1 FI 1 UPPEAK 0 UMPEAK 0 IPPEAK 0 0 CFU 0 CFI 0 PC 0 0 WH 0 WHP 0 WHM 0 AH 0 AHP 0 AHM 0 WS 0 WO 0 1 0 ETA2 0 4 0 F1 0 F2 0 F3 0 4 0 F5 0 F6 0 F7 0 F8 0 F9 0 10 0 11 0 F12 0 F13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 17 0 18 0 19 0 20 0 STORe NUMeric NORMal ALL Function Collectively turns ON OFF the output of all element functions when storing the numerical data Syntax STORe NUM
41. 3P3W 3V3A NONE No wiring Example for a 4 element model INPUT WIRING P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 INPUT WIRING INPUT WIRING P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 INPUT WIRING P1W3 P3W3 INPUT WIRING gt INPUT WIRING P1W3 P3W3 Example for a 3 element model INPUT WIRING P3W3 P1W2 INPUT WIRING gt INPUT WIRING P3W3 P1W2 INPUT WIRING P3W4 INPUT WIRING gt INPUT WIRING P3W4 Description Set the wiring system pattern in order starting from the element with the smallest number Some wiring system patterns may not be selectable depending on the model type For details on the wiring system patterns see the User s Manual IM760301 01E The pattern is fixed to P1W2 on the 1 element model All other settings are not allowed IM 760301 17E 6 73 6 15 INTEGrate Group The commands in this group deal with integration You can make the same settings and inquiries as when INTEG on the front panel is used INTEGrate Function Queries all settings related to the integration Syntax INTEGrate Example INTEGRATE INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL ACAL 0 TIMER 1 0 0 INTEGrate ACAL Function Turns ON OFF the auto calibration or queries the current setting Syntax INTEGrate ACAL Boolean INTEGrate ACAL Example INTEGRATE ACAL OFF INTEGRATE ACAL gt INTEGRATE ACAL 0 INTEGrate MODE Function Sets the integration mode or queries the current set
42. ALL Collectively sets the current ranges of all elements INPut CURRent RANGe ALL Current EXTernal lt Voltage gt With the standard power element models 760301 01 through 760304 04 When the crest factor is set to 3 Current 500 mA 1 2 5 10 20 30 A for direct current input Voltage 50 100 200 500 mV 1 2 5 10 for external current sensor input When the crest factor is set to 6 lt Current gt 250 500 mA 1 2 5 5 10 15 A for direct current input lt Voltage gt 25 50 100 250 500 mV 1 2 5 5 V for external current sensor input With the low current range power element models 760301 10 through 760304 40 When crest factor is set to 3 lt Current gt 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 mA 1 2 A with direct current input lt Voltage gt 50 100 200 500 mV 1 2 5 10 V with external current sensor input When crest factor is set to 6 lt Current gt 2 5 5 10 25 50 100 250 500 mA 1 A with direct current input lt Voltage gt 25 50 100 250 500 mV 1 2 5 5 V with external current sensor input INPUT CURRENT RANGE ALL 30A INPUT CURRENT RANGE ALL EXTERNAL 10V 760301 17 6 67 6 14 INPut Group INPut CURRent RANGe ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets the current range of the element or queries the current setting Syntax INPut CU
43. CBCycle FILTer LINE CBCycle FILTer LINE ALL Sets the output byte order of the waveform sampling data FLOAT format that is transmitted by ACQUisition SEND or queries the current setting 6 17 Sets the output end point of the waveform sampling data that is transmitted by ACQUisition SEND or queries the current setting 6 17 Sets the format of the waveform sampling data that is transmitted by sACQuisition SEND or queries the current setting 6 17 Sets whether to hold ON or release OFF all the waveform sampling data or queries the current setting 6 17 Queries the total number of points of the waveform sampling data specified by ACQuisition TRACe 6 18 Queries the waveform sampling data specified by ACOuisition TRACe 6 18 Queries the sampling rate of the retrieved data 6 18 Sets the output start point of the waveform sampling data that is transmitted by ACQuisition SEND or queries the current setting 6 18 Sets the target trace ACQuisition SEND or queries the current setting 6 18 Queries all settings related to the D A output 6 19 Queries all settings related to the D A output 6 19 Sets the D A output items function element and harmonic order or queries the current setting 6 19 Sets the rated integration time for the D A output of integrated values or queries the current setting 6 19 Sets the method of setting the rated value for the D A output items or queries the
44. ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 lt NRf gt 1 00 to 99 99 limit INTERVAL 10 0 COUNT 12 Example FLICKER DC LIMIT 3 30 FREQUENCY 50 UN MODE AUTO FLICKER DC LIMIT gt VALUE 230 00 FLICKER DC STATE 1 FLICKER DC LIMIT 3 30 LIMIT 3 30 FLICKER DMAX STATE 1 LIMIT 4 00 FLICKER DT STATE 1 FLICker DC STATe LIMIT 500 3 30 FLICKER PST Function Turns ON OFF judgment of the relative steady STATE 1 LIMIT 1 00 FLICKER PLT state voltage change dc or queries the current STATE 1 LIMIT 0 65 NVALUE 12 setting FLICKER DMIN LIMIT 0 10 Syntax FLICker DC STATe lt Boolean gt FLICker DC STATe FLICker COUNt Example FLICKER DC STATE ON Function Sets the number of measurements for the short FLICKER DC STATE gt term flicker value Pst or queries the current FLICKER DC STATE 1 setting Syntax FLICker COUNt lt NRf gt FLICker DISPlay FLICker COUNt Function Queries all settings related to flicker lt NRf gt 1 to 99 no of measurements measurement display Example FLICKER COUNT 12 Syntax FLICker DISPlay FLICKER COUNT gt Example FLICKER DISPLAY gt FLICKER COUNT 12 FLICKER DISPLAY ELEMENT 1 PERIOD 1 Description This setting is available with normal flicker measurement FLICker MEASurement FLICker DISPlay ELEMent FLICker Function Sets the element to be displayed for flicker For measurement of dmax caused by manual measurement display or queries the current switching FLICker MEASurement DMAX setting
45. Function Queries all settings related to the torque Syntax MOTor TORQue Example MOTOR TORQUE gt MOTOR TORQUE TYPE ANALOG RANGE 20 0 00 0 SCALING 1 0000 UNIT Nm 6 82 IM 760301 17E 6 17 MOTor Group MOTor TORQue AUTO Function Turns ON OFF the voltage auto range of the torque signal input analog input format or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor TORQue AUTO Boolean MOTor TORQue AUTO Example MOTOR TORQUE AUTO ON MOTOR TORQUE AUTO gt MOTOR TORQUE AUTO 1 Description This command is valid when the torque signal input type MOTor TORQue is ANALog analog input MOTor TORQue PRANge Function Sets the range of the torque pulse input format or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor TORQue PRANge lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MOTor TORQue PRANge lt NRf gt 10000 0000 to 10000 0000 Example MOTOR TORQUE PRANGE 50 50 MOTOR TORQUE PRANGE gt MOTOR TORQUE PRANGE 50 0000 50 0000 Description Set the upper limit and then the lower limit This command is valid when the torque signal input type MOTor TORQue TYPE is PULSe pulse input MOTor TORQue RANGe Function Sets the voltage range of the torque signal input analog input format or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor TORQue RANGe lt Voltage gt MOTor TORQue RANGe lt voltage gt 1 2 5 10 or 20 V Example TORQUE
46. REMOTE gt COMMUNICATE 1 Description This command is dedicated to the optional RS 232 USB or Ethernet interface An interface message is available for the GP IB interface 6 24 IM 760301 17E 6 5 COMMunicate STATus Function Queries line specific status Syntax COMMunicate STATus Example COMMUNICATE STATUS gt COMMUNICATE STATUS 0 Description The meaning of each status bit is as follows Bit GP IB RS 232 0 Unrecoverable Parity error transmission error 1 Always 0 Framing error 2 Always 0 Break character detected 3 or greater Always 0 Always 0 The value 0 is always returned for the optional USB or Ethernet interface The status bit is set when the corresponding cause occurs and cleared when it is read COMMunicate VERBose Function Sets whether to return the response to a query using full spelling example INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE ELEMENT 1 1 000E 03 or using abbreviation example VOLT RANG ELEM 1 000E 03 Syntax COMMunicate VERBose lt Boolean gt COMMunicate VERBose Example COMMUNICATE VERBOSE ON COMMUNICATE VERBOSE gt COMMUNICATE VERBOSE 1 COMMunicate WAIT Function Waits for one of the specified extended events to occur Syntax COMMunicate WAIT lt Register gt lt Register gt 0 to 65535 extended event register see page 7 7 Example COMMUNICATE WAIT 1 Description For the description regarding
47. STORE FILE TYPE ASCII IM 760301 17E 6 105 6 21 5 STORe INTerval Function Sets the store interval or queries the current setting Syntax STORe INTerval lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt STORe INTerval 1st lt NRf gt 0 to 99 hour 2nd lt NRf gt 0 to 59 minute 3rd lt NRf gt 1 to 59 second Example STORE INTERVAL 0 0 0 STORE INTERVAL gt STORE INTERVAL 0 0 0 STORe ITEM Function Sets the stored item or queries the current setting Syntax STORe ITEM NUMeric WAVE NWAVe STORe ITEM NUMeric Store only the numeric data WAVE Store only the waveform display data NWAVe Store both the numeric data and waveform display data Example STORE ITEM NUMERIC STORE ITEM gt STORE ITEM NUMERIC STORe MEMory Function Queries all settings related to the storage memory Syntax 5 MEMory Example STORE MEMORY gt STORE MEMORY ALERT 1 STORe MEMory ALERt Function Sets whether to display a confirmation message when clearing the storage memory or queries the current setting Syntax STORe MEMory ALERt lt Boolean gt STORe MEMory ALERt Example STORE MEMORY ALERT ON STORE MEMORY ALERT gt STORE MEMORY ALERT 1 Description The initialization takes place immediately when initializing the storage memory using the STORe MEMory INITialize command regardless of the setting specified with this command STOR
48. This command is invalid if the wiring unit SA SB does not exist as a result of the wiring system setting INPut WIRing INPut INPut INPut INPut VOLTage Queries all settings related to the voltage measurement INPut VOLTage INPUT VOLTAGE INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE ELEMENT1 1 000 03 ELEMENT2 1 000 03 ELEMENT3 1 000 03 ELEMENT4 1 000 03 AUTO ELEMENT1 0 2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 INPUT VOLTAGE 1 RMS ELEMENT2 RMS ELEMENT3 RMS ELEMENT4 RMS VOLTage AUTO Queries the voltage auto range setting ON OFF of all elements INPut VOLTage AUTO INPUT VOLTAGE AUTO gt INPUT VOLTAGE AUTO ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 VOLTage AUTO ALL Collectively turns ON OFF the voltage auto range of all elements INPut VOLTage AUTO ALL Boolean INPUT VOLTAGE AUTO ALL ON VOLTage AUTO ELEMent lt x gt Turns ON OFF the voltage auto range of the element or queries the current setting INPut VOLTage AUTO ELEMent x Boolean INPut VOLTage AUTO ELEMent lt x gt x 1 to 4 element INPUT VOLTAGE AUTO ELEMENT1 INPUT VOLTAGE AUTO ELEMENT1 gt INPUT VOLTAGE AUTO ELEMENT1 1 VOLTage AUTO SIGMA SIGMB Collectively turns ON OFF the voltage auto range of all elem
49. VAL8 VAL16 Queries all settings related to the numeric display 4 value 8 value 16 value display 6 38 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 CURSor Sets the cursor position on the numeric display 4 value 8 value 16 value display or queries the current setting 6 38 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 ITEM lt x gt Sets the displayed items function element and harmonic order on the numeric display 4 value 8 value 16 value display or queries the current setting 6 38 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PAGE Sets the page number on the numeric display 4 value 8 value 16 value display or queries the current setting 6 38 6 4 IM 760301 17E 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PRESet Presets the display order pattern of displayed items on the numeric display 4 value 8 value 16 value display 6 39 DISPlay TRENd Queries all settings related to the trend 6 39 DISPlay TRENd ALL Collectively turns ON OFF all trends 6 39 DISPlay TRENd CLEar Clears the trend 6 39 DISPlay TRENd FORMat Sets the display format of the trend or queries the current setting 6 39 DISPlay TRENd lt gt Queries all settings related to the trend 6 39 DISPlay TRENd lt gt FUNCtion Sets the trend item function element and harmonic order or queries the curre
50. WAVeform LENGth Function Queries the total number of points of the waveform specified by WAVeform TRACe Syntax WAVeform LENGth Example WAVEFORM LENGTH gt 1002 Description The number of data points is fixed 1002 is always returned 6 112 IM 760301 17E 6 23 WAVeform Group WAVeform SEND Function Queries the waveform display data specified by WAVeform TRACe Syntax WAVeform SEND Example When WAVeform FORMat is set to ASCii WAVEFORM SEND gt lt NR3 gt lt NR3 gt When WAVeform FORMat is set to FLOat WAVEFORM SEND gt 4 number of bytes 4 digits data byte sequence Description The format of the waveform display data that is output varies depending on the WAVeform FORMat setting as follows 1 When Ascii is specified The physical value is output in the lt NR3 gt format The data of each point is delimited by a comma 2 When FLOat is specified The physical value is output in IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format The output byte order of the data of each point follows the order that is set using the WAVeform BYTeorder command If there is no waveform display data even when the display mode DISPlay MODE is set to a mode to display waveforms the data is output as follows 1 When AsCii is specified The data of all points are output as NAN 2 When FLOat is specified The da
51. e 6 66 ecd 2 6 C 6 70 current directoty norte tnnt 6 47 current measurement 6 66 current mode 6 67 curent range cioe ett eee cei ersten 6 67 current sensor scaling constant 6 69 CURSO eie cie ert eem trc nt opes cursor measurements cutoff frequericy eene Cycle number iniret rentrer D Page oli m 6 53 D A oUtp lt retten et niente dinis 6 19 D A output terms iir ctore 6 19 6 20 5 5 data byte sequence reete tnos 5 6 data formal rtr 2 7 2 9 data update rate oc Do P Do e deadlock 10121 2112 delta 6 77 Delta to Star conversion 6 78 I 1 5 2 8 4 4 DIFFerence 6 78 differential current 8 6 78 differential voltage eene 6 78 direct Input eerte tnr rrr 6 67 pes 6 4
52. gt DISPLAY WAVE FORMAT SINGLE DISPlay Function Syntax Example DISPlay Function Syntax Example DISPlay Function Syntax Example DISPlay Function Syntax Example WAVE GRATicule Sets the graticule grid type or queries the current setting DISPlay WAVE GRATicule GRID FRAMe CROSshair DISPlay WAVE GRATicule DISPLAY WAVE GRATICULE GRID DISPLAY WAVE GRATICULE gt DISPLAY WAVE GRATICULE GRID WAVE INTerpolate Sets the interpolation method of the waveform or queries the current setting DISPlay WAVE INTerpolate OFF LINE DISPlay WAVE INTerpolate DISPLAY WAVE INTERPOLATE LINE DISPLAY WAVE INTERPOLATE DISPLAY WAVE INTERPOLATE LINE WAVE MAPPing Queries all settings related to the waveform mapping to the split screen DISPlay WAVE MAPPing DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING gt DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING MODE USER 01 0 U2 1 U3 2 U4 3 I1 0 12 1 13 2 I4 3 WAVE MAPPing MODE Sets the waveform mapping method for the split Screen or queries the current setting DISPlay WAVE MAPPing MODE AUTO FIXed USER DISPlay WAVE MAPPing MODE DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING MODE AUTO DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING MODE gt DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING MODE AUTO 760301 17 6 41 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay WAVE 1 U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue MATH lt x gt Function Syntax Example Sets t
53. numeric data from Cycle by Cycle measurement to a file 6 49 FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle lt Function gt Turns ON OFF the output of each function when saving numeric data from Cycle by Cycle measurement to a file or queries the current setting 6 49 FILE SAVE NUMeric EXECute Saves the numeric data to a file 6 49 FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal Queries all settings related to the items saved to numeric data files 6 50 FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal ALL Collectively turns ON OFF the output of all element functions when saving the numeric data to a file 6 50 FILE SAVE NUMeric 1 ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB Turns ON OFF the output of each element XB when saving the numeric data to a file 6 50 FILE SAVE NUMeric 1 PRESet lt x gt Presets the output ON OFF pattern of the element function for saving the numeric data to a file 6 50 FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal lt Function gt Turns ON OFF the output of the function when saving the numerical data to a file or queries the current setting 6 50 IM 760301 17E 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page FILE SAVE NUMeric TYPE Sets the format of the numeric data to be saved or queries the current setting 6 50 FILE SAVE SETup EXECute Executes the saving of the setup parameter file 6 50 FILE SAVE WAVE Queries all settings related to the saving of waveform display data files 6 50 FILE SAVE WA
54. or queries the current setting Syntax ACQuisition TRACe U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue MATH lt x gt FFT lt x gt ACQuisition TRACe x of U lt x gt lt gt 1 to 4 element x of MATH lt x gt 1 to 2 MATH lt gt of FFT lt x gt 1 or 2 FFT Example ACQUISITION TRACE 01 ACQUISITION TRACE gt ACQUISITION TRACE 01 Description SPEed TORQue are valid only on the motor version MV IM 760301 17E 6 3 AOUTput Group The commands in this group deal with the D A output You can make the same settings and inquiries as when the D A Output Items menu of MISC on the front panel is used However the commands in this group are valid only when the D A output DA option is installed AOUTput Function Queries all settings related to the D A output Syntax AOUTput Example AOUTPUT Same as the response to s AOUTput NORMa1 AOUTput NORMal Function Queries all settings related to the D A output Syntax AOUTput NORMal1 Example AOUTPUT NORMAL gt AOUTPUT NORMAL CHANNEL1 U 1 TOTAL CHANNEL2 CHANNEL3 CHANNEL4 CHANNEL5 CHANNEL6 CHANNEL7 CHANNEL9 CHANNEL11 CHANNEL13 CHANNEL15 CHANNE CHANNE MODE1 MODE3 MODE5 MODE7 MODE9 MODE11 FIXED MODE12 FIXED MODE14 FIXED MODE16 FIXED MODE18 FIXED MODE20 MODE13 MODE15 MODE17 MODE19 RATE1 RATE2 RATE3 RATE4 RATE5 RATE6 RATE7 RATE8 RATE9 RATE10 RATE11 RAT
55. 0 to 59 minute 6th lt NRf gt 0 to 59 second Example STORE RTIME START 2005 1 1 0 0 0 STORE RTIME START gt STORE RTIME START 2005 1 1 0 0 0 Description This command is valid when the store mode STORe SMODe is set to RTIMe real time store mode STORe SMODe Function Sets the store mode or queries the current setting Syntax STORe SMODe MANual RTIMe INTEGrate STORe SMODe MANual Manual store mode RTIMe Real time store mode INTEGrate Integration synchronization store mode Example STORE SMODE MANUAL STORE SMODE gt STORE SMODE MANUAL STORe STARt Function Starts the data store operation Syntax STORe STARt Example STORE START Description When STORe SMODe is set to MANual the Storage operation is executed When set to RTIMe INTEGrate the WT3000 enters the store wait state STORe STOP Function Stops the data storage operation Syntax STORe STOP Example STORE STOP STORe WAVE Function Queries all settings related to the storage of waveform display data Syntax STORe WAVE Example STORE WAVE gt STORE WAVE U1 1 U2 0 U3 0 04 0 11 1 I2 0 13 0 14 0 STORe WAVE ALL Function Collectively turns ON OFF the output of all waveforms when storing waveform display data Syntax STORe WAVE ALL lt Boolean gt Example STORE WAVE ALL ON STORe WAVE U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue Function Turns ON OFF the output of the waveform w
56. 00 Example in which NUMeric FORMat is set to FLOat NUMERIC CBCYCLE VALUE 6 number of bytes six digits data byte Sequence Description Only available with the Cycle by Cycle function CC option Numeric list data consists of up to 3000 numeric data from NUMeric CBCycle STARt to Numeric CBCycle END parameters are specified the numeric list data of that item is output For a description of the contents of lt Function gt and lt Element gt see the description for NUMeric CBCycle ITEM Ifthe parameter is omitted the numeric list data for the items specified in sNUMeric CBCycle ITEM is output Forthe format of the individual numeric data that are output see Numeric Data Format at the end of this group page 6 98 NUMeric FLICker Function Queries all settings related to output of numeric data from flicker measurement Syntax NUMeric FLICker Example NUMERIC FLICKER gt NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION NUMBER 8 TIME ITEM2 UN 1 ITEM3 FU 1 ITEM4 DC 1 CURRENT ITEM5 DMAX 1 CURRENT ITEM6 DT 1 CURRENT ITEM7 PST 1 CURRENT ITEM8 PLT 1 NUMERIC FLICKER INFORMATION NUMBER 7 ITEM1 JTOTAL TOTAL ITEM2 JDC 1 ALL ITEM3 JDMAX 1 ALL ITEM4 JDT 1 ALL ITEM5 JPST 1 ALL ITEM6 JPLT 1 ITEM7 JTOTAL 1 Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option NUMeric FLICker COUNt Function Queries the number of the measurement wi
57. 6 108 2 STORe WAVE U lt x gt lt gt SPEed TORQue 3 Turns ON OFF the output of the waveform when storing the waveform E display data or queries the current setting 6 108 SYSTem Group SYSTem Queries all settings related to the system 6 109 SYSTem CLOCk Queries all settings related to the date time 6 109 SYSTem CLOCk DISPlay Turns ON OFF the date time display or queries the current setting 6 109 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP Queries all settings related to the date time acquired via SNTP 6 109 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP EXECute Sets the date time via SNTP 6 109 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime Sets the difference from Greenwich Mean Time or queries the current setting 6 109 SYSTem CLOCk TYPE Sets the date time setting method or queries the current setting 6 109 SYSTem DATE Sets the date or queries the current setting 6 109 SYSTem ECLear Clears the error message displayed on the screen 6 109 SYSTem FONT Sets the display font or queries the current setting 6 109 SYSTem KLOCk Turns ON OFF the key lock or queries the current setting 6 110 SYSTem LANGuage Queries all settings related to the display language 6 110 SYSTem LANGuage MENU Sets the menu language or queries the current setting 6 110 SYSTem LANGuage MESSage Sets the message language or queries the current setting 6 110 SYSTem LCD Queries all settings related to the LCD monitor 6 110 SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor or qu
58. 6 21 STORe Group The commands in this group deal with store and recall You can make the same settings and inquiries as when STORE and STORE SET SHIFT STORE on the front panel is used STORe Function Queries all settings related to store and recall Syntax STORe Example STORE gt STORE MODE STORE DIRECTION MEMORY SMODE MANUAL COUNT 100 INTERVAL 0 0 0 ITEM NUMERIC NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 SIGMA 0 SIGMB 0 U 1 I 1 1 5 1 0 1 LAMBDA 1 PHI 1 FU 1 FI 1 UPPEAK 0 UMPEAK 0 IPPEAK 0 0 CFU 0 0 PC 0 TIME 0 WH 0 WHP 0 WHM 0 AH 0 0 0 WS 0 WO 0 1 0 ETA2 0 ETA3 0 4 0 F1 0 F2 0 F3 0 F4 0 F5 0 F6 0 F7 0 F8 0 F9 0 10 0 11 0 F12 0 F13 0 F14 0 15 0 F16 0 F17 0 F18 0 F19 0 F20 0 STORE MEMORY ALERT 1 STORe COUNt Function Sets the store count or queries the current setting Syntax STORe COUNt lt NRf gt STORe COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 999999 Example STORE COUNT 100 STORE COUNT gt STORE COUNT 100 STORe DIRection Function Sets the store destination or queries the current setting Syntax STORe DIRection MEMory FILE STORe DIRection Example STORE DIRECTION MEMORY STORE DIRECTION gt STORE DIRECTION MEMORY STORe FILE Function Queries all settings related to the saving of the stored data Syntax STORe FILE Example STORE FILE gt STORE FILE TYPE ASCII ANAMING 1 NAME DATAI COMMENT CAS
59. 6 51 FIBE SAVE WAVE 6 50 FILE SAVE WAVET EXEQOuUte 2 6 51 H 6 48 jd rS 6 47 rt 6 52 SFLIC Ker ener ren er 6 52 uei Boy ieie 6 52 FElCker DO S TATe 2 reete rcs 6 52 FLICker DISPlay ELEMent 2 21 6 52 6 53 FElCker DISPlay PERIOGd 6 53 eie 6 52 FLICker DMAXCLIMit SFUIG Ken DMAX inerte rien n een ER 6 53 FEIGkertDMAX STATe iioii iis reiten 6 53 FLICker DMIN LIMit 6 53 SFUICKERDMIN neci itte pte 6 53 FBIOkerDTEIMIE eiit rrr t 6 53 A 6 53 FElCker D T S TATe tee FLICker ELEMent lt x gt FLICkKer FREQUENCY acte re 2 teet tit eei FElGketillNTerval icri rere rtr SFUICKERIUD GG octo rettet FLICker MEASurement FElGkerMOVe eerie ceres FElCker PETELIMIt iii itin iere rs FEIGKerP ENVALIe tcr ee EBIGKeC PET 6 54 cata ceti tns 6 55 FEICkerPSTLEIMIE inrer rr rre pns 6 55 je luct M 6 55 FElCker PST S TAT6 a uten ieu 6 55 e 6 55 EBICker
60. AAOUTput NORMAaI unt cei oni eos 6 19 CURSor WAVE X x DX PERDI Y x DY 6 28 AOUTDUE 6 19 Ls 6 28 AOUTput NORMa CHANnel x 6 19 6 28 eene 6 19 6 26 AOUTput NORMAal MODE lt X gt 6 20 DISPlay BAR FORMat 6 29 AOUT put NORMal RATE lt X gt 6 20 DISPlay BAR ITEM xe ett 6 29 CBOycle GOUNE 6 21 DISPlay BAR ORDer nee 6 30 CBCycle DISPlay CURSof 6 21 1 26 29 CBCycle DISPlay ITEM lt X gt 2 6 21 DISPlay CBOycle CURSor ees 6 30 CBOycle DISPlay PAGE 6 21 DISPlay CBCycle ITEM exs 6 30 CBOycle DISPlay 6 21 DISPlay CBCycle PAGE e 6 30 CBOycle FILTer LINE DISPlay CBCycle ttt 6 30 CBOycle FIETer uicit 6 22 DISPlay FFET FET lt x gt LABel CBCycle FiLTer LINE ELEMent lt x gt 6 22 DISPlay FFT FFT x OBJect CBOycle FILTer LINE MOTor 6 22 DISPlay FFTFFTex 1n 6 31 CBOycle FILTer LINE ALL ceee 6 22 DISPlay FFT FFTex STATe 6 31 CBOycle RESet DISPlay F
61. DY Y axis value between cursors AY lt gt 1 2 1 1 2 2 CURSOR TREND X1 gt 2005 01 01 12 34 56 CURSOR TREND Y1 gt 78 628E 00 If the cursor display is not turned ON on the trend the following results For lt gt v is returned For Y x and DY NAN Not A Number is returned IM 760301 17E 6 27 6 6 CURSor Group CURSor WAVE Function Queries all settings related to the cursor measurement on the waveform display Syntax CURSor WAVE Example CURSOR WAVE gt CURSOR WAVE STATE 1 1 U1 TRACE2 11 PATH MAX POSITION1 10 0E 03 POSITION2 40 0E 03 CURSor WAVE PATH Function Sets the cursor path on the waveform display or queries the current setting Syntax CURSor WAVE PATH MAX MIN MID CURSor WAVE PATH Example CURSOR WAVE PATH CURSOR WAVE PATH gt CURSOR WAVE PATH CURSor WAVE POSition lt x gt Function Sets the cursor position on the waveform display or queries the current setting Syntax CURSor WAVE POSition lt x gt lt Time gt CURSor WAVE POSition lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 1 C1 2 C2x lt Time gt 0 to 20 00 Example CURSOR WAVE POSITION1 10MS CURSOR WAVE POSITION1 gt CURSOR WAVE POSITION1 10 0E 03 Description The selectable range and resolution of Time is determined by the Time div value of the waveform DISPlay WAVE TDIV CURSor WAVE STATe Function Turns ON
62. Data storage of data resumes when there is free space in the buffer Data Receiving Control using Handshaking 256 bytes gt When handshaking is in use reception of data will stop when the free space in the buffer drops to 64 da bytes since data cannot be passed to Used Free 64 bytes the main program fast enough to keep up with the transmission After reception of data stops data continues to be passed to the internal program Reception of data starts lm cn dm again when the free space in the Used Free 192 bytes buffer increases to 192 bytes Whether handshaking is in use or not if the buffer becomes full any additional data received is no longer Used stored and is lost Note _____ The program must be designed so that the received buffers of both the WT3000 and the PC do not become full IM 760301 17E 2 5 Combination of Data Formats The RS 232 interface of the WT3000 performs communications using start stop synchronization In start stop synchronization characters are transmitted one at a time Each character consists of a start bit data bits a parity bit and a stop bit see the following figure Level returns to idle state dotted line Circuit idle state 1 character gt until the start bit of the next item of data lt Data bit solid line 7 or 8 bits de te Stop bit 4 e ae Parity bit Start bit Even odd or none 1 or 2 bits
63. G6 option MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing Queries all settings related to the scaling of the computed waveform 5 1 MATH lt x gt SCALing x 1 2 MATH DISPLAY MATH MATH1 gt DISPLAY MATH MATH1 SCALING MODE AUTO CENTER 0 0000E 00 SDIV 25 000E 00 This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option 760301 17 6 33 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing CENTer Function Syntax Example Sets the center value of the manual scaling of the computed waveform or queries the current setting DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing CENTer lt NRf gt 5 1 MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing CENTer lt gt 1 2 MATH lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 DISPLAY MATH 1 SCALING CENTER 0 0000E 00 DISPLAY MATH MATH1 SCALING CENTER gt DISPLAY MATH MATH1 SCALING CENTER 0 0000E 00 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option This command is valid when the scaling mode of the computed waveform DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing MODE is set to MANual DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing MODE Function Syntax Example Sets the scaling mode of the computed waveform or queries the current setting DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt
64. IALL lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 1 to 100 see the User s Manual 1 760301 01 Example DISPLAY WAVE VZOOM UALL 1 DISPlay WAVE VZoom U lt x gt I lt x gt Function Sets the vertical zoom factor of the waveform voltage current of the element or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay WAVE VZoom U lt x gt I lt x gt lt NRf gt DISPlay WAVE VZoom U lt x gt I lt x gt x 1 to 4 element lt NRf gt 0 1 to 100 see the User s Manual 1 760301 01 Example DISPLAY WAVE VZOOM U1 1 DISPLAY WAVE VZOOM U1 gt DISPLAY WAVE VZOOM U1 1 00 IM 760301 17E 6 43 6 7 DISPlay Group Function Selection lt Function gt List 1 Function of numeric data Applicable commands AOUTput NORMal DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 ITEM lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion NUMeric NORMal lt gt Function name used Function name used Elements Order in commands on the menu Numeric display header name U U Urms Umn Udc Urmn Required Required Irms Imn ldc Irmn Required Required P P Required Required 5 5 Required Required Q Q Required Required LAMBda A Required Required PHI Required Required FU FreqU fU Required Not required FI Fregl fl Required Not required UPPeak U peak U pk Required Not required UMPeak U peak U pk Required
65. NM A A A T A A d Econ CURRENT CURRENT C A A sPeeo 4 1 5 ime 22 A GA carn c carn ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS AL TERMINALS Q A TOON MAX TO 7 Avas 100 240V AC 200A FUSE 250V T 63A IM 760301 17E 4 1 4 2 Ethernet Interface Functions and Specifications You can control the WT3000 from a PC using the Ethernet interface Details about specific functions and how to enter settings are provided below Receiving Function You can specify the same settings as those specified by front panel key operations Receives output requests for measured and computed data setup parameters of the panel and error codes Sending Function Outputs measured and computed data Outputs panel setup parameters and the status byte Outputs error codes that have occurred Switching between Remote and Local Modes When Switching from Local to Remote Mode If the WT3000 receives a COMMunicate REMote ON command from the PC when it is in the local mode it switches to the remote mode
66. Query Error Set to 1 if the output queue is empty or if the data is missing even after a query has been sent Example response data data is lost due to an overflow in the output queue suodey snieis Bit Request Control Not used always 0 Bit 0 OPC Operation Complete Set to 1 when the operation designated by the command see chapter 6 has been completed Bit Masking If you wish to mask a certain bit of the standard event register so that it does not cause bit 5 ESB of the status byte to change set the corresponding bit of the standard event enable register to 0 For example to mask bit 2 QYE so that ESB is not set to 1 even if a query error occurs set bit 2 of the standard event enable register to 0 This can be done using the ESE command To query whether each bit of the standard event enable register is 1 or 0 use the ESE For details on the ESE command see chapter 6 760301 17 7 5 7 3 Standard Event Register Operation of the Standard Event Register The standard event register is provided for eight different kinds of event which can occur inside the instrument Bit 5 ESB of the status byte is set to 1 when any of the bits in this register becomes 1 or when the corresponding bit of the standard event enable register becomes 1 Example 1 A query error occurs 2 Bit 2 QYE is set to 1 3 Bit 5 ESB of the status byte is set to 1 if bit 2 of the standard event enable regi
67. RANGE 20V MOTOR TORQUE RANGE gt MOTOR TORQUE RANGE 20 0 00 Description This command is valid when the torque signal input type MOTor TORQue TYPE is ANALog analog input MOTor TORQue RATE Function Queries all settings related to the rated value of the torque signal pulse input format Syntax MOTor TORQue RATE Example MOTOR TORQUE RATE gt TORQUE RATE UPPER 50 0000 15 000E 03 LOWER 50 0000 5 000E 03 MOTor TORQue RATE UPPer LOWer Function Sets the rated value upper limit lower limit of the torque signal pulse input format or queries the current setting Syntax TORQue RATE UPPer LOWer lt NRf gt lt Frequency gt lt NRf gt 10000 0000 to 10000 0000 lt Frequency gt 1 Hz to 100 MHz Example MOTOR TORQUE RATE UPPER 50 15kHz MOTOR TORQUE RATE UPPER gt MOTOR TORQUE RATE UPPER 50 0000 15 000 03 Description This command is valid when the torque signal input type MOTor TORQue is PULSe pulse input MOTor TORQue SCALing Function Sets the scaling factor used for torque computation or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor TORQue SCALing lt gt MOTor TORQue SCALing lt NRf gt 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example TORQUE SCALING 1 TORQUE SCALING gt MOTOR TORQUE SCALING 1 0000 MOTor TORQue Function Sets the input type of
68. RANge ELEMent 1 itself is completed This type of command is called a sequential command On the contrary let us assume that you send the next program message when you wish to load a file and query the voltage range of the result FILE LOAD SETup FILE1 INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 In this case INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 is executed before the loading of the file is completed and the voltage range that is returned is the value before the file is loaded The act of executing the next command before the processing of itself is completed such as with FILE LOAD SETup is called an overlap operation A command that operates in this way is called an overlap command In such case the overlap operation can be prevented by using the methods below Synchronizing with Overlap Commands Using the WAI Command The WAI command holds the subsequent commands until the overlap command is completed Example COMMunicate OPSE H0040 FILE LOAD SETup FILE1 WAI INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMentl1 PMT COMMunicate OPSE is a command used to select the WAI target Here media access is specified Because WAI is executed immediately before s INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 INPut VOLTage RANGE ELEMent 1 is not executed until the loading of the file is completed Using the COMMunicate OVERlap command The coMMunicate OVERlap command enables or disables overlap operation Ex
69. SAVE ANAMing Sets whether to automatically name the screen image data files to be saved i or queries the current setting 6 64 2 IMAGe SAVE CDIRectory Changes the save destination directory for the screen image data 6 64 IMAGe SAVE DRIVe Sets the save destination drive for the screen image data 6 65 IMAGe SAVE NAME Sets the name of the file for saving the screen image data or queries the current setting 6 65 IMAGe SEND Queries the screen image data 6 65 INPut Group INPut Queries all settings related to the input element 6 66 INPut CFACtor Sets the crest factor or queries the current setting 6 66 INPut CURRent Queries all settings related to the current measurement 6 66 INPut CURRent AUTO Queries the current auto range ON OFF setting of all elements 6 66 INPut CURRent AUTO ALL Collectively turns ON OFF the current auto range of all elements 6 66 INPut CURRent AUTO ELEMent x Turns ON OFF the current auto range of the element or queries the current setting 6 67 INPut CURRent AUTO SIGMA 5 Collectively turns ON OFF the current auto range of all elements belonging to wiring unit ZB 6 67 INPut CURRent MODE Queries the current mode of all elements 6 67 INPut CURRent MODE ALL Collectively sets the current mode of all elements 6 67 INPut CURRent MODE ELEMent x Sets the current mode of the element or queries the current setting 6 67 INPut CURRent MODE SI
70. SCALing MODE AUTO MANual DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing MODE x 1 2 MATH DISPLAY MATH MATH1 SCALING MODE AUTO DISPLAY MATH MATH1 SCALING MODE gt DISPLAY MATH MATH1 SCALING MODE AUTO Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing SDIV Function Syntax Example Sets the scale division value of the manual scaling of the computed waveform or queries the current setting DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing SDIV lt NRf gt DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing SDIV x 1 2 MATH lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999 30 DISPLAY MATH MATH1 SCALING SDIV 2 5000E 01 DISPLAY MATH MATH1 SCALING SDIV gt DISPLAY MATH MATH1 SCALING SDIV 25 000E 00 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option This command is valid when the scaling mode of the computed waveform DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing MODE is set to MANual DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt UNIT Function Syntax Example Sets the unit to be added to the result of the waveform computation or queries the current setting DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt UNIT lt String gt DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt UNIT lt x gt 1 2 MATH lt String gt Up to 8 characters DISPLAY MATH MATH1 UNIT W DI
71. SIGMB RMS MEAN DC RMEAN Example INPUT VOLTAGE MODE SIGMA RMS Description INPut VOLTage MODE SIGMA is valid only on models with 2 to 4 elements INPut VOLTage MODE SIGMB is valid only on models with 2 to 4 elements This command is invalid if the wiring unit 8 SB does not exist as a result of the wiring system setting INPut WIRing INPut VOLTage RANGe Function Queries the voltage ranges of all elements Syntax INPut VOLTage RANGe Example INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE gt INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE ELEMENT1 1 000E 03 ELEMENT2 1 000E 03 ELEMENT3 1 000E 03 ELEMENT4 1 000E 03 INPut VOLTage ALL Function Collectively sets the voltage range of all elements Syntax INPut VOLTage RANGe ALL lt Voltage gt When the crest factor is set to 3 Voltage 15 30 60 100 150 300 600 or 1000 V When the crest factor is set to 6 Voltage 7 5 15 30 50 75 150 300 or 500 V Example INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE ALL 1000V INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets the voltage range of the element or queries the current setting Syntax INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent lt x gt lt Voltage gt INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent lt x gt x 1 to 4 element When the crest factor is set to 3 Voltage 15 30 60 100 150 300 600 or 1000 V When the crest factor is set to 6 Voltage 7 5 15 30 50 75 150 300 or 500
72. V INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE ELEMENT1 1000V INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE ELEMENT1 gt INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE ELEMENT 1 1 000E 03 Example INPut VOLTage RANGe SIGMA SIGMB Function Collectively sets the voltage range of all elements belonging to wiring unit EA B Syntax INPut VOLTage RANGe SIGMA SIGMB lt Voltage gt When the crest factor is set to 3 lt Voltage gt 15 30 60 100 150 300 600 or 1000 V When the crest factor is set to 6 Voltage 7 5 15 30 50 75 150 300 or 500 V Example INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE SIGMA 1000 Description INPut VOLTage RANGe SIGMA is valid only on models with 2 to 4 elements INPut VOLTage SIGMB is valid only on models with 4 elements This command is invalid if the wiring unit SA SB does not exist as a result of the wiring system setting INPut WIRing 6 72 IM 760301 17E 6 14 INPut Group INPut Function Syntax Example WIRing Sets the wiring system or queries the current setting INPut WIRing P1W2 P1W3 P3W3 P3W4 V3A3 P1W2 P1W3 P3W3 P1W2 P1W3 P3W3 NONE 1 P1W2 INPut WIRing P1W2 Single phase two wire system 1P2W P1W3 Single phase three wire system 1P3W P3W3 Three phase three wire system 3P3W P3WA Three phase four wire system 3P4W V3A3 Three phase three wire three voltage three current
73. and controller functions are not available on this instrument Switching between Remote and Local Modes When Switching from Local to Remote Mode Receiving a REN Remote Enable message from the controller when the instrument is in the local mode causes the instrument to switch to the remote mode The REMOTE indicator is turned ON All keys except the LOCAL key are disabled Settings entered in local mode are retained even when the WT3000 switches to remote mode When Switching from Remote to Local Mode Pressing LOCAL key in remote mode puts the instrument in local mode However this act is invalid if the instrument has been set to Local Lockout mode see page 1 6 by the controller The REMOTE indicator is turned OFF Key operations are enabled Settings entered in remote mode are retained even when the WT3000 switches to local mode Note The GP IB interface cannot be used simultaneously with other communication interfaces RS 232 USB or Ethernet IM 760301 17E 1 3 GP IB Interface Specifications GP IB Interface Specifications Supported device Electrical and mechanical specifications Functional specifications Protocol Code used Mode Address setting Clear remote mode National Instruments AT GPIB PCI GPIB and PCI GPIB PCMCIA GPIB and PCMCIA GPIB 488 2 driver version 1 60 or later Conforms to IEEE St d 488 1978 See table below Conforms to IEEE St d 488 2 1992 IS
74. it means ELEMent1 The section enclosed by braces can be omitted Example INPut SCALing STATe ALL ON can be written as SCAL ON However the last section enclosed by braces cannot be omitted in an upper level query Example SCALing and SCALing STATe different queries 5 3 Responses When the controller sends a message unit that has a question mark in its program header query the instrument returns a response message to the query A response message is returned in one of the following two forms Response Consisting of a Header and Data If the response can be used as a program message without any change it is returned with a command header attached Example DISPlay MODE lt PMT gt gt DISPLAY MODE WAVE lt RMT gt Response Consisting of Data Only If the response cannot be used as a program message unless changes are made to it query only command only the data section is returned However there are query only commands that return responses with the header attached Example INPut POVer PMT gt 0 lt gt When You Wish to Return a Response without a Header Responses that return both header and data can be Set so that only the data section is returned The COMMunicate command is used to do this Abbreviated Form Normally the lower case section is removed from a response header before the response is returned to
75. nennen renes 6 74 AUTO range eei ettet bua t 6 66 6 71 6 76 B Page bar graph e 6 29 baud rate block data ES 919 2 brightness built in printer printing on calibration CBOycle Group 2 4 center position level 6 42 character dala nei nina iani 5 6 COJE USET CT HE HY 1 3 COlOl LOMO t 6 64 comiiand list ssi Lr rer t uin Heide rese 6 1 comment 6 48 6 60 6 64 common command group 6 114 common command 5 8 COMMunicate 6 24 compensation computation 6 77 85 0 COMPULALION 2 nro retten neon condition register esee lt connection connector and signal names 2 3 continuous integration mode 6 74 conventions used in this iv crest 1
76. the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option For the values of NUMeric LIST ITEM lt x gt the numeric list data output items for the amount specified by NUMeric LIST NUMber are output NUMeric LIST CLEar Function Syntax Example Clears the output items of the numeric list data of harmonic measurement set to NUMeric LIST CLEar ALL lt NRf gt lt NRf gt ALL Clear all items 1st lt NRf gt 1 to 64 Item number to start clearing 2nd lt NRf gt 1 to 64 Item number to end clearing NUMERIC LIST CLEAR ALL Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option If the 2nd lt NRf gt is omitted the output items from the start clear number to the last item 64 are cleared 6 92 IM 760301 17E 6 18 NUMeric LIST DELete Function Deletes the output items of the numeric list data of harmonic measurement Syntax NUMeric LIST DELete lt NRf gt lt NR gt 1st lt NRf gt 1 to 64 Item number to start deleting 2nd lt NRf gt 1 to 64 Item number to end deleting Example NUMERIC LIST CLEAR 1 Deletes and shift ITEM2 and subsequent items forward NUMERIC LIST CLEAR 1 3 Deletes ITEM1 to ITEM3 and shift ITEM4 and subsequent items forward Descrip
77. the number of measurements is fixed at 24 Syntax FLICker DISPlay ELEMent NRf FLICker DISPlay ELEMent FLICker DC lt NRf gt 1 to 4 element Function Sets all settings related to the relative steady Example FLICKER DISPLAY ELEMENT 1 state voltage change dc or queries the current FLICKER DISPLAY ELEMENT gt setting FLICKER DISPLAY ELEMENT 1 Syntax FLICker DC Description You can make the same setting or query with Example FLICKER DC gt the DISPlay FLICker ELEMent FLICKER DC STATE 1 LIMIT 3 30 command 6 52 IM 760301 17E 6 9 FLICker Group FLICker DISPlay PAGE Function Sets the page numbers to be displayed for flicker measurement display or queries the current setting FLICker DISPlay PAGE lt gt FLICker DISPlay PAGE lt NRf gt 1 to 9 page number FLICKER DISPLAY PAGE 1 FLICKER DISPLAY PAGE gt FLICKER DISPLAY PAGE 1 Description You can make the same setting or query with the DISPlay FLICker PAGE command Syntax Example FLICker DISPlay PERiod Function Sets the display observation period number for flicker measurement display or queries the current setting FLICker DISPlay PERiod lt NRf gt FLICker DISPlay PERiod lt NRf gt 1 to 99 observation period number FLICKER DISPLAY PERIOD 1 FLICKER DISPLAY PERIOD gt FLICKER DISPLAY PERIOD 1 Description You can make the same setting or query with the DISPlay FLIC
78. 00 ELEMENT1 30 0 00 ELEMENT2 30 0 00 ELEMENT2 30 0 00 ELEMENT3 30 0 00 ELEMENT3 30 0 00 ELEMENT4 30 0 00 INPUT CURRENT ELEMENT4 30 0 00 AUTO ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 AUTO ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 INPUT ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 INPUT CURRENT MODE ELEMENT1 RMS CURRENT MODE ELEMENT1 RMS ELEMENT2 RMS ELEMENT3 RMS ELEMENT2 RMS ELEMENT3 RMS ELEMENT4 RMS 5 ELEMENT4 RMS 5 ELEMENT1 10 0000 ELEMENT2 10 0000 ELEMENT1 10 0000 ELEMENT2 10 0000 ELEMENT3 10 0000 ELEMENT4 10 0000 ELEMENT3 10 0000 ELEMENT4 10 0000 INPUT FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 OFF INPut CURRent AUTO ELEMENT2 OFF ELEMENT3 OFF Function Queries the current auto range setting ON ELEMENT4 OFF INPUT FILTER OFF of all elements FREQUENCY ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 Syntax INPut CURRent AUTO ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 INPUT Example INPUT CURRENT AUTO gt SCALING STATE ELEMENT1 0 INPUT CURRENT AUTO ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 INPUT SCALING VT ELEMENT1 1 0000 ELEMENT2 1 0000 ELEMENT3 1 0000 INPut CURRent AUTO ALL ELEMENT4 1 0000 INPUT SCALING CT Function Collectively turns ON OFF the current auto ELEMENT1 1 0000 ELEMENT2 1 0000 range of all elements ELEMENT3 1 0000 ELEMENT4 1 0000 Syntax INPut CURRent AUTO INPUT SCALING SFACTOR ALL
79. 03 ELEMENT4 50 0 03 CBCycle FILTer LINE Function Queries all settings related to the line filter for Cycle by Cycle measurement Syntax CBCycle FILTer LINE Example CBCYCLE FILTER LINE gt CBCYCLE FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 50 0 03 ELEMENT2 50 0 03 ELEMENT3 50 0E 03 ELEMENT4 50 0 03 CBCycle FILTer LINE ALL Function Collectively sets the line filters of all elements for Cycle by Cycle measurement Syntax CBCycle FILTer LINE ALL OFF lt frequency gt OFF Line filter OFF lt frequency gt 500 Hz 5 5 kHz 50 kHz line filter ON cutoff frequency Example CBCYCLE FILTER LINE ALL 50 2 Description Does not set line filters for motor input CBCycle FILTer LINE ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets the line filter of individual elements for Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting Syntax CBCycle FILTer LINE ELEMent lt x gt OFF lt frequency gt CBCycle FILTer LINE ELEMent lt x gt x 1 to 4 element OFF Line filter OFF lt frequency gt 500 Hz 5 5 kHz 50 kHz line filter ON cutoff frequency Example CBCYCLE FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 50KHZ FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 gt CBCYCLE FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 50 0E 03 CBCycle FILTer LINE MOTor Function Sets the motor input line filters for Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting Syntax CBCycle FILTer LINE MOTor OFF lt frequency gt CBCycle FILTer LIN
80. 33 31 49 41 65 51 81 61 71 113 2 22 42 2 62 18 102 2 122 18 142 2 162 18 DC2 2 B R b 12 18 22 34 32 50 42 66 52 82 62 98 72 114 3 23 43 3 63 19 103 3 123 19 143 3 163 19 13 19 23 35 33 51 43 67 53 83 63 99 73 115 4 24 DCL 44 4 64 20 104 4 124 20 144 4 164 20 14 20 24 36 34 52 44 68 54 84 64 100 74 116 5 25 PPU 45 5 65 21 105 5 125 21 145 5 165 21 5 0 15 21 25 37 35 53 45 69 55 85 65 101 75 117 6 26 46 6 66 221106 6 126 22 146 6 166 22 amp 6 16 22126 38 36 54146 70 56 86 66 102 76 118 7 27 47 7 67 23 107 7 127 23 147 7 167 23 ETB 7 G W w 17 23 27 39 37 55 47 71157 87 67 103 77 119 8 30 50 8 70 241110 8 130 24 150 8 170 24 8 H X 18 24 28 40 38 56 48 72 58 88 68 04 78 120 9 31 SPD 51 9 71 25 111 91131 251151 9 171 25 19 25 29 41139 57 49 73 59 89 69 05 79 121 32 52 10 72 26 112 10 132 26 152 10 172 26 SUB J Z 1A 26 2A 42 58 4A 74 5 90 6 06 7A 122 33 53 11173 27 113 11 133 27 153 111 173 27 ESC K 1B 27 2 43 59 4B 75 5B 91 6B 107 7B 123 34 54 12 74 28 114 12 134 28 154 12 174 28 FS lt L 1C 28 2C 44 3C 60 4 76 5 92 6 108 7C 124 D 35 55 13 75 29 115 3 135 29 155 13 175 29 GS 10 2920 45 30 6140 77 50 93 60 109170 125 36 56 14 76 301116 4 136 30 156 14 176 30 RS gt i 1E 30 2E 46 3E 62 4E 78 94 6E 110 7E 126 F 37 57 15
81. 6 39 015 6 39 015 lt gt 5 6 40 DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing VALUE 6 40 DISPlay TRENG ITEM x SCALing 6 39 lt gt 0 6 39 DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion DISPlay TRENG Tex iere tti tete DISPlay TRENG TDIV DISPIay TREBNG eiut 6 39 6 40 015 6 40 DISPlay VEC Tor UMAG IMAG 6 41 DISPIay VEG TOrA cere ee enn 6 40 DISPlay WAVE ALL esee 6 41 DISPlay WAVE FORMat 6 41 DISPlay WAVE GRATicule eene 6 41 DISPlay WAVE INTerpolate 6 41 DISPlay WAVE MAPPing U lt x gt l lt x gt SPEed TORQue MATH 6 42 015 6 41 DISPlay WAVE MAPPing MODE 6 41 DISPlay WAVE POSition U x I x sss 6 42 DISPlay WAVE POSition UALL IALL 6 42 015
82. 77 UNL 117 5 137 157 15 177 9 DEL US a O __ RUBOUT 1F 31 2F 47 63 4F 79 SF 95 6F 111 7 127 Universal Listener Talker Secondary Command Address Address Command Example octal hexadecimal GP IB code ASCII character code decimal IM 760301 17E App 1 xipueddy H Appendix 2 Error Messages This section explains the communication error messages The messages can be displayed in English or Japanese on the WT3000 However if a messages is queried with the STATus ERRor command and displayed on PC the message is displayed in English e If servicing is required contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs Only error messages related to communications are listed here For other error messages see User s Manual IM760301 01E Error in Communication Command 100 199 Code Messages Corrective Action Page 102 Syntax error Invalid syntax Chapter 5 6 103 Invalid separator Use a comma to separate the data 5 1 104 Data type error See pages 5 5 and 5 6 and write using the 5 5 and 5 6 correct data form 108 Parameter not allowed Check the number of data points 5 5 chapter 6 109 Missing parameter Enter the required data 5 5 chapter 6 111 Header separator error Use a space to separate the header and data 5 1 112 Program mnemonic too long Check the mnemonic alphanumerical character Chapter 6 string 113 Undefi
83. 86 Relative steady state voltage change 6 86 ES 2 5 relative steady state voltage change 6 52 operation pending status pe Relative voltage change time 6 86 6 115 relative voltage change time 6 53 output byte order 222 6 112 ii csse nen 1 5 2 8 4 4 7 2 remote local sss tenentes 6 24 Overlap COMMANGS iasomie ees RE M 1 6 overlap enable register eee 6 25 data 5 2 response NGAGE 3 inii rh ea reci HEP 5 2 response message ttt tante tne 5 1 responses to interface messages 1 6 totail SONWANE 4 6 IM 760301 17E Index 3 revolution 6 81 RMS voltage i rn gane eter o ee gent 6 86 eet dich 5 1 totating speed 6 81 6 82 RS 232 controll meal 2 8 RS 232 interface specifications 2 2 RS 232 standard signals esses 2 4 n up TRIP 2 8 S Page sample Yato
84. AOUTPUT NORMAL MODE1 FIXED AOUTPUT NORMAL MODE1 gt AOUTPUT NORMAL MODE1 FIXED AOUTput NORMal RATE lt x gt Function Manually sets the rated maximum and minimum values for the D A output items or queries the current setting Syntax NORMal MODE lt x gt lt NRf gt lt gt AOUTput 1 MODE lt x gt lt gt 1 to 20 output channel lt NRf gt 9 999E 30 to 9 999E 30 rated value Example AOUTPUT NORMAL RATE1 100 100 AOUTPUT NORMAL 1 gt AOUTPUT NORMAL RATE1 100 0E 00 100 0E 00 Description Set the maximum value and then the minimum value This setting is valid when the method of setting the rated value AOUTput NORMal MODE lt x gt is set to FIXed 6 20 IM 760301 17E 6 44 CBCycle Group The CBCycle group contains commands related to Cycle by Cycle measurement functions These commands allow you to enter and query the same settings that are available under ITEM in the CbyC Items menu and under FORM in the CbyC Form menu on the front panel Note that the commands in this group are only available with the Cycle by Cycle function CC option 1 Function Queries all settings related to the Cycle Cycle measurement function 1 gt CBCYCLE SYNCHRONIZE SOURCE U1 SLOPE RISE CBCYCLE TRIGGER MODE AUTO SOURCE U1 SLOPE RISE LEVEL 0 0 CBCYCLE
85. CLOCK SNTP gt SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP GMTTIME 09 00 Description Available only with Ethernet C7 option SYSTem CLOCk SNTP EXECute Function Sets the date time via SNTP Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SNTP EXECute Example SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP EXECUTE Description Available only with Ethernet C7 option SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime Function Sets the difference from Greenwich Mean Time or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime string SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime lt string gt HH MM HH hours minutes Example SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP GMTTIME 09 00 SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP GMTTIME gt SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP GMTTIME 09 00 Description Available only with Ethernet C7 option Available when the date time setting method SYSTem CLOCk TYPE is SNTP SYSTem CLOCk Function Sets the date time setting method or queries the 3 current setting 3 Syntax SYSTem CLOCk TYPE MANual SNTP SYSTem CLOCk TYPE E Example SYSTEM CLOCK TYPE MANUAL SYSTEM CLOCK TYPE gt 9 SYSTEM CLOCK TYPE MANUAL 3 Description SNTP is available only with Ethernet C7 8 option SYSTem DATE Function Sets the date or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem DATE String SYSTem DATE String YY MM DD YY year MM month DD day Example SYSTEM DATE 05 01 01 SYSTEM DATE gt 05 01 01 Description Year is the lowest two digits of the year S
86. DISPlay BAR Queries all settings related to the bar graph 6 29 DISPlay BAR FORMat Sets the display format of the bar graph or queries the current setting 6 29 DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt Sets the bar graph item function and element or queries the current setting 6 29 DISPlay BAR ORDer Sets the start and end orders of the bar graph or queries the current setting 6 30 DISPlay CBCycle Queries all settings related to the Cycle by Cycle display 6 30 DISPlay CBCycle CURSor Sets the cursor position of the Cycle by Cycle display or queries the current setting 6 30 DISPlay CBCycle ITEM lt x gt Sets the displayed items function and element of the Cycle by Cycle display or queries the current setting 6 30 DISPlay CBCycle PAGE Sets the number of the displayed page of the Cycle by Cycle display or 3 queries the current setting 6 30 3 DISPlay FFT Queries all settings related to the FFT waveform display 6 30 5 DISPlay FFT FFT lt x gt Queries all settings related to the FFT waveform 6 31 S DISPlay FFT FFT lt x gt LABel Sets the label of the FFT waveform or queries the current setting 6 31 5 DISPlay FFT FFT lt x gt 0BJect Sets the source waveform of the FFT computation or queries the current setting 6 31 3 DISPlay FFT FFT x STATe Turns ON OFF the FFT waveform display or queries the current setting 6 31 i DISPlay FFT FORMat Sets the display format of the FFT waveform or queries the current setting 6 31 2 DISPlay FFT PO
87. DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SOURce U lt x gt I lt x gt EXTernal DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SOURCe x 1 to 4 element EXTernal External trigger input Ext CIK Example DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER SOURCE 01 DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER SOURCE gt DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER SOURCE 01 DISPlay WAVE 0 lt gt lt gt SPEed ToRQue lt gt Function Turns ON OFF the voltage current rotating speed torque wave orm computation waveform or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay WAVE U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue MATH lt x gt Boolean DISPlay WAVE U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue lt gt lt x gt of U lt x gt lt gt 1 to 4 element x of lt gt 1 to 2 MATH Example DISPLAY WAVE U1 ON DISPLAY WAVE U1 gt DISPLAY WAVE Ul 1 Description SPEed TORQue are valid only on the motor version MV e lt gt is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option DISPlay WAVE VZoom Function Queries all settings related to the vertical zoom factor of the waveform Syntax DISPlay WAVE VZoom Example DISPLAY WAVE VZOOM gt DISPLAY WAVE VZOOM U1 1 00 U2 1 00 U3 1 00 U4 1 00 I1 1 00 I2 1 00 I3 1 00 I4 1 00 DISPlay WAVE VZoom UALL IALL Function Collectively sets the vertical zoom factor of the waveform voltage current of all elements Syntax DISPlay WAVE VZoom UALL
88. Enables ON or Disables OFF the user defined function or queries the current setting MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt STATe lt Boolean gt FUNCtion lt x gt STATe lt gt 1 to 20 F1 to F20 MEASURE FUNCTION1 STATE ON MEASURE FUNCTION1 STATE gt MEASURE FUNCTION1 STATE 1 FUNCtion lt x gt UNIT Sets the unit to be added to the computation result of the user defined function or queries the current setting MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt UNIT lt String gt MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt UNIT lt x gt 1 to 20 F1 to F20 lt String gt Up to 8 characters MEASURE FUNCTION1 UNIT v MEASURE FUNCTION1 UNIT gt MEASURE FUNCTION1 UNIT V This command does not affect the computation result MHOLd Enables ON or Disables OFF MAX HOLD function used in the user defined function or queries the current setting MEASure MHOLd Boolean MEASure MHOLd MEASURE MHOLD ON MEASURE MHOLD MEASURE MHOLD 1 The MAX HOLD operation starts when the MAX HOLD function is specified by the user defined function and MEASure is set to ON e When MEASure MHOLd is set to OFF the MAX HOLD operation terminates and the MAX HOLD value becomes data If ON is specified while MEASure MHOLd is ON the MAX HOLD value is reset once and the MAX HOLD operation starts again For details on the designation of the MAX HOLD function see the User s Manual 1M7
89. Example NUMERIC FLICKER INFORMATION JDC 1 1 NUMERIC FLICKER INFORMATION 1 gt NUMERIC FLICKER 1 JDC 1 1 Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option The contents that are output for each of the selections for lt Function gt are as follows lt Function gt Output Contents Element Period Designation Designation JTOTal Overall judgment results for dc dmax d t pst and plt Required Not required the judgment results displayed under Element Judgment in the upper right part of the screen JDC Judgment results for relative steady state voltage change dc Required Required JDMAX Judgment results for maximum relative voltage change dmax Required Required JDT Judgment results for relative voltage change time d t Required Required JPST Judgment results for short term flicker value Pst Required Required JPLT Judgment results for long term flicker value Required Not required The contents of the selections for lt Element gt as follows When Element is omitted Element 1 is set TOTal The overall judgment result for all measured elements is only available when Function JTOTal judgment result displayed under Total Judgment in the upper right part of the screen lt NRf gt 1 to 4 specified elements 6 88 IM 760301 17E 6 18
90. G set to negative and positive values respectively For the gt of power values P Q and PC the number of digits of the mantissa may be equal to 7 the maximum significant digits depending on the combination of the voltage range and current range power range See the list of power ranges in the User s Manual 1 760301 01 760301 17 6 97 6 18 NUMeric Group List of Numeric Data Output Items That Are Preset The list of function names used in the commands and the corresponding function names used on the screen menu of the WT3000 is given in the Function Selection List in the DISPlay group Note The List of Numeric Data Output Items That Are Preset indicates the measurement function and element that are assigned to each item number lt gt Items that not set to be measured are displayed or output in the same fashion as when the data does not exist For example if frequency Fl of the current of element 2 is not set to be measured the output of item number ITEM19 is the same as the output when the data does not exist NAN for ASCII 1 Preset Pattern of Numeric Data Output Items Applicable command NUMeric NORMal PRESet Pattern 1 lt gt gt 10 11 to 19 20 21 to 29 30 31 to 39 40 41 to 49 50 51 to 59 60 61 to 255 Pattern 2 lt gt
91. I 1 TOTAL SCALING MODE AUTO VALUE 100 0 00 100 0 00 omitted DISPLAY TREND NORMAL ITEM16 FUNCTION AH 1 SCALING MODE AUTO VALUE 100 0E 00 100 0E 00 Syntax Example DISPlay TRENd ALL Function Collectively turns ON OFF all trends DISPlay TRENd ALL Boolean DISPLAY TREND ALL ON Syntax Example DISPlay TRENd CLEar Function Clears the trend Syntax DISPlay TRENd CLEar Example DISPLAY TREND CLEAR DISPlay Function Syntax Example DISPlay Function Syntax Example DISPlay Function Syntax Example Description DISPlay Function Syntax Example TRENd FORMat Sets the display format of the trend or queries the current setting DISPlay TRENd FORMat SINGle DUAL TRIad QUAD DISPlay TRENd FORMat DISPLAY TREND FORMAT SINGLE DISPLAY TREND FORMAT gt DISPLAY TREND FORMAT SINGLE TRENd ITEM lt x gt Queries all settings related to the trend DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt x 1 to 16 item number DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 FUNCTION U 1 TOTAL SCALING MODE AUTO VALUE 100 0E 00 100 0E 00 TRENd ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion Sets the trend item function element and harmonic order or queries the current setting DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion x 1 to 16 item number NON
92. IMAG Function Sets the zoom factor of the voltage current display during vector display or queries the current setting DISPlay VECTor UMAG IMAG lt NRf gt DISPlay VECTor UMAG IMAG lt NRf gt 0 100 to 100 000 DISPLAY VECTOR 1 DISPLAY VECTOR UMAG gt DISPLAY VECTOR UMAG 1 000 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option Syntax Example DISPlay WAVE Function Queries all settings related to the waveform display DISPlay WAVE DISPLAY WAVE gt DISPLAY WAVE FORMAT SINGLE U1 1 U2 1 U3 1 04 1 Il 1 I2 1 13 1 14 1 TDIV 5 0E 03 TRIGGER MODE AUTO SOURCE U1 SLOPE RISE LEVEL 0 0 DISPLAY WAVE INTERPOLATE LINE GRATICULE GRID SVALUE 1 TLABEL 0 MAPPING MODE AUTO DISPLAY WAVE VZOOM Ul 1 00 U2 1 00 U3 1 00 U4 1 00 Il 1 00 I2 1 00 I3 1 00 I4 1 00 DISPLAY WAVE POSITION U1 0 000 U2 0 000 U3 0 000 U4 0 000 I1 0 000 I2 0 000 I3 0 000 14 0 000 Syntax Example DISPlay WAVE ALL Function Collectively turns ON OFF all waveform displays DISPlay WAVE ALL Boolean DISPLAY WAVE ALL ON Syntax Example DISPlay WAVE FORMat Function Sets the display format of the waveform or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay WAVE FORMat SINGle DUAL TRIad QUAD DISPlay WAVE FORMat Example DISPLAY WAVE FORMAT SINGLE DISPLAY WAVE FORMAT
93. Is Made Using the STB Command No bits are cleared When Serial Polling Is Executed Only the RQS bit is cleared When a CLS Command Is Received When the CLS command is received the status byte itself is not cleared but the contents of the standard event register which affects the bits in the status byte are cleared As a result the corresponding bits in the status byte are cleared except bit 4 since the output queue cannot be emptied by the CL S command However the output queue is also cleared if the CLS command is received just after a program message terminator 7 4 IM 760301 17E 7 3 Standard Event Register Standard Event Register 76543210 PONURQCME EXE DDE QYERQCOPC Bit 7 PON Power ON Set to 1 when the power is turned ON Bit 6 URQ User Request Not used always 0 Bit 5 CME Command Error Set to 1 when the command syntax is incorrect Example Received a command name with a spelling error or character data not in the selection Bit 4 EXE Execution Error Set to 1 when the command syntax is correct but the command cannot be executed in the current state Example Received a command with a parameter outside the range or a command dealing with an unsupported option Bit 3 DDE Device Error Set to 1 when execution of the command is not possible due to an internal problem in the instrument that is not a command error or an execution error Bit 2 QYE
94. Manual Unit and Note Subheadings Type Symbol Meaning Unit k 1000 Example 100 kHz K 1024 Example 640 KB file data size Note Note Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument On pages that describe operating procedures the following symbols displayed characters and terminology are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations Procedure Follow the numbered steps All procedures are written with inexperienced users in mind experienced users may not need to carry out all the steps Explanation This subsection describes the setup parameters and the limitations on the procedures Displayed Characters and Terminology Used in the Procedural Explanations Panel Keys and Soft keys Bold characters used in the procedural explanations indicate characters that are marked on the panel keys or the characters of the soft keys or menus displayed on the screen SHIFT Panel Key SHIFT key means you will press the SHIFT key to turn ON the SHIFT key followed by the operation key The setup menu marked in purple below the panel key that you pressed appears on the screen Symbols Used in the Syntax Symbols which are used in the syntax descriptions in Chapter 6 are shown below These symbols are referred to as BNF Backus Naur Form symbols For details on the data see pages 5 5 and 5 6 Symbol Meaning Example Example of Input lt gt Defined val
95. NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT1 1 Description FILE SAVE NUMeric 1 5 is valid on models with two or more elements To turn the output ON wiring unit must exist by setting the wiring system beforehand using the INPut WIRing command FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal SIGMB is valid on models with four elements To turn the output ON wiring unit XB must exist by setting the wiring system beforehand using the INPut WIRing command FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal PRESet lt x gt Function Presets the output ON OFF pattern of the element function for saving the numeric data to file Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal PRESet lt x gt x 1 to 2 preset pattern number Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL PRESET1 Description For details on the output pattern when preset is executed see the User s Manual IM760301 01E FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal lt Function gt Function Turns ON OFF the output of the function when saving the numerical data file or queries the current setting Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal lt Function gt lt Boolean gt FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal lt Function gt Function U 1I P S Q See the function selection list 1 of DISPlay group on page 6 44 Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL U ON FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL U gt FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL U 1 FILE SAVE NUMeric Function Sets the format of
96. NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation NUMber 6 89 NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation VALue 6 89 1 6 87 NUMeric FLICker JUDGement 6 90 NUMeric FLICker PERiod 6 90 6 91 6 85 NUMeric FORMAL riii ere Ser reete 20 5 lt gt 6 93 5 6 93 5 6 93 5 6 93 NUMeric amp aire tene 6 94 5 0 6 94 NUMeric LIST 6 92 NUMeric NORMal 6 95 NUMTIC i sisi ore yo t to cet vende tees 6 84 NUMeric NORMal CLE ar NUMeric NORMal DELete NUMeric NORMal ITEM lt x gt ME NUMeric NORMal PRESet 6 96 RATE iin RUE EH 6 102 TS TAT s CONDItIOnD uiui rete 6 103 STATUSIEESE 4 dieere n te 6 103 SSTATUS EESR 2 nece ete idees 6 103 STATUS ERROL m ii
97. OFF the cursor display on the waveform display or queries the current setting Syntax CURSOr WAVE STATe Boolean CURSOr WAVE STATe Example CURSOR WAVE STATE ON CURSOR WAVE STATE gt CURSOR WAVE STATE 1 CURSor WAVE TRACe lt x gt Function Sets the cursor target on the waveform display or queries the current setting Syntax CURSor WAVE TRACe x U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue MATH lt x gt CURSor WAVE TRACe lt x gt x of TRACe lt x gt 1 or 2 1 C1 2 C2 x of U lt x gt lex 1 to 4 lt x gt of MATH lt x gt 1 to 2 MATH Example CURSOR WAVE TRACE1 01 CURSOR WAVE TRACE1 gt CURSOR WAVE TRACE1 01 Description SPEed TORQue are valid only on the motor version MV lt gt is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option CURSor WAVE lt gt DX PERDt Y x DY Function Queries the cursor measurement value on the waveform display Syntax CURSor WAVE lt gt DX PERDt lt gt DY X lt x gt X axis value of the cursor position X1 X X2 Xx DX X axis value between cursors AX PERDt 1 DT 1 AX value between cursors Y lt x gt Y axis value of the cursor position Y1 Y Y2 Yx DY Y axis value between cursors AY lt gt 1 2 1 1 2 2 Example CURSOR WAVE Y1 gt 78 628 00 Description If the cursor display is not turned ON the wavefor
98. START o osito rni RE 6 55 SFUICKERS TATE trier teg 6 55 EBIGker UNIMODE iter rrr rr EE Een FLICker UN VALue Je KOU y 6 55 d3N e Cr 6 52 HARMonics FBANG HARMonics lEC UGRouping GRouping SHARMGNICSIEC 2 tre rere rtt 6 57 1 6 57 HARMonics PLLSource 222 6 58 1 2 6 58 6 58 5 0 eiii err 6 58 HARMONICS rione aari idae 6 57 iecit deri 6 59 2 6 59 HCOPy AUTO SYNChronize 6 59 HCOPy AUTO STARI END 6 59 TICOPy AU TOS i enn 6 59 5 orent 6 59 HCOPy COMMent 2 6 60 TICOPy DIRGCIIOD 6 60 THOOBy EXEQGCUtO 1 m ren n AE 6 60 THOCOPy NETPrint COLor 6 60 6 60 2 212 6 60 HCOPy PRINter FEED HCOPy PRINter FORMat H
99. U 1 2 1 1 3 P 1 4 Q 1 5 Z 1 6 RS 1 7 5 1 8 1 9 1 101018 U to XP 2 19 to 27 U to XP 3 28 to 36 U to XP 4 37 to 64 NONE Pattern 4 lt gt lt Function gt lt Element gt 1 U 1 2 1 1 3 P 1 4 1 5 Q 1 6 LAMBda 1 7 PHI 1 8 PHIU 1 9 PHII 1 10 2 1 11 1 12 5 1 13 1 14 1 151028 U to XP 2 29 to 42 U to XP 3 43 to 56 U to XP 4 57 to 64 NONE IM 760301 17E 6 101 spueuluio 6 19 RATE Group The commands in this group deal with the data update rate You can make the same settings and inquiries as when UPDATE RATE on the front panel is used RATE Function Sets the data update rate or queries the current setting Syntax RATE lt Time gt RATE lt Time gt 50 100 250 500 ms 1 2 5 10 or 20 s Example RATE 500MS RATE RATE 500 0E 03 6 102 IM 760301 17E 6 20 STATus Group The commands in the STATus group are used to make settings and inquiries related to the status report There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group For details on the status report see chapter 7 5 5 Function Queries all settings related to the communication status function Syntax STATus Example STATUS gt STATUS EESE 0 FILTER1 NEVER FILTER2 NEVER FILTER3 NEVER FILTER4 NEVER FILTER5 NEVER FILTER6 NEVER FILTER7 NEVER FILTER8 NEVER FILTER9 NEVER FI
100. be connected via GP IB has a unique address within the GP IB system This address is used to distinguish the device from others Therefore when you connect the WT3000 to a PC for example make sure to assign a unique address to the WT3000 Note Do not change the address while the controller or other devices are using the GP IB system IM 760301 17E 1 5 91 40 1 6 Responses to Interface Messages Responses to Interface Messages Responses to a Uni Line Message IFC Interface Clear Clears the talker and listener functions Stops output if data are being output REN Remote Enable Switches between the remote and local modes IDY Identify is not supported Responses to a Multi Line Message Address Command GTL To Local Switches to the local mode SDC Selected Device Clear Clears the program message command being received and the output queue see page 7 9 OPC OPC commands in execution are void The WAI and COMMunicate WAIT commands are immediately terminated GET Group Execute Trigger Same operation as the command PPC Parallel Poll Configure and TCT Take Control are not supported Responses to a Multi Line Message Universal Command LLO Local Lockout Disables LOCAL on the front panel to prohibit switching to the local mode DCL Device Clear Same operation as the SDC message SPE Serial Poll Enable Sets the talker function
101. details on the settings see the following pages In addition use an interface cable that meets the specifications of the WT3000 Connector and Signal Names 2 RD Received Data Received data from the PC Signal direction input 3 SD Send Data Transmitted data to the PC Signal direction output 5 SG Signal Ground Signal ground 7 RS Request to Send Handshaking signal to receive data from the PC Signal direction output 8 CS Clear to Send Handshaking signal to send data to the PC Signal direction input Pins 1 4 6 and 9 are not used 9 Pin to 25 Pin Adapter and Signal Names ZEN 3 27 8 5 2 3 4 5 7 The numbers inside the parentheses are pin numbers for the 25 pin connector Signal Direction The following figure shows the direction of the signals used by the RS 232 interface of the WT3000 lt RS Request to send CS Clear to send 8 This lt SD Send data instrument RD Receive data 2 Computer IM 760301 17E 2 3 uondo zez su 2 3 Connection via the RS 232 Interface RS 232 Standard Signals and Their JIS and CCITT Abbreviations Pin No Abbreviation Description 9 pin connector Serial RS 232 CCITT JIS Signal ground Transmitted data Received data Request to send Clear to send Signal Wiring Exa
102. for sNUMeric FLICker FUNCtion VALue FORMat Sets the format of the numeric data that is transmitted by s NUMeric NORMal VALue or s NUMeric LIST VALue or queries the current setting NUMeric FORMat ASCii FLOat NUMeric FORMat NUMERIC FORMAT ASCII NUMERIC FORMAT gt NUMERIC FORMAT ASCII The format of the numeric data that is output varies depending on the s NUMeric FORMat setting as follows 1 When ascii is specified Outputs the physical value in lt NR3 gt format lt NR1 gt format only for the elapsed time of integration TIME The data of each item is delimited by a comma 2 When FLOat is specified A 6 byte or 8 byte header example 40060 or 6000408 is added in front of the numeric data block The physical value in IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format follows the header The byte order of the data of each item is MSB First For the format of the individual numeric data see Numeric Data Format at the end of this group of commands see page 6 97 IM 760301 17E 6 91 6 18 NUMeric Group NUMeric HOLD Function Sets whether to hold ON or release OFF all the numeric data or queries the current setting Syntax NUMeric HOLD Boolean NUMeric HOLD Example NUMERIC HOLD ON NUMERIC HOLD NUMERIC HOLD 1 Description If NUMeric HOLD is turned ON before executing NUMe
103. gt 1 to 9 page number Example DISPLAY FLICKER PAGE 1 DISPLAY FLICKER PAGE gt DISPLAY FLICKER PAGE 1 Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option DISPlay FLICker PERiod Function Sets the display observation period number for flicker measurement display or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay FLICker PERiod lt NRf gt DISPlay FLICker PERiod lt NRf gt 1 to 99 observation period number Example DISPLAY FLICKER PERIOD 1 DISPLAY FLICKER PERIOD gt DISPLAY FLICKER PERIOD 1 Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option DISPlay INFOrmation Function Queries all settings related to the display of the setup parameter list Syntax DISPlay INFOrmation Example DISPLAY INFORMATION gt DISPLAY INFORMATION STATE 0 PAGE 1 DISPlay INFOrmation PAGE Function Sets the page number of the display of setup parameter list or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay INFOrmation lt gt DISPlay INFOrmation lt NRf gt 1 to 4 page number Example DISPLAY INFORMATION PAGE 1 DISPLAY INFORMATION PAGE gt DISPLAY INFORMATION PAGE 1 DISPlay INFOrmation STATe Function Turns ON OFF the display of the setup parameter list or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay INFOrmation STATe Boolean DISPlay INFOrmation STATe Example DISPLAY INFORMATION STATE ON DISPLAY INFORMATION STATE gt DISPLAY INF
104. harmonic measurement function G5 option CURSor BAR POSition lt x gt Function Sets the cursor position order on the bar graph display or queries the current setting Syntax CURSor BAR POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor BAR POSition lt x gt x 21 2 12C14 2 C2x lt NRf gt 0 to 100 Example CURSOR BAR POSITION1 1 CURSOR BAR POSITION1 gt CURSOR BAR POSITION1 1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option CURSor BAR STATe Function Turns ON OFF the cursor display on the bar graph display or queries the current setting Syntax CURSor BAR STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor BAR STATe CURSOR BAR STATE ON CURSOR BAR STATE gt CURSOR BAR STATE 1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option Example CURSor BAR Y lt x gt DY Function Queries the cursor measurement value on the bar graph display Syntax CURSor BAR Y lt x gt DY Y lt x gt Y axis value at the cursor position Y1 1 2 Y3 Y2 1 Y2x Y3x DY Y axis value between cursors AY1 AY2 and AY3 lt gt 1 2 1 1 2 2 Example CURSOR BAR Y1 gt 78 628 00 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 optio
105. in response messages on the WT3000 The syntax is as follows Form Example N lt N digit decimal number gt lt Data byte sequence 40012ABCDEFGHIJKL N Indicates that the data is lt Block data gt N indicates the number of succeeding data bytes digits in ASCII code characters lt N digit decimal number gt Indicates the number of bytes of data example 0012 12 bytes Data byte sequence Expresses the actual data example ABCDEFGHIJKL e Data is comprised of 8 bit values 0 to 255 This means that the ASCII code which stands for NL can also be a code used for data Hence Form Example care must be taken when programming the String data ABC IEEE488 2 1992 controller 5 6 IM 760301 17E 5 5 Synchronization with the Controller 5 5 Synchronization with the Controller Overlap Commands and Sequential Commands There are two types of commands overlap commands and sequential commands In the case of overlap commands the execution of the next command may start before the execution of the previous command is completed For example if the next program message is transmitted when specifying the voltage range and querying the result the response always returns the most recent setting 100 V in this case INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMentl1 100V ELEMent lt PMT gt This is because the next command is forced to wait until the processing of INPut VOLTage
106. is performed between the WT3000 and the PC When an X OFF code is received while sending data to the PC the WT3000 stops the data transmission When the WT3000 receives the next code the WT3000 resumes the data transmission The CS signal received from the PC is ignored Data Reception Control Hardware handshaking is performed between the WT3000 and the PC When the free area of the receive buffer decreases to 64 bytes the instrument sets RS False When the free area increases to 192 bytes it sets RS True Data Transmission Control Hardware handshaking is performed between the WT3000 and the PC When the CS signal becomes False while sending data to the PC the WT3000 stops the data transmission When the CS signal becomes True the WT3000 resumes the data transmission The X OFF and signals are treated as data Data Reception Control Hardware handshaking is performed between the WT3000 and the PC When the free area of the receive buffer decreases to 64 bytes the instrument sets RS False When the free area increases to 192 bytes it sets RS True Precautions Regarding Data Reception Control When handshaking is used to control the reception of data data may still be sent from the PC even if the free space in the receive buffer drops below 64 bytes In this case after the receive buffer becomes full the excess data will be lost whether or not handshaking is in effect
107. item number DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 ITEM lt x gt Function Syntax Example Description Sets the displayed items function element and harmonic order on the numeric display 4 value 8 value 16 value display or queries the current setting DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 ITEM lt x gt NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 ITEM lt x gt x 1 to 36 item number for VAL4 x 1 to 72 item number for VAL8 x 1 to 144 item number for VAL16 NONE No display item Function U 1I P S Q See the function selection list 1 on page 6 44 Element NR SIGMA SIGMB lt NRf gt 1 to 4 Order TOTal DC lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 100 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 ITEM1 U 1 TOTAL DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 ITEM1 gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 ITEM1 U 1 TOTAL f Element is omitted element 1 is set If Order is omitted is set Element or Order is omitted from response to functions that do not need them DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PAGE Function Syntax Example Description Sets the page number on the numeric display 4 value 8 value 16 value display or queries the current setting DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PA
108. items Function TIME UN FU DC DMAX DT PST PLT lt Element gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 4 Period CURRent lt gt ALL lt NRf gt 1 to 99 Example NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION ITEM1 DC 1 1 NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION ITEM1 gt NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION DC 1 1 Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option The contents that are output for each of the selections for lt Function gt are as follows lt Function gt Output Contents Element lt Period gt Designation Designation TIME Elapsed measurement time sec Not required Not required the time displayed under Flicker in the upper right part of the screen UN RMS voltage rated voltage Un V Required Not required FU Voltage frequency Freq Hz Required Not required DC Relative steady state voltage change Required Required DMAX Maximum relative voltage change Required Required DT Relative voltage change time d t ms Required Required PST Short term flicker value Pst Required Required PLT Long term flicker value Required Not required When Element is omitted Element 1 is set The contents of the selections for Period are as follows If Period is omitted CURRent is set CURRent The observation period currently being measured rows of the numeric list marked with an asterisk in the flicker m
109. kHz 50 kHz line filter ON cutoff frequency Example INPUT FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 OFF INPUT FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 gt INPUT FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 OFF INPut INDependent Function Turns ON OFF the independent setting of input elements or queries the current setting Syntax INPut INDependent Boolean INPut INDependent Example INPUT INDEPENDENT OFF INPUT INDEPENDENT gt INPUT INDEPENDENT 0 Description This command is valid only on models with 2 to 4 elements IM 760301 17E 6 69 6 14 INPut Group INPut MODUle Function Queries the input element type Syntax INPut MODUle lt NRf gt INPut MODUle lt NRf gt 1 to 4 element Example INPUT MODULE 1 gt 30 INPUT MODULE gt 30 30 30 30 Description The response information is as follows 30 standard power element max current range 30 A 2 low current range power element max current range 2 A 0 No input element f the parameter is omitted the input element types of all elements are output in order starting with element 1 INPut NULL Function Turns ON OFF the NULL function or queries the current setting Syntax INPut NULL Boolean INPut NULL Example INPUT NULL ON INPUT NULL INPUT NULL 1 INPut POVer Function Queries the peak over information Syntax INPut POVer Example INPUT POVER gt 0 Description The p
110. lt x gt x 1 2 MATH Example DISPLAY MATH MATH1 DISPLAY MATH MATH1 EXPRESSION U1 I1 SCALING MODE AUTO CENTER 0 0000E 00 SDIV 25 000 00 DISPLAY MATH MATH1 UNIT W LABEL Math1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option DISPlay Function Syntax Example Description DISPlay Function Syntax Example Description DISPlay Function Syntax Example Description MATH MATH lt x gt EXPRession Sets the equation of the waveform computation or queries the current setting DISPlay MATH lt gt EXPRession lt String gt 0 1 lt gt x 1 2 MATH String Up to 50 characters DISPLAY MATH MATHl EXPRESSION 01 11 DISPLAY MATH MATH1 EXPRESSION gt DISPLAY MATH MATHl EXPRESSION U1 I1 This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option MATH MATH lt x gt LABel Sets the label of the computed waveform or queries the current setting DISPlay MATH lt gt LABel lt String gt 5 MATH lt x gt LABel lt gt 1 2 lt String gt Up to 8 characters DISPLAY MATH MATH1 LABEL Mathl DISPLAY MATH MATH1 LABEL gt DISPLAY MATH MATH1 LABEL Mathl This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function
111. of the screen image data Syntax IMAGe SAVE DRIVe PCCard lt NRf gt NETWork USB lt NRf gt lt NR gt lt NRf gt PCCard PC card drive lt NRf gt Partition 0 to 3 NETWork Network drive USB USB memory drive 1st lt NRf gt ID number address 2nd lt NRf gt Partition 0 to 3 or LUN logical unit number 0 to 3 3rd lt NRf gt Partition 0 to 3 when LUN is specified Example IMAGE SAVE DRIVE PCCARD Description If the drive does not contain partitions omit the lt NRf gt corresponding to partitions NETWork be used when the Ethernet interface C7 option is installed USB can be used when the USB port peripheral device C5 option is installed The second or third lt NRf gt when USB is selected can be omitted if the drive is not partitioned or divided by LUN IMAGe SAVE Function Sets the name of the file for saving the screen image data or queries the current setting Syntax IMAGe SAVE NAME Filename SAVE NAME Example IMAGEI IMAGE SAVE NAME gt IMAGE SAVE NAME IMAGE1 Description Set the save destination drive with the s IMAGe SAVE DRIVe command and the directory with the IMAGe SAVE CDIRectory command Specify the file name without the extension IMAGe SEND Function Queries the screen image data Syntax IMAGe SEND Example IMAGE SEND gt 6 number of byte
112. terminator Itis NL END IM 760301 17E 310439 5 1 Messages Response Message Unit Format The response message unit format is shown below lt Response data gt Response gt gt Space lt Response Header gt A response header sometimes precedes the response data A space separates the data from the header For details see page 5 4 lt Response Data gt Response data contains the content of the response If there are multiple sets of response data they are separated by commas For details see page 5 5 Example 100 00E 03 lt RMT gt DISPLAY MODE WAVE lt RMT gt V PA Header Data If there are multiple queries in a program message responses are made in the same order as the queries In most cases a single query returns a single response message unit but there are a few queries that return multiple units The first response message unit always corresponds to the first query but the nt response unit may not necessarily correspond to the n query Therefore if you want to make sure that every response is retrieved divide the program messages into individual messages Precautions to Be Taken when Transferring Messages program message that does not contain a query is sent the next program message can be sent at any time f a program message that contains a query is sent a response me
113. the program message An error occurs if there is a query after this query PSC Power on Status Clear Function Sets whether to clear the registers below at power on or queries the current setting The register is cleared when the value rounded to an integer is a non zero value Standard event enable register Extended event enable register Transition filter Syntax PSC lt NRf gt PSC lt NRf gt 0 not clear non zero clear Example 5 1 PSC gt 1 Description For details on the registers see chapter 7 RST ReSeT Function Initializes the settings Syntax RST Example RST Description Also clears oPC and oPC commands that have been sent earlier All settings except communication settings are reset to factory default values SRE Service Request Enable register Function Sets the service request enable register or queries the current setting Syntax SRE lt gt SRE lt NRf gt 0 to 255 Example SRE 239 SRE gt 175 since the bit 6 MSS setting is ignored Description Specify the value as a sum of decimal values of each bit For example specifying SRE 239 will cause the service request enable register to be set to 11101111 In this case bit 4 of the service request enable register is disabled which means that bit 4 MAV of the status byte register is not set to 1 even if the output queue is not empty Bit 6 MSS of the status byte register is
114. the screen or queries the current setting 6 60 HCOPy DIRection Sets the printer or queries the current setting 6 60 HCOPy EXECute Executes the print operation 6 60 HCOPy NETPrint Queries all settings related to printing using a network printer 6 60 HCOPy NETPrint COLor Turns ON OFF color printing on the network printer or queries the current setting 6 60 HCOPy NETPrint FORMat Sets the printer description language for printing on a network printer or queries the current setting 6 60 HCOPy PRINter Queries all settings related to printing when using the built in printer 6 60 HCOPy PRINter FEED Executes paper feeding of the built in printer 6 60 HCOPy PRINter FORMat Sets the contents to be printed on the built in printer or queries the current setting 6 60 HCOPy PRINter LIST Queries all settings related to the printing of the numeric data list using the built in printer 6 61 HCOPy PRINter LIST INFOrmation Sets whether to add setup parameters when printing the numeric data list using the built in printer or queries the current setting 6 61 HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal Queries all settings related to the printed items of the numeric data list using the built in printer 6 61 IM 760301 17E 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal ALL Collectively turns ON OFF the output of all element functions when printing the numeric data list on the built in printer 6 61 H
115. the torque signal input or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor TORQue TYPE ANALog PULSe MOTor TORQue Example MOTOR TORQUE TYPE ANALOG MOTOR TORQUE TYPE gt MOTOR TORQUE TYPE ANALOG TORQue UNIT Function Sets the unit to add to the torque computation result or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor TORQue UNIT String MOTor TORQue UNIT lt String gt Up to 8 characters Example MOTOR TORQUE UNIT Nm MOTOR TORQUE UNIT gt MOTOR TORQUE UNIT Nm Description This command does not affect the computation result IM 760301 17E 6 83 6 18 Group commands this group deal with numeric data output There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group The NUMERIC key on the front panel can be used to specify the same settings The DISPlay group commands can be used to query the settings NUMeric Function Syntax Example Queries all settings related to the numeric data output NUMeric NUMERIC gt NUMERIC FORMAT ASCII NORMAL NUMBER 15 ITEM1 U 1 TOTAL ITEM2 I 1 TOTAL ITEM3 P 1 TOTAL ITEM4 S 1 TOTAL ITEM5 Q 1 TOTAL ITEM6 LAMBDA 1 TOTAL ITEM7 PHI 1 TOTAL ITEM8 FU 1 9 1 0 UPPEAK 1 11 1 12 1 ITEM13 IMPEAK 1 ITEM14 CFU 1 ITEM15 CFI 1 NUMERIC HOLD 0 NUMeric CBCycle Fun
116. to 4 NUMERIC NORMAL PRESET 1 Description For details on the output items that are preset see 1 Preset Pattern of Numeric Data Output Items page 6 98 By default output items of Pattern 2 is selected IM 760301 17E 6 95 6 18 NUMeric Group NUMeric NORMal VALue Function Queries the numeric data Syntax NUMeric NORMal VALue NRf lt NRf gt 1 to 255 item number Example Description Example when lt NRf gt is specified NUMERIC NORMAL VALUE 1 gt 104 75E 00 Example when lt NRf gt is omitted NUMERIC NORMAL VALUE gt 104 75E 00 105 02E 00 0 38E 00 omitted 49 868E 00 Example in which NUMeric FORMat is set to FLOat NUMERIC NORMAL VALUE gt 4 number of bytes 4 digits data byte sequence If lt NRf gt is specified only the numeric data of the item number is output If lt NRf gt is omitted the numeric data of item numbers from 1 to s NUMeric NORMal NUMber is output in order For the format of the individual numeric data that is output see Numeric Data Format at the end of this group of commands see page 6 97 6 96 IM 760301 17E 6 18 Numeric Data Format 1 Normal Data Frequency FU and FI ASCII NR3 format mantissa 5 digits exponent 2 digits example 50 000E 00 FLOAT IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format Elapsed time of integrati
117. to other unselected communication interfaces Cann Device System Overview Network Date Time Contig Selftest 4 4 760301 17 4 3 Setting the Ethernet Control Setting the User account user name and password 5 Press the User Account soft key to display the User Account dialog box 6 Press the cursor keys to select User Name 7 Press SET A keyboard appears 8 Use the keyboard to enter the user name For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings in the User s Manual IM760301 01E Press the cursor keys to select Password The password setting is entered twice 10 Press SET A keyboard appears 11 Use the keyboard to enter the password A password is not required if the login name is anonymous Forkeyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings in the User s Manual IM760301 01E Setting the Timeout Value 12 Press the cursor keys to select Time Out 13 Press SET The timeout value entry box appears 14 Press the cursor keys to set the timeout value 15 Press SET or ESC to close the box Conn M4 Comm Device Netuork a User Account User Account j User Nane anonymous Passuord Tine ut sec Entering TCP IP Settings You must enter TCP IP settings to control the WT3000 from a PC using the Ethernet interface For the setup procedure see section 5 2 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM
118. 0 and 0 to 360 for 360 MEASure SAMPling Function Sets the sampling frequency or queries the current setting Syntax MEASure SAMPling AUTO CLKA CLKB CLKC MEASure SAMPling Example MEASURE SAMPLING AUTO MEASURE SAMPLING gt MEASURE SAMPLING AUTO Description For details on the sampling frequency corresponding to AUTO CLKA CLKB CLKC see the User s Manual IM760301 01E MEASure SQFormula Function Syntax Example Sets the equation used to compute S apparent power and Q reactive power or queries the current setting MEASure SQFormula SQFormula MEASURE SQFORMULA 1 MEASURE SQFORMULA gt MEASURE SQFORMULA 1 Description For details on the equation corresponding to 1 TYPE3 see the User s Manual IM760301 01E TYPES is selectable only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option MEASure SYNChronize Function Syntax Example Sets the synchronized measurement mode or queries the current setting MEASure SYNChronize MASTer SLAVe MEASure SYNChronize MEASURE SYNCHRONIZE MASTER MEASURE SYNCHRONIZE gt MEASURE SYNCHRONIZE MASTER 6 80 IM 760301 17E 6 17 Group The commands this group deal with the motor evaluation function You can make the same settings and i
119. 1 DISPlay WAVE MAPPing Queries all settings related to the waveform mapping to the split screen 6 41 DISPlay WAVE MAPPing MODE Sets the waveform mapping method for the split screen or queries the current setting 6 41 DISPlay 1 U x lt gt SPEed TORQue Sets the waveform mapping to the split screen or queries the current setting 6 42 DISPlay WAVE POSition Queries all settings related to the vertical position level of the center position of the waveform 6 42 DISPlay WAVE POSition UALL Collectively sets the vertical position level of the center position of the waveform voltage current of all elements 6 42 DISPlay WAVE POSition U lt x gt I lt x gt Sets the vertical position level of the center position of the waveform voltage current of the element or queries the current setting 6 42 DISPlay WAVE SVALue Turns ON OFF the scale value display or queries the current setting 6 42 DISPlay WAVE TDIV Sets the Time div value of the waveform or queries the current setting 6 42 DISPlay WAVE TLABel Turns ON OFF the waveform labels or queries the current setting 6 42 DISPlay WAVE TRIGger Queries all settings related to the trigger 6 42 DISPlay WAVE TRIGger LEVel Sets the trigger level or queries the current setting 6 42 DISPlay WAVE TRIGger MODE Sets the trigger mode or queries the current setting 6 43 DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SLOPe Sets the tri
120. 1 STATE 1 OBJECT U1 LABEL FFT1 DISPLAY FFT FFT2 STATE 1 OBJECT I1 LABEL FFT2 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option 6 30 IM 760301 17E 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay FFT FFT lt x gt Function Queries all settings related to the FFT waveform Syntax DISPlay FFT FFT lt x gt x 1 2 FFT Example DISPLAY FFT FFT1 gt DISPLAY FFT FFT1 STATE 1 OBJECT U1 LABEL Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option DISPlay FFT lt gt 1 Function Sets the label of the FFT waveform or queries the current setting DISPlay FFT FFT lt x gt LABel lt String gt DISPlay FFT FFT lt x gt LABel lt gt 1 2 FFT lt String gt Up to 8 characters DISPLAY FFT FFT1 LABEL FFT1 DISPLAY FFT FFT1 LABEL gt DISPLAY FFT FFT1 LABEL FFT1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option Syntax Example DISPlay FFT FFT lt x gt OBJect Function Sets the source waveform of the FFT computation or queries the current setting DISPlay FFT FFT lt x gt OBJect U lt x gt I lt x gt P lt x gt PA PB Q lt x gt QA QB SPEed TORQue DISPlay FFT FFT lt x gt O0BJect lt x gt of FFT lt x gt 1 2 FFT lt x gt of U lt x gt lt gt P lt x gt Q lt x gt 1 to 4 element
121. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Example in which NUMeric FORMat is set to FLOat NUMERIC FLICKER JUDGEMENT gt 4 number of bytes four digits data byte sequence Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option The contents and order of the judgment results that are output are in the fixed format below To modify the output contents and order use the NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation commands Output contents and order of Judgment results For function names see the description for NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation lt gt Numbers refer to elements ALL is the overall judgment result for all measured elements JTOTal ALL JDC1 JDMAX1 JDT1 JPST1 JPLT1 JTOTal1t JDC2 JDMAX2 JDT2 JPST2 JPLT2 JTOTaH 2 output only for 2 to 4 element models JDC3 JDMAX3 JDT3 JPST3 JPLT3 JTOTaH 3 output only for to 4 element models JDC4 JDMAX4 JDT4 JPST4 JPLT4 JTOTaH 4 output only for 4 element models For 1 element models 7 data from JTOTal ALL to JTOTal1 are output For 2 element models 13 data from JTOTal ALL to JTOTal2 are output For 3 element models 19 data from JTOTal ALL to JTOTal3 are output For 4 element models 25 data from JTOTal ALL to JTOTal4 are output If parameters are specified the judgment results of the specified observation period are output If parameters are om
122. 1 interface functions the subsets that are supported See section 1 3 GP IB Interface Specifications The operation of the device when it is assigned an address outside the 0 to 30 range The address of this instrument cannot be set to an address outside the 0 to 30 range Reaction of the device when the user changes the address The address change occurs when the address is specified using the MISC key menu The new address is valid until the next time it is changed Device settings at power up The commands that can be used at power up Basically the previous settings i e the settings which were valid when power was turned OFF are valid All commands can be used at power up Message exchange options a Input buffer size 1024 bytes b Queries that return multiple response units See the example of the commands given in chapter 6 c Queries that create response data when the command syntax is being analyzed All queries create response data when the command syntax is analyzed d Queries that create response data during reception There are no queries of which the response data are created upon receiving a send request from the controller e Commands that have parameters the restrict one another See the example of the commands given in chapter 6 Items that are included in the functional or composite header elements constituting a command See chapter 5 and 6 Buffer sizes that affect block data transmi
123. 2 IM 760301 17E 2 7 uondo 552 54 2 6 Setting the 5 232 Control Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT ciis NUMERIC sae vos HOLD Cursor keys Wig lt gt 5 CAL FORM USER esee INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET v To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above scarna TOTOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the CURSOR O NULL PR cursor keys be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE iuace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 in the User s Manual IM760301 01E print MENU Selecting the RS 232 Conirol 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Remote Control soft key to display the Remote Ctrl menu 3 Pressthe Device soft key to select RS232 Only the communication interface selected here is enabled WT3000 does not accept commands that are transmitted to other unselected communication interfaces Selecting the Baud Rate 4 Press the curso
124. 60301 01E Queries all settings related to the computation of Pc Corrected Power PC MEASURE PC gt MEASURE PC IEC 1976 1 0 5000 2 0 5000 IM 760301 17E 6 79 6 16 5 MEASure PC IEC Function Syntax Example Sets the equation used to compute Pc Corrected Power or queries the current setting MEASure PC IEC lt NRf gt MEASure PC IEC lt NRf gt 1976 1993 MEASURE PC IEC 1976 MEASURE PC IEC gt MEASURE PC IEC 1976 Description Specify the year when the equation used to calculate the Pc was issued by IEC76 1 MEASure PC P lt x gt Function Syntax Example Sets the parameter used to compute Pc Corrected Power or queries the current setting MEASure PC P lt x gt lt NRf gt MEASure PC P lt x gt x 1 2 P1 P2 lt NRf gt 0 0001 to 9 9999 1 0 5 MEASURE PC P1 gt MEASURE PC P1 0 5000 Description This parameter is used when the sMEASure PC IEC setting is set to 1976 IEC76 1 1976 MEASure PHASe Function Sets the display format of the phase difference or queries the current setting Syntax MEASure PHASe lt NRf gt MEASure PHASe lt NRf gt 180 or 360 Example MEASURE PHASE 180 MEASURE PHASE gt MEASURE PHASE 180 Description Displays the phase using 0 to 180 Lead Lag for 18
125. 7 HARMonics IEC OBJect Sets the IEC harmonic measurement target or queries the current setting 6 57 HARMonics IEC UGRouping IGRouping Sets the voltage current grouping of the IEC harmonic measurement or queries the current setting 6 57 HARMonics ORDer Sets the maximum and minimum orders to be measured or queries the current setting 6 57 HARMonics PLLSource Sets the PLL source or queries the current setting 6 58 HARMonics PLLWarning Queries all settings related to the warning messages of the PLL source 6 58 HARMonics PLLWarning STATe Sets whether to generate a warning message when the PLL source is not applied or queries the current setting 6 58 HARMonics THD Sets the equation used to compute the THD total harmonic distortion or queries the current setting 6 58 HCOPy Group HCOPy Queries all settings related to printing 6 59 HCOPy ABORt Aborts printing or paper feeding 6 59 HCOPy AUTO Queries all settings related to the auto print 6 59 HCOPy AUTO INTerval Sets the auto print interval or queries the current setting 6 59 HCOPy AUTO STARt END Sets the start stop reservation time of the auto print or queries the current setting 6 59 HCOPy AUTO STATe Turns ON OFF the auto print or queries the current setting 6 59 AUTO SYNChronize Sets the synchronization mode of the auto print or queries the current setting 6 59 HCOPy COMMent Sets the comment displayed at the bottom of
126. 760301 51E Restarting the Instrument You must restart the instrument after changing or entering a new setting for the user account timeout value or TCP IP in order for the settings to take effect IM 760301 17E 4 5 uondo 5 B 4 3 Setting the Ethernet Control Explanation You can control the WT3000 from a PC using the Ethernet interface YOKOGAWA s dedicated library software TMCTL must be installed on the PC in addition to entering the settings described above Retail Software WTViewer 760121 Version 4 01 or higher A trial version is available for download from the following URL http www yokogawa com tm 7601 22 Setting the User Name Enter the user name to allow access to the WT3000 Enter up to 15 characters The characters that can be used are 0 9 4 _ parentheses minus sign If you specify anonymous the WT3000 can be accessed from the outside PC without a password Setting the Password Enter the password for the user name to allow access to the WT3000 Enter up to 15 characters The characters that can be used are 0 9 4 _ parentheses minus sign If the user name is set to anonymous the WT3000 can be accessed from the outside PC without a password The password setting is entered twice Setting the Timeout Value The WT3000 closes the connection to the network if there is no access for a certain
127. 8 display color mode eee 6 110 display colors cr nti ttes 6 110 display format of bar graph 6 29 display format of trend IM 760301 17E Index 1 display format of waveform 6 41 DISPlay group ciii eorom nitore o coe idi 6 29 display mode nente ner nine 6 35 DMAX oo cin Led a rc 6 86 Gur d 6 53 AMIN reor enit clin ded veo 6 53 M 6 86 E Page efficiency compensation eese 6 77 efficiency computation 6 78 Elapsed measurement time 6 86 enable registers 4 4244 2 20 7 2 end order error data error messages 1 1 nenas 2 error queue 2 nennen 6 103 7 2 7 9 error queue clearing 6 114 ethierniet conttrol cerea 4 4 ethernet interface specifications 4 2 extended event enable register 6 103 7 2 extended event register 5 9 6 103 7 2 7 7 external current sensor input 6 67 F Page factory default
128. ASure AVERaging STATe Boolean MEASure AVERaging STATe MEASURE AVERAGING STATE MEASURE AVERAGING STATE gt MEASURE AVERAGING STATE 1 6 76 IM 760301 17E 6 16 MEASure Group MEASure AVERaging TYPE Function Sets the averaging type or queries the current setting Syntax MEASure AVERaging TYPE EXPonent LINear MEASure AVERaging MEASURE AVERAGING TYPE EXPONENT MEASURE AVERAGING TYPE gt MEASURE AVERAGING TYPE EXPONENT Description The averaging of measurement functions of harmonic measurement option is valid only for EXPonent For details see the User s Manual 1M760301 01E Example MEASure COMPensation Function Queries all settings related to the compensation computation Syntax MEASure COMPensation Example MEASURE COMPENSATION gt MEASURE COMPENSATION WIRING ELEMENT1 OFF ELEMENT2 OFF ELEMENT3 OFF ELEMENT4 OFF MEASURE COMPENSATION EFFICIENCY 0 MEASure COMPensation EFFiciency Function Turns ON OFF the efficiency compensation or queries the current setting Syntax MEASure COMPensation EFFiciency Boolean Example MEASURE COMPENSATION EFFICIENCY MEASURE COMPENSATION EFFICIENCY gt MEASURE COMPENSATION EFFICIENCY 1 MEASure COMPensation V3A3 Function Turns ON OFF the compensation for the two wattmeter method or queries the current setting Syntax MEASure COMPensation V3A3 Boolean Exampl
129. BKEYBOARD gt SYSTEM USBKEYBOARD JAPANESE Description This command is valid only on models with the USB port peripheral device C5 option IM 760301 17E 6 111 6 23 WAVeform Group The commands in this group deal with the output of the retrieved waveform display data There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group WAVeform Function Queries all settings related to the output of waveform display data Syntax WAVeform Example WAVEFORM gt WAVEFORM TRACE 01 FORMAT ASCII START 0 END 1001 HOLD 0 WAVeform BYTeorder Function Sets the output byte order of the waveform display data FLOAT format that is transmitted by WAVeform SEND or queries the current setting Syntax WAVeform BYTeorder LSBFirst MSBFirst WAVeform BYTeorder WAVEFORM BYTEORDER LSBFIRST WAVEFORM BYTEORDER gt WAVEFORM BYTEORDER LSBFIRST Description This value is valid when WAVeform FORMat is set to FLOat Example WAVeform END Function Sets the output end point of the waveform display data that is transmitted by WAVeform SEND or queries the current setting Syntax WAVeform END lt NRf gt WAVeform END lt NRf gt 0 to 1001 Example WAVEFORM END 1001 WAVEFORM END gt WAVEFORM END 1001 WAVeform FORMat Function Sets the format of the waveform display data that is transmitted b
130. CBCycle STATe Queries the Cycle by Cycle measurement status 6 22 CBCycle SYNChronize Queries all settings related to the synchronization source of Cycle by Cycle measurement 6 22 CBCycle SYNChronize SLOPe Sets the slope of the synchronization source of Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting 6 22 CBCycle SYNChronize SOURce Sets the synchronization source for Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting 6 23 CBCycle TIMEout Sets the timeout value for Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting 6 23 CBCycle TRIGger Queries all settings related to triggers 6 23 CBCycle TRIGger LEVel Sets the trigger level or queries the current setting 6 23 CBCycle TRIGger MODE Sets the trigger mode or queries the current setting 6 23 CBCycle TRIGger SLOPe Sets the trigger slope or queries the current setting 6 23 CBCycle TRIGger SOURce Sets the trigger source or queries the current setting 6 23 COMMunicate Group COMMunicate Queries all settings related to communications 6 24 COMMunicate HEADer Sets whether to add a header to the response to a query or queries the current setting 6 24 COMMunicate LOCKout Sets or clears local lockout 6 24 COMMunicate OPSE Sets the overlap command that is to be used by the OPC OPC and WAI commands or queries the current setting 6 24 COMMunicate OPSR Queries the operation pending status register 6 24 COMMunicate OVERlap Sets the commands that will o
131. COPy PRINter LIST 1 ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB Turns ON OFF the output of each element XB when printing the numeric data list on the built in printer 6 61 PRINter LIST NORMal PRESet lt x gt Presets the output ON OFF pattern of the element functions when printing the numeric data list on the built in printer 6 61 HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal Function Turns ON OFF the output of the function when printing the numerical data list using the built in printer or queries the current setting 6 62 HOLD Group HOLD Sets the output data display communications etc hold or queries the current setting 6 63 IMAGe Group IMAGe Queries all settings related to the saving of the screen image data 6 64 IMAGe ABORt Aborts the saving of the screen image data 6 64 IMAGe COLor Sets the color tone of the screen image data to be saved or queries the current setting 6 64 COMMent Sets the comment displayed at the bottom of the screen or queries the current setting 6 64 3 IMAGe COMPression Sets the data compression when the screen image data is in BMP format 3 or queries the current setting 6 64 5 IMAGe EXECute Saves the screen image data 6 64 S FORMat Sets the output format of the screen image data to be saved or queries the 9 current setting 6 64 IMAGe SAVE Queries all settings related to the saving of the screen image data 6 64 3 IMAGe
132. COPy PRINter LIST INFOrmation 6 61 HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal 6 61 HCOPy PRINter LIST 6 61 HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal lt Function gt m HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal PRESet lt x gt HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal ELEMent lt x gt 5 6 61 4 5 iiri eei eee 6 60 Pu 6 59 HOLD P IMAGe ABORt gt us iit eene ti ie 6 64 20 6 64 IMAGE EXECUTE inciter ce emet 6 64 MAGe FORMat 6 64 IMAGe SAVE ANAMing 2 2 6 64 IMAGe SAVE CDIRectory 6 64 QIMAGe SAVE DHIVe itinere 6 65 5 6 65 cci eee aree 6 64 IMAGE SEND yiri tees 6 65 IMAGE osineen einig 6 64 INPUT 6 66 INTEGrate ACAL 2 erri t tiere 6 74 QINTEGrate MODE inhaerere titi 6 74 AQINTEGrate RESet 6 74 INTEGrate RTIMe STARI END
133. COUNT 100 TIMEOUT 10 FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 50 0E 03 ELEMENT2 50 0E 03 ELEMENT3 50 0E 03 ELEMENT4 50 0E 03 Syntax Example CBCycle COUNt Function Sets the number of cycles for Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting CBCycle COUNt lt NRf gt CBCycle COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 3000 number of measured cycles CBCYCLE COUNT 100 CBCYCLE COUNT gt CBCYCLE COUNT 100 Syntax Example CBCycle DISPlay Function Queries all settings related to the Cycle by Cycle display CBCycle DISPlay CBCYCLE DISPLAY gt CBCYCLE DISPLAY ITEM1 FREQ 2 U 1 ITEM3 1 4 1 ITEM5 S 1 CURSOR 1 Syntax Example CBCycle DISPlay CURSor Function Sets the cursor position of the Cycle by Cycle display or queries the current setting Syntax CBCycle DISPlay CURSor lt NRf gt CBCycle DISPlay CURSor lt NRf gt 1 to 3000 cursor position Example CBCYCLE DISPLAY CURSOR 1 CBCYCLE DISPLAY CURSOR gt CBCYCLE DISPLAY CURSOR 1 Description Specifies the cursor position by the cycle number You make the same setting or query with the DISPlay CBCycle CURSor command CBCycle Function Syntax Example Description 1 Function Syntax Example Description DISPlay ITEM lt x gt Sets the displayed items function and element of the Cycle by Cycle display or queries the current setting CBCycle DISPlay ITEM lt x gt lt Fu
134. DISPlay FFT POINt lt NRf gt 20000 200000 DISPLAY FFT POINT 20000 DISPLAY FFT POINT gt DISPLAY FFT POINT 20000 This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option FFT SCOPe Sets the display range of the FFT waveform or queries the current setting DISPlay FFT SCOPe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt DISPlay FFT SCOPe 1st lt NRf gt 0 to 99990 display start point 2nd lt NRf gt 10 to 100000 display end point DISPLAY FFT SCOPE 0 10000 DISPLAY FFT SCOPE gt DISPLAY FFT SCOPE 0 10000 This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option Set the start point and then the end point Set the end point so that it is greater than or equal to start point 10 IM 760301 17E 6 31 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay FFT SPECtrum Function Sets the display spectrum format of the FFT waveform or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay FFT SPECtrum LINE BAR DISPlay FFT SPECtrum Example DISPLAY FFT SPECTRUM LINE DISPLAY FFT SPECTRUM gt DISPLAY FFT SPECTRUM LINE Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option DISPlay FFT VSCale Function Sets the display scale of the vertical axis of the FFT waveform or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay FFT VSCale LINear LOG DISPlay FFT VSCale Example DISPLA
135. E No display item Function 0 1 5 0 See the function selection list 1 on page 6 44 Element lt NRf gt SIGMA SIGMB lt NRf gt 1104 Order TOTal DC lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 100 DISPLAY TREND 1 FUNCTION U 1 TOTAL DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 FUNCTION gt DISPLAY TREND 1 FUNCTION U 1 TOTAL If Element is omitted element 1 is set f Order is omitted TOTal is set Element or Order is omitted from response to functions that do not need them TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing Queries all settings related to the scaling of the trend DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing x 1 to 16 item number DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 SCALING gt DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 SCALING MODE AUTO VALUE 100 0E 00 100 0E 00 IM 760301 17E 6 39 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay ITEM lt x gt SCALing MODE Function Sets the scaling mode of the trend or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing MODE AUTO MANual DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing MODE x 1 to 16 item number Example DISPLAY TREND 1 SCALING MODE AUTO DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 SCALING MODE gt DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 SCALING MODE AUTO DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing VALue Function Sets the upper and lower limits of manu
136. E MOTor OFF Line filter OFF frequency 100 Hz 50 kHz line filter ON cutoff frequency Description Available only with the motor version MV CBCycle RESet Function Resets Cycle by Cycle measurement Syntax CBCycle RESet Example CBCYCLE RESET CBCycle STARt Function Starts Cycle by Cycle measurement Syntax CBCycle STARt Example START 1 Function Queries the Cycle by Cycle measurement status Syntax CBCycle STATe Example CBCYCLE STATE gt RESET Description The contents of the response are as follows RESet Reset status STARt Measuring COMPlete Measurement finished and measured results displayed TIMEout Timeout ERRFreq Measurement finished frequency measurement error occurred CBCycle SYNChronize Function Queries all settings related to the synchronization source for Cycle by Cycle measurement Syntax CBCycle SYNChronize Example CBCYCLE SYNCHRONIZE gt CBCYCLE SYNCHRONIZE SOURCE 01 SLOPE RISE CBCycle SYNChronize SLOPe Function Sets the slope of the synchronization source of Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting Syntax CBCycle SYNChronize SLOPe RISE FALL CBCycle SYNChronize SLOPe Example CBCYCLE SYNCHRONIZE SLOPE RISE CBCYCLE SYNCHRONIZE SLOPE gt CBCYCLE SYNCHRONIZE SLOPE RISE 6 22 IM 760301 17E 6 4 1 SYNChronize SOUR
137. E1 STORe FILE ANAMing Function Syntax Example Sets whether to automatically name the files when saving the stored data or queries the current setting STORe FILE ANAMing Boolean STORe FILE ANAMing STORE FILE ANAMING ON STORE FILE ANAMING gt STORE FILE ANAMING 1 STORe FILE COMMent Function Syntax Example STORe FILE Function Syntax Example Description Sets the comment to be added to the file when saving the stored data or queries the current setting STORe FILE COMMent String STORe FILE COMMent lt String gt Up to 25 characters STORE FILE COMMENT CASE1 STORE FILE COMMENT gt STORE FILE COMMENT CASE1 Sets the name of the file when saving the stored data or queries the current setting STORe FILE NAME Filename STORe FILE NAME STORE FILE NAME DATA1 STORE FILE NAME gt STORE FILE NAME DATA1 Set the save destination drive and directory of the stored data using the following commands Destination drive FILE DRIVe Directory FILE CDIRectory The save destination path can be queried using the FILE PATH command STORe FILE Function Syntax Example Sets the data format when saving the stored data or queries the current setting STORe FILE TYPE ASCii FLOat STORe FILE TYPE STORE FILE TYPE ASCII STORE FILE TYPE gt
138. E12 RATE13 RATE14 15 117 119 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 I 1 TOTAL P 1 TOTAL S 1 TOTAL Q 1 TOTAL LAMBDA 1 TOTAL PHI 1 TOTAL CHANNEL8 FU 1 FI 1 CHANNEL10 NONE NONE CHANNEL12 NONE NONE CHANNEL14 NONE NONE CHANNEL16 NONE NONE CHANNEL18 NONE NONE CHANNEL20 NONE D MODE2 FIXED D MODE4 FIXED D MODE6 FIXED D MODE8 FIXED FIXED MODE10 FIXED 0 00 100 0 00 100 0 00 100 0 00 100 0 00 100 0 00 100 0 00 100 0 00 100 0 00 100 0 00 100 0 00 100 0 00 100 0 00 100 0 00 100 0 00 100 FIXED FIXED FIXED FIXED FIXED 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 16 100 0 00 100 0 00 17 100 0 00 100 0 00 18 100 0 00 100 0 00 19 100 0 00 100 0 00 20 100 0 00 100 0 00 IRTIME 1 0 0 AOUTput NORMal 1 lt gt Function Syntax Example Sets the D A output items function element and harmonic order or queries the current setting AOUTput NORMal CHANnel lt x gt NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt AOUTput 1 1 lt gt 9 x 1 to 20 output channel 3 NONE No output item 3 Function
139. ERMINALS ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS A 1000 MAX TO al 1000V MAX TO A 100V MAX TO Ja 00V MAX TO fj 100 2400V AC soeone 200VA FUSE 250V T 63A IM 760301 17E 2 1 2 2 Receiving Function You can specify the same settings as those specified by front panel key operations Receives output requests for measured and computed data setup parameters of the Sending Function panel and error codes RS 232 Interface Functions and Specifications Outputs measured and computed data Outputs panel setup parameters and the status byte Outputs error codes that have occurred Switching between Remote and Local Modes When Switching from Local to Remote Mode If the WT3000 receives a COMMunicate REMote ON command from the PC when it is in the local mode it switches to the remote mode The REMOTE indicator is turned ON All keys except the LOCAL key are disabled Settings entered in local mode are retained even when the WT3000 switches to remote mode When Switching from Remote to Local Mode Pressing LOCAL key in remote mode puts the instrument in local mode However this is void when the WT3000 has received a cOMMunicate LOCKout ON command from the PC local lockout condition Whe
140. FLICker FUNCtion VALue Queries the measured flicker data variable format 6 87 NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation Queries all settings related to output of flicker judgment results variable format 6 87 NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation CLEar Clears the output items of flicker judgment results variable format 6 88 NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation DELete Deletes the output items of flicker judgment results variable format 6 88 NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation ITEM lt x gt Sets output items function element and observation period of flicker judgment results variable format or queries the current setting 6 88 NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation NUMber Sets the number of flicker judgment results output by NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation VALue or queries the current setting 6 89 NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation VALue Queries the flicker judgment results variable format 6 89 NUMeric FLICker JUDGement Queries the flicker judgment results fixed format 6 90 NUMeric FLICker PERiod Queries the observation period number currently being measured during flicker measurement 6 90 NUMeric FLICker VALue Queries the measured flicker data fixed format 6 91 NUMeric FORMat Sets the format of the numeric data that is transmitted by s NUMeric NORMal VALue NUMeric LIST VALue or queries the current setting 6 91 NUMeric HOLD Sets whether to hold ON or release OFF all the numeric data or queries the current setting 6 92 NU
141. FTFORMat ctt 6 31 CBOycle STARt DISPlay FFTPOINt ttt 6 31 CBOycle STATe 9 9 0 lt 6 22 DISPlay FFTESCOPe ttt 6 31 CBOycle SYNChronize SLOPe 44 44444 tnt 6 22 DISPlay FFT SPECtrum 6 32 CBCycle SYNChronize SOURCE 6 23 DISPlay FFT VSCale CBCycle SYNChronize assesseer 6 22 DISPlay FFT WINDow iCBCycle TIMEOUt 6 23 IM 760301 17E Index 5 6 6 30 DISPlay FLICker ELEMent 2 6 32 6 32 DISPlay FLICker PERiod 6 32 DISPlay FLICker 6 32 DISPlay INFOrmation PAGE 6 32 DISPlay INFOrmation eene 6 32 DISPlay INFOrmation STATe 6 32 DISPlay MATH CONSGtant xs 6 33 DISPlay MATH MATH x EXPRession 6 33 015 lt gt _ 6 33 DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing CENTer 6 34 DISPlay MATH MATH x SCALing MODE 6 34 DISPlay MATH MATH x SCALing SDIV 6 34 DISPlay MATH MATH x SCALing
142. FUNCtion NUMber is output in order The format of individual numeric data that is output is as follows 1 Data when normal Elapsed measurement time TIME ASCII lt NR1 gt format in units of seconds Example for 1 hour 1 00 00 3600 FLOAT IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format in units of seconds Example 1 hour 1 00 00 0x45610000 No items NONE ASCII Not A Number FLOAT Ox7E951BEE 9 91 37 Other than above ASCII NR3 format mantissa 5 digits exponent 2 digits Example 229 87 00 FLOAT IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format 2 Error Data Data does not exist display ASCII Not A Number FLOAT Ox7E951BEE 9 91 37 Overrange display O L Overflow display O F Data over display Error No steady state condition display Undef ASCII INF INFinity FLOAT Ox7E94F56A 9 9E 37 lt 1 to 32 item number NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation Example when lt NRf gt is specified Function Queries all settings related to output of flicker NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION judgment results variable format VALUE 4 gt 1 52E 00 Syntax NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation Example when lt NRf gt is omitted Example NUMERIC FLICKER INFORMATION gt NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION VALUE gt 600 229 75E 00 50 000E 00 1 52E 00 1 56E 00 3E 00 0 43E 00 0 17E 00 Exampl
143. GE lt gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PAGE lt NRf gt 1 to 9 page number DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 PAGE 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 PAGE gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 PAGE 1 When the page number is set the cursor position moves to the beginning of the page 6 38 IM 760301 17E 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PRESet Function Sets the displayed items on the numeric display 4 value 8 value 16 value display to preset pattern DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PRESet lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 4 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VALA PRESET 1 Description Regardless of what value 1 to 4 is specified for lt the display pattern order of the numeric display items will be the same as the display order when Reset Items Exec of the ITEM setting menu which is displayed on the WT3000 screen is executed For details on the order of displayed items when reset is executed see the User s Manual IM760301 01E Syntax Example DISPlay TRENd Function Queries all settings related to the trend DISPlay TRENd DISPLAY TREND gt DISPLAY TREND FORMAT SINGLE T1 1 T2 1 T3 1 T4 1 T5 1 T6 1 T7 1 T8 1 T9 0 T10 0 T11 0 T12 0 T13 0 14 0 T15 0 T16 0 TDIV 0 0 3 FUNCTION U 1 TOTAL SCALING MODE AUTO VALUE 100 0 00 100 0 00 DISPLAY TREND 2 FUNCTION
144. GMA SIGMB Collectively sets the current mode of all elements belonging to wiring unit ZA XB 6 67 INPut CURRent RANGe Queries the current ranges of all elements 6 67 INPut CURRent RANGe ALL Collectively sets the current ranges of all elements 6 67 IM 760301 17E 6 9 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page INPut CURRent RANGe ELEMent lt x gt Sets the current range of the element or queries the current setting 6 68 INPut CURRent RANGe SIGMA SIGMB Collectively sets the current range of all elements belonging to wiring unit ZA XB 6 68 INPut CURRent SRATio Queries the current sensor scaling constants of all elements 6 69 INPut CURRent SRATio ALL Collectively sets the current sensor scaling constants of all elements 6 69 INPut CURRent SRATio ELEMent x Sets the current sensor scaling constant of the element or queries the current setting 6 69 INPut FILTer Queries all settings related to the input filter 6 69 INPut FILTer FREQuency Queries the frequency filter ON OFF setting of all elements 6 69 INPut FILTer FREQuency ALL Collectively turns ON OFF the frequency filter of all elements 6 69 INPut FILTer FREQuency ELEMent x Turns ON OFF the frequency filter of the element or queries the current Setting 6 69 INPut FILTer LINE Queries the line filter settings of all elements 6 69 INPut FILTer LINE ALL Collectively sets the line fi
145. Grolp 6 57 TEM Lene ACI Vo Dm 6 59 6 12 E 6 63 1 760301 17 Contents Chapter 7 Appendix Index 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 IMAGO GFOUp tents 6 64 INPut Group at t ubi 6 66 INTEGrate ete ales diete uisi eoe 6 74 MEASure GrEOoUp E 6 76 MOTOr GrOUp ida 6 81 eae Io piene au 6 84 BATE GIO D ini ERREUR E In gd 6 102 STATUS GOUD end c Lan eet dde c ul e ie d 6 103 STORE Group end 6 105 SYSTem GrIOUp i5 ties ftd deret ct eR e eb bep 6 109 WAVetorm Group iiie tle ede ca E ee e E 6 112 Common Commarng Group iis uoces coi recedet oat eto e epe te qu died 6 114 Status Reports 7 1 Status ditor rtc li die tro B a Eb age eet 7 1 Status Byt nein theta e ca ce d ht a ei 7 3 7 3 Standard Event Register 7 5 7 4 Extended Event Register nnne 7 7 7 5 Output Queue and Error 1 enne 7 9 Appendix 1 ASCII Character Codes neret App 1 Appendix 2 Error
146. HCOPy AUTO SYNChronize Function Syntax Example Sets the synchronization mode of the auto print or queries the current setting HCOPy AUTO SYNChronize TIMer INTEGrate AUTO SYNChronize TIMer Timer synchronized printing INTEGrate Integration synchronized printing HCOPY AUTO SYNCHRONIZE TIMER HCOPY AUTO SYNCHRONIZE gt HCOPY AUTO SYNCHRONIZE TIMER IM 760301 17E 6 59 6 11 COMMent Function Sets the comment displayed at the bottom of the screen or queries the current setting Syntax HCOPy COMMent String HCOPy COMMent String gt 25 characters or less However only the first 20 characters are displayed Example HCOPY COMMENT THIS IS TEST HCOPY COMMENT HCOPY COMMENT THIS IS TEST HCOPy DIRection Function Sets the printer or queries the current setting Syntax HCOPy DIRection PRINter NETPrint HCOPy DIRection PRINter Built in printer NETPrint 2 Network printer Example HCOPY DIRECTION PRINTER HCOPY DIRECTION gt HCOPY DIRECTION PRINTER Description PRINTer is valid only when the built in printer B5 option is installed NETPrint is valid only when the Ethernet interface C7 option is installed HCOPy EXECute Function Executes printing Syntax HCOPy EXECute Example EXECUTE Description This command is an overlap command HCOPy NETPrint Function Queries all settin
147. IMAGE COMPRESSION 1 Description This command is valid when the format IMAGe FORMat is BMP and the color tone IMAGe COLor is COLor REVerse GRAY Example IMAGe EXECute Function Saves the screen image data Syntax IMAGe EXECute Example IMAGE EXECUTE IMAGe FORMat Function Sets the format of the screen image data to be saved or queries the current setting Syntax IMAGe FORMat TIFF PSCRipt PNG JPEG FORMat Example IMAGE FORMAT TIFF IMAGE FORMAT gt IMAGE FORMAT TIFF IMAGe SAVE Function Queries all settings related to the saving of screen image data Syntax IMAGe SAVE Example IMAGE SAVE gt IMAGE SAVE ANAMING 1 NAME SAVE 1 Function Sets whether to automatically name the screen image data files to be saved or queries the current setting Syntax IMAGe SAVE ANAMing lt Boolean gt SAVE ANAMing Example IMAGE SAVE ANAMING ON IMAGE SAVE ANAMING gt IMAGE SAVE ANAMING 1 SAVE CDIRectory Function Changes the save destination directory for the screen image data Syntax IMAGe CDIRectory lt Filename gt lt Filename gt Directory name Example IMAGE CDIRECTORY IMAGE Description Specify to move up to the parent directory 6 64 IM 760301 17E 6 13 IMAGe Group SAVE DRIVe Function Sets the save destination drive
148. INt Sets the number of points of the FFT computation or queries the 9 current setting 6 31 DISPlay FFT SCOPe Sets the display range of the FFT waveform or queries the current setting 6 31 DISPlay FFT SPECtrum Sets the display spectrum format of the FFT waveform or queries the current setting 6 32 DISPlay FFT VSCale Sets the display scale of the vertical axis of the FFT waveform or queries the current setting 6 32 DISPlay FFT WINDow Sets the window function of the FFT computation or queries the current setting 6 32 DISPlay FLICker Queries all settings related to flicker measurement display 6 32 DISPlay FLICker ELEMent Sets the element to be displayed for flicker measurement display or queries the current setting 6 32 DISPlay FLICker PAGE Sets the number of the page to be displayed for flicker measurement display or queries the current setting 6 32 DISPlay FLICker PERiod Sets the observation period number to be displayed for flicker measurement display or queries the current setting 6 32 DISPlay INFOrmation Queries all settings related to the display of the setup parameter list 6 32 DISPlay INFOrmation PAGE Sets the page number of the display of setup parameter list or queries the current setting 6 32 DISPlay INFOrmation STATe Turns ON OFF the display of the setup parameter list or queries the current setting 6 32 DISPlay MATH Queries all settings related to the computed waveform display 6 33 DISPlay MATH CONSt
149. ISPlay WAVE POSition U x I x Function Syntax Example Sets the vertical position level of the center position of the waveform voltage current of the element or queries the current setting DISPlay WAVE POSition U lt x gt lt gt lt NRf gt DISPlay WAVE POSition U lt x gt I lt x gt x 1 to 4 element lt NRf gt 130 000 to 130 000 DISPLAY WAVE POSITION U1 0 DISPLAY 01 gt DISPLAY WAVE POSITION U1 0 000 DISPlay WAVE SVALue Scale VALue Function Syntax Example Turns ON OFF the scale value display or queries the current setting DISPlay WAVE SVALue Boolean DISPlay WAVE SVALue DISPLAY WAVE SVALUE ON DISPLAY WAVE SVALUE gt DISPLAY WAVE SVALUE 1 DISPlay WAVE TDIV Function Syntax Example Sets the Time div value of the waveform or queries the current setting DISPlay WAVE TDIV Time DISPlay WAVE TDIV Time 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 ms 1 or 2 s DISPLAY WAVE TDIV 5MS DISPLAY WAVE TDIV gt DISPLAY WAVE TDIV 5 0E 03 Description The specifiable Time div value is up to 1 10 of the data update rate RATE DISPlay WAVE TLABel Trace LABel Function Syntax Example Turns ON OFF the waveform label display or queries the current setting DISPlay WAVE TLABel Boolean DISPlay WAVE TLABe1 DISPLAY WAVE TLABEL OFF DISPLAY WAVE TLABEL g
150. L8 VAL16 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VALA gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VALA 1 U 1 TOTAL ITEM2 I 1 TOTAL ITEM3 P 1 TOTAL 4 LAMBDA 1 TOTAL ITEM5 U 2 TOTAL ITEM6 I 2 TOTAL ITEM7 P 2 TOTAL ITEM8 LAMBDA 2 TOTAL ITEM9 U 3 TOTAL ITEM10 I 3 TOTAL 11 P 3 TOTAL ITEM12 LAMBDA 3 TOTAL ITEM13 U 4 TOTAL ITEM14 I 4 TOTAL 15 P 4 TOTAL ITEM16 LAMBDA 4 TOTAL 17 U SIGMA TOTAL ITEM18 I SIGMA TOTAL 19 P SIGMA TOTAL ITEM20 LAMBDA SIGMA TOTAL ITEM21 U SIGMB TOTAL ITEM22 I SIGMB TOTAL ITEM23 P SIGMB TOTAL ITEM24 LAMBDA SIGMB TOTAL ITEM25 WH 1 ITEM26 WH 2 ITEM27 WH 3 ITEM28 WH 4 ITEM29 WH SIGMA ITEM30 WH SIGMB ITEM31 F1 ITEM32 F2 ITEM33 1 ITEM34 ETA2 ITEM35 ETA3 ITEM36 ETA4 CURSOR 1 NUMeric 1 VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 CURSor Function Syntax Example Description Sets the cursor position on the numeric display 4 value 8 value 16 value display or queries the current setting DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 CURSor lt NRf gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 CURSor lt NRf gt 1 to 36 item number for VAL4 lt NRf gt 1 to 72 item number for VAL8 lt NRf gt 1 to 144 item number for VAL16 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VALA CURSOR 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 CURSOR gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 CURSOR 1 Specify the cursor position in terms of the
151. LIMIT 0 10 FLICKER DMIN LIMIT gt FLICKER DMIN LIMIT 0 10 DT Sets all settings related to the relative voltage change time d t or queries the current setting FLICker DT FLICKER DT gt FLICKER DT STATE 1 LIMIT 500 3 30 DI LIMit Sets the limit of the relative voltage change time d t or queries the current setting FLICker DT LIMit lt NRf gt lt NRf gt FLICker DT LIMit 1st lt NRf gt 1 00 to 99999 limit ms 2nd lt NRf gt 1 00 to 99 99 threshold level FLICKER DT LIMIT 500 3 30 FLICKER DT LIMIT gt FLICKER DT LIMIT 500 3 30 If the second parameter threshold level is not to be set it can be omitted DT STATe Turns ON OFF judgment of the relative voltage change time d t or queries the current setting FLICker DT STATe Boolean FLICker DT STATe FLICKER DT STATE ON FLICKER DT STATE gt FLICKER DT STATE 1 IM 760301 17E 6 53 6 9 FLICker Group FLICker ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets the target element flicker measurement or queries the current setting Syntax FLICker ELEMent lt x gt Boolean FLICker ELEMent lt x gt x 1 to 4 element Example FLICKER ELEMENT1 ON FLICKER ELEMENT1 gt FLICKER ELEMENT1 1 Description When turned ON 1 that element is targeted for flicker measurement FLICker FREQuency Function Sets the target frequency for flicker measurement or qu
152. LTER10 NEVER FILTER11 NEVER FILTER12 NEVER FILTER13 NEVER FILTER14 NEVER FILTER15 NEVER FILTER16 NEVER 1 QMESSAGE 1 STATus CONDition Function Queries the contents of the condition register Syntax STATus CONDition Example STATUS CONDITION gt 16 Description For details on the condition register see chapter 7 Status Report STATus EESE Extended Event Status Enable register Function Sets the extended event enable register or queries the current setting Syntax STATus EESE Register STATus EESE Register 0 to 65535 Example STATUS EESE B0000000000000000 STATUS EESE gt STATUS EESE 0 Description For details on the extended event enable register see chapter 7 Status Report STATus EESR Extended Event Status Register Function Queries the content of the extended event register and clears the register Syntax STATus EESR Example STATUS EESR gt 0 Description For details on the extended event register see chapter 7 Status Report STATus ERRor Function Queries the error code and message information top of the error queue Syntax STATus ERRor Example STATUS ERROR gt 113 Underfined Header Description When there is no error 0 No error is returned The message cannot be returned in Japanese You can specify whether to add the message using the STATus OMESsage command STATus FILTer lt x gt Function
153. MOTOR PM SCALING 1 0000 MOTor PM UNIT Function Sets the unit to add to the motor output computation result or queries the current setting Syntax String MOTor PM UNIT lt String gt Up to 8 characters Example MOTOR PM UNIT MOTOR PM UNIT gt MOTOR PM UNIT Description This command does not affect the computation result MOTor POLE Function Sets the motor s number of poles or queries the current setting 3 Syntax MOTor POLE lt NR gt 3 MOTor POLE lt NRf gt 1 to 99 m Example MOTOR POLE 2 5 MOTOR POLE gt MOTOR POLE 2 9 3 MOTor SPEed i Function Queries all settings related to the rotating speed Syntax MOTor SPEed Example MOTOR SPEED gt MOTOR SPEED TYPE ANALOG RANGE 20 0 00 0 SCALING 1 0000 UNIT rpm MOTor SPEed AUTO Function Turns ON OFF the voltage auto range of the revolution signal input analog input format or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor SPEed AUTO Boolean MOTor SPEed AUTO Example MOTOR SPEED AUTO ON MOTOR SPEED AUTO gt MOTOR SPEED AUTO 1 Description This command is valid when the revolution signal input type MOTor SPEed TYPE is ANALog analog input IM 760301 17E 6 81 6 17 MOTor Group MOTor SPEed PRANge Function Sets the range of the rotating speed pulse input format or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor SPEed PRANge lt NRf gt lt N
154. Meric LIST Queries all settings related to the numeric list data output of harmonic measurement 6 92 NUMeric LIST CLEar Clears the output items of the numeric list data of harmonic measurement 6 92 IM 760301 17E 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page NUMeric LIST DELete Deletes the output items of the numeric list data of harmonic measurement 6 93 NUMeric LIST ITEM lt x gt Sets the output items function and element of the numeric list data of harmonic measurement or queries the current setting 6 93 NUMeric LIST NUMber Sets the number of the numeric list data that is transmitted by NUMeric LIST VALue or queries the current setting 6 93 NUMeric LIST ORDer Sets the maximum output order of the numeric list data of harmonic measurement or queries the current setting 6 93 NUMeric LIST PRESet Presets the output item pattern of the numeric list data of harmonic measurement 6 93 NUMeric LIST SELect Sets the output component of the numeric list data of harmonic measurement or queries the current setting 6 94 NUMeric LIST VALue Queries the numeric list data of harmonic measurement 6 94 NUMeric NORMal Queries all settings related to the numeric data output 6 95 NUMeric NORMal CLEar Clears the output items of numeric data 6 95 NUMeric NORMal DELete Deletes the output items of numeric data 6 95 NUMeric NORMal ITEM x Sets the output items fu
155. ND T1 ON DISPLAY TREND T1 gt DISPLAY TREND Tl 1 DISPlay VECTor Function Queries all settings related to the vector display Syntax DISPlay VECTor Example DISPLAY VECTOR gt DISPLAY VECTOR OBJECT SIGMA NUMERIC 1 UMAG 1 000 IMAG 1 000 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option DISPlay VECTor NUMeric Function Turns ON OFF the numeric data display for the vector display or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay VECTor NUMeric lt Boolean gt DISPlay VECTor NUMeric Example DISPLAY VECTOR NUMERIC ON DISPLAY VECTOR NUMERIC gt DISPLAY 1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option DISPlay VECTor OBJect Function Sets the wiring unit to be displayed during vector display or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay VECTor OBJect SIGMA SIGMB DISPlay VECTOor OBJect Example DISPLAY VECTOR OBJECT SIGMA DISPLAY VECTOR OBJECT gt DISPLAY VECTOR OBJECT SIGMA Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option SIGMB is selectable only on the 4 element model 6 40 IM 760301 17E 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay VECTor UMAG
156. No and message Registers and Queues That Affect the Status Byte Registers that affect the bits of the status byte are shown below Standard Event Register Sets bit 5 ESB of the status byte to 1 or 0 Output Queue Sets bit 4 of the status byte to 1 or 0 Extended Event Register Sets bit 3 EES of the status byte to 1 or 0 Error Queue Sets bit 2 EAV of the status byte to 1 or 0 Enable Registers Registers that are used to mask a bit so that the bit will not affect the status byte even when it is set to 1 are shown below Status Byte Mask the bits using the service request enable register Standard Event Register Mask the bits using the standard event enable register Extended Event Register Mask the bits using the extended event enable register Writing Reading from Registers The ESE command is used to set the bits in the standard event enable register to 1 s or 05 The ESE command is used to query whether the bits in the standard event enable register are 175 or 05 For details regarding these commands see chapter 6 IM 760301 17E 7 2 Status Byte Status Byte Bit Masking RQS 7 6 ESBMAVEESEAV 1 0 MSS Bits 0 1 and 7 Not used always 0 Bit 2 EAV Error Available Set to 1 when the error queue is not empty In other words this bit is set to 1 when an error occurs See the page 7 9 Bit 3 EES Extend Event Summary Bit
157. Not required Required Not required IMPeak Required Not required CFU CfU Required Not required Required Not required PC Pc Required Not required TIME Time Required Not required WH WP Required Not required WHP WP Required Not required WHM WP Required Not required AH q Required Not required AHP q Required Not required AHM q Required Not required WS WS Required Not required WQ WQ Required Not required ETA1 ni Not required Not required ETA2 n2 Not required Not required ETA3 n3 Not required Not required ETA4 n4 Not required Not required F1 F1 Not required Not required F2 F2 Not required Not required F3 F3 Not required Not required F4 F4 Not required Not required F5 F5 Not required Not required F6 F6 Not required Not required F7 F7 Not required Not required F8 F8 Not required Not required F9 F9 Not required Not required F10 F10 Not required Not required F11 F11 Not required Not required F12 F12 Not required Not required F13 F13 Not required Not required F14 F14 Not required Not required F15 F15 Not required Not required F16 F16 Not required Not required F17 F17 Not required Not required F18 F18 Not required Not required F19 F19 Not required Not required F20 F20 Not required Not required 6 44 IM 760301 17E 6 7 DISPlay Group Functions that require the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option
158. Nter LIST NORMal Function STORe NUMeric NORMal Function Functions that require the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option UK U k IK SK S k Q k LAMBDAK PHIUk U k Zk Z k RSk Rs k XSk Xs k RPk Rp k XPk Xp k Note For functions that do not require the element to be specified in the selection list above set the parameter to 1 or omit the parameter for commands that have a parameter for specifying the element Element Likewise for functions that do not require the harmonic order to be specified set the parameter to TOTal or omit the parameter for commands that have a parameter for specifying the harmonic order Order 2 Functions of the numeric list data The advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option is required Applicable commands DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ITEM lt x gt Function name used Function name used in commands on the menu Numeric display header name U U 5 5 LAMBda A PHI PHIU 90 ol Z Z RS Rs XS Xs RP Rp XP Xp In addition the function listed below can be used for the following command NUMeric LIST ITEM lt x gt UHDF Uhdf IHDF Ihdf PHDF Phdf 6 46 IM 760301 17E 6 8 FILE Group The commands in
159. O ASCII code Addressable mode The address can be set in the range from 0 to 30 Remote mode can be cleared by pressing LOCAL key except when the instrument has been set to Local Lockout mode by the controller Functional specifications Function Subset Name Description Source handshaking SH1 Full source handshaking capability Acceptor handshaking AH1 Full acceptor handshaking capability Talker 6 Basic talker capability serial polling untalk MLA My Listen Address and no talk only capability Listener L4 Basic listener capability unlisten on MTA My Talk Address and no listen only capability Service request SR1 Full service request capability Remote local RL1 Full remote local capability Parallel polling PPO No parallel polling capability Device clear DC1 Full device clear capability Device trigger DT1 Full device trigger capability Controller CO No controller capability Electrical characteristics E1 Open collector IM 760301 17E 1 3 1 45 1 4 Connecting the GP IB Cable GP IB Cable The GP IB connector used on this instrument is a 24 pin connector that conforms to the IEEE St d 488 1978 Use a GP IB cable that conforms to this standard Connection Procedure Connect the cable as shown below Precautions to Be Taken When Making Connections Firmly tighten the screws on the GP IB cable connector Use an NI National Ins
160. O if the value is OFF String Data String data is not a specified character string like Character data It is an arbitrary character string The character string must be enclosed in single quotation marks or double quotation marks fa character string contains a double quotation mark the double quotation mark is replaced by two concatenated double quotation marks This rule also applies to a single quotation mark within a character string Aresponse message is always enclosed in double quotation marks e String data is an arbitrary character string Therefore the instrument assumes that the remaining program message units are part of the character string if no single or double quotation mark is encountered As a result no error is detected if a quotation mark is omitted Filename Filename is data that indicates a file name It is expressed in one of the following forms Form Example lt NRf gt lt Character data String data gt 1 CASE CASE e lt NRf gt is rounded to an 8 digit integer and converted to ASCII code The result is the file name example 1 becomes 00000001 Negative values are not allowed For Character data and String data the first eight characters become the file name Response messages are always returned in the String data form Block Data Block data is arbitrary 8 bit data It is only used
161. OGOPy gro p arre HOLD group d ee horizontal axis T div of trend IMAQG6O groUp ipee 6 64 independent setting esee 6 69 initialization input element input element independent setting of 6 69 input element type eene filter INPut group uerit ttr eren tees INp t TYPO E INTE Grate Groups integrated value resetting of m integration rriode eere nnne tes integration starting integration stopping of integration timer iraire interpolation method interpretation rules eene J Page uS orent cU Lm ER 6 88 eines 6 88 HUM EE 6 88 L Page language RUPEE an t ed 6 110 EGD mohitOr 6 110 line filter 6 22 6 69 6 81 Index 2 IM 760301 17E Long term flicker 08 6 86 long term flicker value 20 0420 0 0 6 54 paper 2 6 60 parts Of ecce rante ettet eso 3 1 M Page SEESUTT 4 6 ey oa oe a 45 PAWEL PE 6 98 6 100 manual scaling
162. ORMATION STATE 1 6 32 IM 760301 17E 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay MATH Function Queries all settings related to the computed waveform display DISPlay MATH DISPLAY MATH gt DISPLAY MATH MATH1 EXPRESSION U1 1I1 SCALING MODE AUTO CENTER 0 0000E 00 SDIV 25 000E 00 DISPLAY MATH MATH1 UNIT W LABEL Math1 DISPLAY MATH MATH2 EXPRESSION ABS U1 SCALING MODE AUTO Syntax Example CENTER 0 0000E 00 SDIV 25 000E 00 DISPLAY MATH MATH2 UNIT V LABEL Math2 DISPLAY MATH CONSTANT1 1 0000 00 CONSTANT2 2 0000 00 CONSTANT3 3 0000 00 CONSTANT4 4 0000 00 CONSTANT5 5 0000 00 CONSTANT6 6 0000 00 CONSTANT7 7 0000 00 CONSTANT8 8 0000 00 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option DISPlay MATH CONStant x Function Sets the constant to be used in the waveform computing equation or queries the current setting DISPlay MATH CONStant lt x gt lt gt DISPlay MATH CONStant lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 8 K1 to K8 lt NRf gt 9 9999 30 to 9 9999E 30 DISPLAY MATH CONSTANT1 1 0000E 00 DISPLAY MATH CONSTANT1 gt DISPLAY MATH CONSTANT1 1 0000E 00 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option Syntax Example DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt Function Queries all settings related to the computed waveform Syntax DISPlay MATH MATH
163. OSITION2 900 Syntax Example CURSor TRENd POSition lt x gt Function Syntax Example Sets the cursor position on the trend display or queries the current setting CURSor TRENd POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor TRENd POSition lt x gt lt gt 1 2 1 1 2 2 lt NRf gt 0 to 1001 CURSOR TREND POSITION1 10 CURSOR TREND POSITION1 gt CURSOR TREND POSITION1 10 CURSor TRENd STATe Function Syntax Example CURSor TRENd TRACe lt x gt Function Syntax Example CURSor TRENd lt gt Y x DY Function Syntax Example Description Turns ON OFF the cursor display on the trend display or queries the current setting CURSor TRENd STATe Boolean CURSOr TRENd STATe CURSOR TREND STATE ON CURSOR TREND STATE gt CURSOR TREND STATE 1 Sets the cursor target on the trend display or queries the current setting CURSor TRENd TRACe x lt NRf gt CURSOr TRENd TRACe lt x gt x 1 2 1 C1 2 C2 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 T1 to T16 CURSOR TREND TRACE1 1 CURSOR TREND TRACE1 gt CURSOR TREND TRACE1 1 Queries the cursor measurement value on the trend display CURSor TREN X lt x gt Y lt x gt DY X lt x gt Trend time string of the cursor position X1 D X2 Dx Y lt x gt Y axis value of the cursor position Y1 Y Y2 Yx
164. OTal Order lt gt TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal TOTal IM 760301 17E 6 99 spueuluio 6 18 NUMeric Group 9 FI 1 TOTal 10 UPPeak 1 TOTal 11 UMPeak 1 TOTal 12 1 13 IMPeak 1 14 CFU 1 15 CFI 1 16 1 17 1 18 WH 1 19 WHP 1 TOTal 20 WHM 1 21 1 22 1 23 1 24 WS 1 25 wa 1 2610 50 U to WQ 5 TOTal 51 10 75 U to WQ 3 TOTal 76 to 100 U to WQ 4 TOTal 101 to 125 U to WQ SIGMA TOTal 126 to 150 U to WQ SIGMB TOTal 151 to 255 NONE 2 Preset Pattern of the Numeric List Data Output Items of Harmonic Measurement Applicable command NUMeric LIST PRESet Pattern 1 lt gt lt Function gt lt Element gt 1 U 1 2 1 1 3 P 1 4106 U to P 2 7109 U to P 3 10 to 12 U to P 4 13 to 64 NONE Pattern 2 lt gt lt Function gt lt Element gt 1 U 1 2 1 1 3 P 1 4 PHIU 1 5 PHII 1 6 to 10 U to PHII 2 11 to 15 U to PHII 3 16 to 20 U to PHII 4 21 to 64 NONE 6 100 IM 760301 17E 6 18 Pattern 3 lt gt lt Function gt lt Element gt 1
165. Oat a ire 5 6 subheadings 2 switching between remote and local 1 2 2 2 4 2 iv symbols used in the syntax iv synchronization 2 2 synchronization 6 22 6 71 synchronization with the 5 7 synchronized measurement mode 6 80 synchronous 6 82 SYNCS D 6 82 SYS TOM Ree eid 6 109 SYSIOM daiwa deere bees 6 109 T Page talker capability eee 1 2 target drive esee 6 47 target frequency for flicker measurement 6 54 TCP IP trigger 6 23 6 42 two wattmeter compensation method 6 77 U Page UN uni line 0 0484 0 ER e ie REG universal commands upper level query 2 4444400 USB CONTIO rrr ttti tociens USB interface specifications 3 2 USGF ACCOUNT en rene od et vc 4 5 user 4 3 ser name te denen e eh ces cereo 4 5 4 6 user defined functions
166. P1 Description Specify the file name without the extension This command is an overlap command IM 760301 17E 6 47 6 8 FILE Group FILE MDIRectory Function Creates a directory Syntax FILE MDIRectory Filename Filename Directory name Example FILE MDIRECTORY TEST FILE PATH Function Queries the absolute path of the current directory Syntax FILE PATH Example FILE PATH gt _Card IMAGE FILE SAVE Function Queries all settings related to the saving of files Syntax FILE SAVE Example FILE SAVE gt FILE SAVE ANAMING 1 COMMENT WAVE TYPE BINARY FILE SAVE NUMERIC TYPE ASCII NORMAL ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 4 0 SIGMA 0 SIGMB 0 1 1 P 1 5 1 1 LAMBDA 1 1 FU 1 FI 1 UPPEAK 0 UMPEAK 0 IPPEAK 0 IMPEAK 0 CFU 0 CFI 0 0 0 WH 0 WHP 0 WHM 0 0 0 0 WS 0 WO 0 1 0 2 0 0 4 0 1 0 2 0 0 4 0 5 0 F6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 F12 0 F13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 17 0 F18 0 19 0 20 0 FILE SAVE ABORt Function Aborts file saving Syntax FILE SAVE ABORt Example FILE SAVE ABORT FILE SAVE ACQuisition Function Queries all settings related to the file saving of the waveform sampling data Syntax FILE SAVE ACQuisition Example FILE SAVE ACQUISITION gt FILE SAVE ACQUISITION TYPE FLOAT TRACE 01 Desc
167. QUENCY ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 INPut FILTer FREOQuency ALL Function Collectively sets the frequency filter of all elements Syntax INPut FILTer FREQuency ALL Boolean Example INPUT FILTER FREQUENCY ALL OFF INPut FILTer FREQuency ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets the frequency filter of the element or queries the current setting Syntax INPut FILTer FREQuency ELEMent x Boolean INPut FILTer FREQuency ELEMent lt x gt x 1 to 4 element Example INPUT FILTER FREQUENCY ELEMENT1 ON INPUT FILTER FREQUENCY ELEMENT 1 gt INPUT FILTER FREQUENCY ELEMENT1 1 INPut FILTer LINE Function Queries the line filter settings of all elements Syntax INPut FILTer LINE Example INPUT FILTER LINE gt INPUT FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 OFF ELEMENT2 OFF ELEMENT3 OFF ELEMENT4 OFF INPut FILTer LINE ALL Function Collectively sets the line filters of all elements Syntax INPut FILTer LINE ALL OFF Frequency OFF Line filter OFF Frequency 500 Hz 5 5 kHz or 50 kHz line filter ON cutoff frequency Example INPUT FILTER LINE ALL OFF INPut FILTer LINE ELEMent x Function Sets the line filter of the element or queries the current setting Syntax INPut FILTer LINE ELEMent lt x gt OFF Frequency INPut FILTer LINE ELEMent x x 1 to 4 element OFF Line filter OFF Frequency 500 Hz 5 5
168. R gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL ORDER 1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option This command is valid when the displayed page number 3DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL PAGE on the numeric display all display is 6 or 7 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL PAGE Function Syntax Example Sets the page number on the numeric display all display or queries the current setting DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL PAGE lt NRf gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL PAGE lt NRf gt 1 to 5 page number lt NRf gt 1 to 9 when the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option is installed DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL PAGE 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL PAGE gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL PAGE 1 Description When the page number is set the cursor position moves to the beginning of the page DISPlay NUMeric NORMal FORMat Function Syntax Example Sets the numeric display format or queries the current setting DISPlay NUMeric NORMal FORMat VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 ALL SINGle DUAL DISPlay NUMeric NORMal FORMat DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL FORMAT VAL4 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL FORMAT gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL FORMAT VAL4 Description The contents of the displayed numeric data are as follows VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 y Numeric display ite
169. RDer 1st lt NRf gt 0 to 90 start order to be displayed 2nd lt NRf gt 10 to 100 end order to be displayed DISPLAY BAR ORDER 1 100 DISPLAY BAR ORDER gt DISPLAY BAR ORDER 1 100 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option Setthe start order and then the end order Setthe end order so that it is greater than or equal to start order 10 DISPlay CBCycle Function Queries all settings related to the Cycle by Cycle display Syntax DISPlay CBCycle Example DISPLAY CBCYCLE DISPLAY 1 FREQ ITEM2 0 1 ITEM3 1 4 1 5 8 1 CURSOR 1 Description Only available with the Cycle by Cycle function CC option DISPlay CBCycle CURSor Function Syntax Example Sets the cursor position of the Cycle by Cycle display or queries the current setting DISPlay CBCycle CURSor lt NRf gt DISPlay CBCycle CURSor lt NRf gt 1 to 3000 cursor position DISPLAY CBCYCLE CURSOR 1 DISPLAY CBCYCLE CURSOR gt DISPLAY CBCYCLE CURSOR 1 Description Only available with the Cycle by Cycle function CC option Specifies the cursor position by the cycle number DISPlay CBCycle ITEM lt x gt Function Syntax Example Sets the displayed items function and element of the Cycle by Cycle display or queries the current setting
170. RMonics THD Function Sets the equation used to calculate the THD total harmonic distortion or queries the current setting Syntax HARMonics THD 1 FUNDamental HARMonics THD Example HARMONICS THD TOTAL HARMONICS THD gt HARMONICS THD TOTAL 6 58 IM 760301 17E 6 11 The commands in this group deal with printing to the built in printer or network printer You can make the same settings and inquiries as when PRINT and MENU SHIFT PRINT on the front panel is used However the commands in this group are valid only when the built in printer B5 option or Ethernet interface C7 option is installed HCOPy Hard COPY Function Queries all settings related to the printing Syntax HCOPy Example HCOPY gt HCOPY DIRECTION PRINTER PRINTER FORMAT HCOPY HCOPY AUTO STATE 0 HCOPY COMMENT THIS IS TEST Function printing or paper feeding Syntax HCOPy ABORt Example HCOPY ABORT HCOPy AUTO Function Queries all settings related to the auto print Syntax HCOPy AUTO Example HCOPY AUTO gt HCOPY AUTO STATE 1 SYNCHRONIZE TIMER START 2005 1 1 0 0 0 END 2005 1 1 1 0 0 INTERVAL 0 0 10 HCOPy AUTO 1 Function Sets the auto print interval or queries the current setting HCOPy AUTO INTerval lt gt lt gt lt gt HCOPy AUTO INTerval lt NRf g
171. RRent RANGe ELEMent lt x gt lt Current gt EXTernal lt Voltage gt INPut CURRent RANGe ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 4 element With the standard power element models 760301 01 through 760304 04 When the crest factor is set to 3 Current 500 mA 1 2 5 10 20 30 A for direct current input Voltage 50 100 200 500 mV 1 2 5 10 V for external current sensor input When the crest factor is set to 6 Current 250 500 mA 1 2 5 5 10 15 A for direct current input Voltage 25 50 100 250 500 mV 1 2 5 5 V for external current sensor input With the low current range power element models 760301 10 through 760304 40 When crest factor is set to 3 Current 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 mA 1 2 A with direct current input Voltage 50 100 200 500 mV 1 2 5 10 V with external current sensor input When crest factor is set to 6 Current 2 5 5 10 25 50 100 250 500 mA 1 A with direct current input Voltage 25 50 100 250 500 mV 1 2 5 5 V with external current sensor input INPUT CURRENT RANGE ELEMENT1 30A INPUT CURRENT RANGE ELEMENT1 gt INPUT CURRENT RANGE ELEMENT1 30 0 00 Example INPUT CURRENT RANGE ELEMENT1 EXTERNAL 10V INPUT CURRENT RANGE ELEMENT1 gt INPUT CURRENT RANGE ELEMENT1 EXTERNAL 10 00E 00 INPut CURRent RANGe SIGMA SIGMB Fun
172. RSOR U Description Returns all settings corresponding to the numeric display format DISPlay NUMeric NORMal FORMat 1 1 1 ALL Function Queries all settings related to the numeric display all display Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL CURSOR U DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL CURSor Function Sets the cursor position on the numeric display all display or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL CURSor Function DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL CURSor Function U 1I P S Q See the function selection list 1 on page 6 44 Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL CURSOR U DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL CURSOR gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL CURSOR U Description Specify the cursor position in terms of the function name IM 760301 17E 6 35 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL ORDer Function Syntax Example Sets the displayed harmonic order on the harmonic measurement function display page of the numeric display all display or queries the current setting DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL ORDer Order DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL ORDer Order TOTal DC lt NR gt lt 1 to 100 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL ORDER 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL ORDE
173. Read the response to STATus EESR Loop COMMunicate WAIT 1 lt gt NUMeric NORMal VALue lt PMT gt Read the response to 1 VALue STATus EESR lt PMT gt Read the response to STATus EESR Return to LOOP For a description of STATus FILTerl FALL and STATus EESR see the previous section regarding the extended event register The cOMMunicate WAIT 1 command indicates that the program will wait for bit 0 of the extended event register to be set to The NUMeric NORMal VALue command is not executed until bit 0 of the extended event register is set to 1 IM 760301 17E 5 9 940Jog Chapter6 Communication Commands 6 1 A List of Commands Command Function Page ACQuisition Group ACQuisition Queries all settings related to the output of the waveform sampling data 6 17 ACQuisition BYTeorder ACQuisition END ACQuisition FORMat ACQuisition HOLD ACQuisition LENGth ACQuisition SEND ACQuisition SRATe ACQuisition STARt ACQuisition TRACe AOUTput Group AOUTput AOUTput NORMal1 AOUTput 1 CHANnel lt x gt AOUTput NORMal IRTime AOUTput NORMal MODE x AOUTput NORMal RATE x CBCycle Group CBCycle CBCycle COUNt CBCycle DISPlay CBCycle DISPlay CURSor CBCycle DISPlay ITEM lt x gt CBCycle DISPlay PAGE CBCycle FILTer
174. Rf gt SPEed PRANge lt NRf gt 0 0000 to 99999 9999 Example MOTOR SPEED PRANGE 10000 0 MOTOR SPEED PRANGE gt MOTOR SPEED PRANGE 10000 0000 0 0000 Description Set the upper limit and then the lower limit This command is valid when the revolution signal input type MOTor SPEed TYPE is PULSe pulse input MOTor SPEed PULSe Function Sets the pulse count of the revolution signal input pulse input or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor SPEed PULSe lt NRf gt MOTor SPEed PULSe lt NRf gt 1 to 9999 Example MOTOR SPEED PULSE 60 MOTOR SPEED PULSE gt MOTOR SPEED PULSE 60 Description This command is valid when the revolution signal input type MOTor SPEed TYPE is PULSe pulse input MOTor SPEed RANGe Function Sets the voltage range of the revolution signal input analog input format or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor SPEed RANGe lt Voltage gt MOTor SPEed RANGe lt voltage gt 1 2 5 10 or 20 V Example MOTOR SPEED RANGE 20V MOTOR SPEED RANGE gt MOTOR SPEED RANGE 20 0E 00 Description This command is valid when the revolution signal input type MOTor SPEed TYPE is ANALog analog input MOTor SPEed SCALing Function Sets the scaling factor for rotating speed computation or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor SPEed SCALing NRf MOTor SPEed SCALing lt NRf gt 0 0001 to 99999 9999 E
175. SITION gt ACQUISITION TRACE U1 FORMAT ASCII START 0 END 199999 HOLD 0 ACQuisition BYTeorder Function Sets the output byte order of the waveform sampling data FLOAT format that is transmitted by ACQuisition SEND or queries the current setting Syntax ACQuisition BYTeorder LSBFirst MSBFirst ACQuisition BYTeorder ACQUISITION BYTEORDER LSBFIRST ACQUISITION BYTEORDER gt ACQUISITION BYTEORDER LSBFIRST Description This value is valid when sACQuisition FORMat is set to FLOat Example ACQuisition END Function Sets the output end point of the waveform display data that is transmitted by sACQuisition SEND or queries the current setting Syntax ACQuisition END lt NRf gt ACQuisition END lt NRf gt 0 to 3999999 Example ACQUISITION END 199999 ACQUISITION END gt ACQUISITION END 199999 Description Set the point in the range up to the total number of data points 1 The total number of data points can be queried using sACQuisition LENGth ACQuisition FORMat Function Sets the format of the waveform sampling data that is transmitted by ACQuisition SEND or queries the current setting Syntax ACQuisition FORMat ASCii FLOat ACQuisition FORMat Example ACQUISITION FORMAT FLOAT ACQUISITION FORMAT gt ACQUISITION FORMAT FLOAT Description For the differences in the waveform sampling data output due to the format setting see the description for ACOu
176. SPLAY MATH MATH1 UNIT gt DISPLAY MATH MATH1 UNIT W Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option 6 34 IM 760301 17E 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay MODE Function Sets the display mode or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay MODE NUMeric WAVE BAR VECTor TRENd NWAVe NBAR NTRend WBAR WTRend BTRend MATH NMATh FFT NFFT WFFT IECHarm CBCycle FLICker DISPlay MODE NUMeric Displays only the numeric values WAVE Displays only the waveforms BAR Bar graph VECTor Vector display TRENd Trend NWAVe Displays both the numeric values and the waveforms NBAR Displays both the numeric values and the bar graph NTRend Displays both the numeric values and the trends WBAR Displays both the waveforms and the bar graph Displays both the waveforms and the trends BTRend Displays both the bar graphs and the trends MATH Displays only the waveforms including the computed waveforms NMATh Displays both numeric values and waveforms including the computed waveforms FFT Displays only the FFT waveforms NFFT Displays both the numeric values and the FFT waveforms WFFT Displays both the waveforms and the FFT waveforms IECHarm IEC harmonic measurement mode display numeric values Cycle by Cycle mode display value FLICker Flicker measu
177. SSION I E1 ORT UNIT 17 STATE 0 EXPRESSION U E1 ORT UNIT V MEASURE FUNCTION18 STATE 0 EXPRESSION I E1 ORT UNIT A MEASURE FUNCTION19 STATE 0 EXPRESSION U E1 ORT UNIT V MEASURE FUNCTION20 STATE 0 EXPRESSION I E1 ORT UNIT A MEASURE PHASE 180 SYNCHRONIZE MASTER MHOLD 0 COMPENSATION WIRING ELEMENT1 OFF ELEMENT2 OFF ELEMENT3 OFF ELEMENT4 OFF COMPENSATION EFFICIENCY 0 MEASure AVERaging Function Queries all settings related to averaging Syntax MEASure AVERaging Example MEASURE AVERAGING gt MEASURE AVERAGING STATE 0 TYPE EXPONENT COUNT 2 MEASure AVERaging COUNt Function Syntax Example Sets the averaging coefficient or queries the current setting MEASure AVERaging COUNt lt NRf gt AVERaging COUNt lt NRf gt 2 4 8 16 32 64 attenuation constant when TYPE EXPonent lt NRf gt 8 16 32 64 128 or 256 average count when TYPE LINear MEASURE AVERAGING COUNT 2 MEASURE AVERAGING COUNT gt MEASURE AVERAGING COUNT 2 moving Description The averaging of measurement functions of harmonic measurement option is valid only when TYPE EXPonent attenuation constant For details see the User s Manual IM760301 MEASure AVERaging STATe Function Syntax Example Turns ON OFF averaging or queries the current setting ME
178. Set to 0 when the logical product of the extended event register and the corresponding enable register is 1 In other words this bit is set to 1 when an event takes place inside the instrument See the page 7 7 Bit 4 MAV Message Available Set to 1 when the output queue is not empty In other words this bit is set to 1 when there are data to be transmitted See the page 7 9 Bit 5 ESB Event Summary Bit Set to 0 when the logical product of the standard event register and the corresponding enable register is 1 In other words this bit is set to 1 when an event takes place inside the instrument See the page 7 5 Bit 6 RQS Request Service MSS Master Status Summary Set to 1 when the logical AND of the status byte excluding Bit 6 and the service request enable register is not 0 In other words this bit is set to 1 when the instrument is requesting service from the controller RQS is set to 1 when the MSS bit changes from 0 to 1 and cleared when serial polling is carried out or when the MSS bit changes to 0 If you wish to mask a certain bit of the status byte so that it does not cause set the corresponding bit of the service request enable register to 0 For example to mask bit 2 EAV so that service is not requested when an error occurs set bit 2 of the service request enable register to 0 This can be done using the SRE command To query whether each bit of the service request enable register is 1 or 0 use SRE For de
179. TEM LCD gt SYSTEM LCD BRIGHTNESS 2 COLOR GRAPH MODE DEFAULT SYSTEM LCD COLOR TEXT MODE PRESET1 SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness Function Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness lt gt SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness lt NRf gt 1 to 3 Example SYSTEM LCD BRIGHTNESS 2 SYSTEM LCD BRIGHTNESS gt SYSTEM LCD BRIGHTNESS 2 SYSTem LCD COLor Function Queries all settings related to the display colors of the LCD monitor Syntax SYSTem LCD COLor Example SYSTEM LCD COLOR gt SYSTEM LCD COLOR GRAPH MODE DEFAULT SYSTEM LCD COLOR TEXT MODE PRESET1 SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh Function Queries all settings related to the display colors of the graphic items Syntax SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh Example SYSTEM LCD COLOR GRAPH gt SYSTEM LCD COLOR GRAPH MODE USER BACKGROUND 0 0 0 GRATICULE 6 6 6 CURSOR 7 7 7 01 7 7 0 02 7 0 7 U3 7 0 0 U4 0 4 7 11 0 7 0 I2 0 7 7 13 7 4 0 14 5 5 5 SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh BACKground GRATicule CURSor U lt x gt I lt x gt Function Sets the display color of the background graticule cursor voltage waveform current waveform or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh BACKground GRATicule CURSor U lt x gt I lt x gt lt gt lt gt lt gt SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh BACKground GRATicule CURSor U lt x gt I lt x gt lt X g
180. The REMOTE indicator is turned ON All keys except the LOCAL key are disabled Settings entered in local mode are retained even when the WT3000 switches to remote mode When Switching from Remote to Local Mode Pressing LOCAL key in remote mode puts the instrument in local mode However this is void when the WT3000 has received a COMMunicate LOCKout ON command from the PC local lockout condition When the WT3000 receives a COMMunicate REMote OFF command from the PC the WT3000 switches to the local mode regardless of the local lockout condition The REMOTE indicator is turned OFF Key operations are enabled Settings entered in remote mode are retained even when the WT3000 switches to local mode Note The Ethernet interface cannot be used simultaneously with other communication interfaces GP IB USB or RS 232 Ethernet Interface Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE 802 3 Number of simultaneous connections 1 Port number 10001 tcp For details on other specifications see chapter 5 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E IM 760301 17E 4 2 Ethernet Interface Functions and Specifications User Authentication Function You must enter the user name and password to access the WT3000 from a PC using the Ethernet interface The user name and password for accessing the WT3000 can be specified in the User Account screen under the Misc menu For details
181. VE EXECute Saves the waveform display data to a file 6 51 FILE SAVE WAVE TRACe Sets the waveform to be saved to a file or queries the current setting 6 51 FILE SAVE WAVE Sets the format of the waveform display data to be saved or queries the current setting 6 51 FLICker Group FLICker Queries all settings related to flicker measurement 6 52 FLICker COUNt Sets the number of measurements for the short term flicker value Pst or queries the current setting 6 52 FLICker DC Queries all settings related to the relative steady state voltage change dc 6 52 FLICker DC LIMit Sets the limit of the relative steady state voltage change dc or queries the current setting 6 52 FLICker DC STATe Turns ON OFF judgment of the relative steady state voltage change dc or queries the current setting 6 52 FLICker DISPlay Queries all settings related to flicker measurement display 6 52 FLICker DISPlay ELEMent Sets the element to be displayed for flicker measurement display or queries the current setting 6 52 FLICker DISPlay PAGE Sets the number of the page to be displayed for flicker measurement display 9 or queries the current setting 6 53 3 FLICker DISPlay PERiod Sets the observation period number to be displayed for flicker measurement 3 display or queries the current setting 6 53 FLICker DMAX Queries all settings related to the maximum relative voltage change dmax 6 53 FLICker DMAX LIMit Sets the limit of the maxim
182. WT3000 Manual Vol 2 3 Precision Power Analyzer Communication Interface USER S MANUAL e Yokogawa Electric Cor IM 760301 17 5th Edition Thank you for purchasing the WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer This Communication Interface User s Manual describes the functions of the GP IB RS 232 USB and Ethernet interfaces and communication commands To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation After reading the manual keep it in a convenient location for quick reference whenever a question arises during operation Three manuals including this one are provided as manuals for the WT3000 Please read all of them Manual Title Manual No Description WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer 760301 01E Explains all functions and User s Manual procedures of the WT3000 Vol 1 3 excluding the expansion functions and communication functions WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer 760301 17 This manual Explains the Communication Interface functions for controlling the User s Manual CD ROM WT3000 using communication Vol 2 3 commands WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer 760301 51E Explains the expansion functions Expansion Function User s Manual motor evaluation function and options Vol 3 3 of the WT3000 and their operating procedures The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of cont
183. Y FFT VSCALE LOG DISPLAY FFT VSCALE gt DISPLAY FFT VSCALE LOG Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option DISPlay FFT WINDow Function Sets the window function of the FFT computation or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay FFT WINDow RECTangle HANNing FLATtop DISPlay FFT WINDow Example DISPLAY FFT WINDOW RECTANGLE DISPLAY FFT WINDOW gt DISPLAY FFT WINDOW RECTANGLE Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option DISPlay FLICker Function Queries all settings related to flicker measurement display Syntax DISPlay FLICker Example DISPLAY FLICKER gt DISPLAY FLICKER ELEMENT 1 PERIOD 1 Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option DISPlay FLICker ELEMent Function Sets the element to be displayed for flicker measurement display or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay FLICker ELEMent lt gt DISPlay FLICker ELEMent lt NRf gt 1 to 4 element Example DISPLAY FLICKER ELEMENT 1 DISPLAY FLICKER ELEMENT gt DISPLAY FLICKER ELEMENT 1 Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option DISPlay FLICker PAGE Function Sets the page numbers to be displayed for flicker measurement display or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay FLICker PAGE lt NRf gt DISPlay FLICker PAGE lt NRf
184. YSTem ECLear Function Clears the error message displayed on the screen Syntax SYSTem ECLear Example SYSTEM ECLEAR SYSTem FONT Function Sets the display font or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem FONT GOTHic ROMan SYSTem FONT Example SYSTEM FONT GOTHIC SYSTEM FONT gt SYSTEM FONT GOTHIC IM 760301 17E 6 109 6 22 5 5 SYSTem KLOCk Function Turns ON OFF the key lock or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem KLOCk lt Boolean gt SYSTem KLOCk Example SYSTEM KLOCK OFF SYSTEM KLOCK gt SYSTEM KLOCK 0 SYSTem LANGuage Function Queries all settings related to the display language Syntax SYSTem LANGuage Example SYSTEM LANGUAGE gt SYSTEM LANGUAGE MESSAGE ENGLISH MENU ENGLISH SYSTem LANGuage MENU Function Sets the menu language or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem LANGuage MENU JAPANese ENGLish SYSTem LANGuage MENU Example SYSTEM LANGUAGE MENU ENGLISH SYSTEM LANGUAGE MENU gt SYSTEM LANGUAGE MENU ENGLISH SYSTem LANGuage MESSage Function Sets the message language or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem LANGuage MESSage JAPANese ENGLish SYSTem LANGuage MESSage Example SYSTEM LANGUAGE MESSAGE ENGLISH SYSTEM LANGUAGE MESSAGE gt SYSTEM LANGUAGE MESSAGE ENGLISH SYSTem LCD Function Queries all settings related to the LCD monitor Syntax SYSTem LCD Example SYS
185. a Example Response to acquired waveform data gt 40012ABCDEFGHIJKL lt Filename gt lt Block data gt lt Decimal gt lt Decimal gt indicates a value expressed as a decimal number as shown in the table below Decimal values are given in the NR form as specified in the ANSI X3 42 1975 Symbol Meaning Example lt NR1 gt Integer 125 1 1000 lt NR2 gt Fixed point number 125 0 90 001 lt NR3 gt Floating point number 125 0E 0 9 1 1 4 lt gt Any of the forms lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt is allowed The instrument can receive decimal values that are sent from the controller in any of the forms lt NR1 gt to NR3 This is represented by lt NRf gt Forresponse messages that the instrument returns to the controller the form NR1 to NR3 to be used is determined by the query The same form is used regardless of the size of the value For the lt NR3 gt format the sign after the E can be omitted However the sign cannot be omitted Ifa value outside the setting range is entered the value is normalized so that it is just inside the range Ifa value has more significant digits than the available resolution the value is rounded Voltage Current Time and Frequency Voltage Current Time and Frequency indicate data that have physical dimensions lt Multiplier gt or Unit can be attached to the lt NRf gt
186. al scaling of the trend or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing VALue NRf NRf DISPlay TRENd lt gt SCALing VALue x 1 to 16 item number lt NRf gt 9 999E 30 to 9 999E 30 Example DISPLAY TREND 1 SCALING VALUE 100 100 DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 SCALING VALUE gt DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 SCALING VALUE 100 0E 00 100 0E 00 Description Set the upper limit and then the lower limit This command is valid when the scaling mode of the trend DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing MODE is set to MANual DISPlay TRENd TDIV Function Sets the horizontal axis T div of the trend or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay TRENd TDIV lt gt lt gt lt gt DISPlay TRENd lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 0 3 to 24 0 0 1st lt NRf gt 1 3 6 12 24 hour 2nd lt NRf gt 1 3 6 10 30 minute 3rd lt NRf gt 3 6 10 or 30 Second Example DISPLAY TREND TDIV 0 0 3 DISPLAY TREND gt DISPLAY TREND 0 0 3 Description Set the three lt NRf gt s so that one lt NRf gt is a non zero value and the other two are zeroes DISPlay TRENd T lt x gt Function Turns ON OFF the trend or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay TRENd T lt x gt Boolean DISPlay TRENd T lt x gt x 1 to 16 item number Example DISPLAY TRE
187. al level of the command that is currently being executed and performs analysis on the assumption that the next command sent will also belong to the same level Therefore common header sections can be omitted for commands belonging to the same group Example INTEGrate MODE NORMal ACAL ON lt PMT gt When Concatenating Commands of Different Groups If the following command does not belong to the same group a colon is placed in front of the header Example INTEGrate MODE NORMal DISPlay MODE NUMeric lt PMT gt When Concatenating Simple Headers If a simple header follows another command a colon 1 is placed in front of the simple header Example INTEGrate MODE NORMal HOLD lt gt When Concatenating Common Commands Common commands that are defined in the IEEE 488 2 1992 are independent of hierarchy Colons are not needed before a common command Example INTEGrate MODE NORMal CLS ACAL ON lt PMT gt When Separating Commands with lt PMT gt If a terminator is used to separate two commands each command is a separate message Therefore the common header must be specified for each command even when commands belonging to the same command group are being concatenated INTEGrate MODE NORMal lt PMT gt INTEGrate ACAL lt gt Example IM 760301 17E 5 3 a10jag 5 2 Commands 5 3 Responses Upper Level Query An upper level query is a query in which a quest
188. ample Description Queries the synchronization source of all elements INPut SYNChronize INPUT SYNCHRONIZE gt Function INPUT SYNCHRONIZE ELEMENT1 I1 ELEMENT2 I2 ELEMENT3 I3 ELEMENT4 I4 Syntax SYNChronize ALL Example Collectively sets the synchronization source of all elements INPut SYNChronize ALL U lt x gt lt gt 1 x 1 to 4 element Function EXTernal External clock input Ext Clk NONE No synchronization source Syntax INPUT SYNCHRONIZE ALL I1 Example SYNChronize ELEMent lt x gt Sets the synchronization source of the element or queries the current setting Function INPut SYNChronize ELEMent lt x gt U lt x gt I lt x gt EXTernal Syntax NONE INPut SYNChronize ELEMent lt x gt x 1 to 4 element EXTernal External clock input Ext Clk Example NONE No synchronization source INPUT SYNCHRONIZE ELEMENT1 1 INPUT SYNCHRONIZE ELEMENT1 gt INPUT SYNCHRONIZE ELEMENT1 I1 INPut SYNChronize SIGMA SIGMB Function Collectively sets the synchronization source of all elements belonging to wiring unit EA INPut SYNChronize SIGMA Syntax SIGMB 0 lt gt lt gt 1 NONE INPUT SYNCHRONIZE SIGMA I1 Example INPut SYNChronize SIGMA is valid Description only on models with 2 to 4 elements INPut SYNChronize SIGMB is valid only on models with 4 elements
189. ample NUMERIC FLICKER INFORMATION If lt NRf gt is omitted judgment results from the NUMBER 7 item number in 9 NUMERIC FLICKER INFORMATION sNUMeric FLICker INFOrmation NUMber 3 NUMBER NUMERIC FLICKER is output in order S FUNCTION NUMBER 7 The format of individual judgment results that Description Only available with the flicker measurement are output is as follows o function FL option Judgment result JTOTal JDC JDMAX 3 If parameters are omitted from JDT JPST JPLT NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation VALue ASCII FLOAT judgment results from 1 to specified value lt NR1 gt format IEEE single precision floating point 5 are output in order 4 byte format The initial setting for the number of judgment Pass 0 0x00000000 0 results is 7 Fail 4 0 800000 1 Error 2 0xC0000000 2 0x3F800000 1 1 0x3F800000 1 No items NONE ASCII Not A Number FLOAT 0x7E951BEE 9 91E 37 IM 760301 17E 6 89 6 18 NUMeric Group NUMeric FLICker JUDGement Function Syntax Example Queries the judgment results fixed format NUMeric FLICker JUDGement lt NR gt ALL NUMeric FLICker JUDGement lt NRf gt 1 to9 observation period number ALL Overall observation period Result Example in which NUMeric FORMat is set to ASCii NUMERIC FLICKER JUDGEMENT 1 gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
190. ample coMMunicate OVERlap HFFBF FILE LOAD SETup PILE1 INPut VOLTage ELEMent1 lt PMT gt COMMunicate OVERlap HFFBF enables overlap operation on commands other than media access Because the overlap operation of file loading is disabled FILE LOAD SETup operates in the same way as a sequential command Therefore s INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 is not executed until the loading of the file is completed IM 760301 17E 5 7 940Jog 5 5 Synchronization with the Controller Using the OPC Command OPC command sets the OPC bit bit 0 of the standard event register see page 7 5 to 1 when the overlap operation is completed Example COMMunicate OPSE H0040 ESE 1 ESR SRE 32 FILE LOAD SETup FILEl1 OPC PMT Read the response to ESR Wait for a service request INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 lt PMT gt COMMunicate OPSE is a command used to select the oPc target Here media access is specified ESE 1 and SRE 32 indicate that a service request is generated only when the OPC bit is 1 ESR clears the standard event register In the example above INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 is not executed until a service request is generated Using the OPC Query The OPC query generates a response when an overlap operation is completed Example COMMunicate OPSE H0040 FILE LOAD SETup FILE1
191. and secondary commands are also considered interface messages LLO Local Lockout DCL PPU SPE SPD Device Clear Serial Poll Enable Serial Poll Disable Uni line messages REN IDY Listener address Note Parallel Poll Unconfigure Interface messages Multi line messages Address commands Universal commands Talker address Interface messages that WT3000 supports are indicated with marks The differences between SDC and DCL In multi line messages SDC messages are those that require talker or listener designation and DCL messages are those that do not require the designation Therefore SDC messages are directed at a particular instrument while DCL messages are directed at all instruments on the bus Secondary commands IM 760301 17E 1 7 91 49 2 RS 232 Interface Option 2 1 Names and Functions of Parts Front Panel REMOTE indicator Turns ON when the WT3000 is in the remote mode controlled via communications LOCAL key Press this key to clear the remote mode controlled via communications and enter the local mode in which key operations are enabled WT3000 Power anacvzen amor VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENTRANGE EES GG CA L 773 wise wes COED Mode AUTO MODE To
192. ant lt x gt Sets the constant to be used in the waveform computing equation or queries the current setting 6 33 DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt Queries all settings related to the computed waveform 6 33 IM 760301 17E 6 3 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt EXPRession Sets the equation of the waveform computation or queries the current setting 6 33 DISPlay MATH MATH x LABel Sets the label of the computed waveform or queries the current setting 6 33 DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing Queries all settings related to the scaling of the computed waveform 6 33 DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing CENTer Sets the center value of the manual scaling of the computed waveform or queries the current setting 6 34 DISPlay MATH MATH lt x gt SCALing MODE Sets the scaling mode of the computed waveform or queries the current setting 6 34 DISPlay MATH MATH x SCALing SDIV Sets the scale division value of the manual scaling of the computed waveform or queries the current setting 6 34 DISPlay MATH MATH x UNIT Sets the unit to be added to the result of the waveform computation or queries the current setting 6 34 DISPlay MODE Sets the display format or queries the current setting 6 35 DISPlay NUMeric Queries all settings related to the numeric display The same as DISPlay NUMeric NORMal 6 35 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Queries all settings related to the numeric dis
193. are available NL New Line Same as LF Line Feed ASCII code OAH END The END message EOI signal as defined in the IEEE488 1 The data byte that is sent with the END message is the last data of the program message NL END NL with an END message attached NL is not included in the program message Program Message Unit Format The program message unit format is shown below Program header rp Space Program Header The program header indicates the command type For details see page 5 3 Program data Program Data If certain conditions are required in executing a command program data is added A space ASCII code 20 separates the program data from the header If there are multiple sets of program data they are separated by commas For details see page 5 5 Example INPut CFACtor lt gt Header Data Response Message The response message format is shown below lt Response message E 7 lt RMT gt lt Response Message Unit gt A response message consists of one or more response message units each response message unit corresponds to one response Response message units are separated by a semicolon For details regarding the format of the response message unit see the next section Example INPUT CFACTOR 3 INDEPENDENT 0 lt RMT gt J Unit Unit lt RMT gt A response message
194. arks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated For purposes of this manual the TM and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders 1st Edition 2nd Edition 3rd Edition 4th Edition 5th Edition December 2004 June 2005 January 2006 December 2006 March 2007 IM 760301 17E Structure of the Manual This User s Manual consists of the following sections Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Appendix Index GP IB Interface Describes the functions and specifications of the GP IB interface RS 232 Interface Option Describes the functions and specifications of the RS 232 interface USB Interface Option Describes the functions and specifications of the USB interface Ethernet Interface Option Describes the functions and specifications of the Ethernet interface Before Programming Describes the syntax used to transmit commands Communication Commands Describes all the commands one by one Status Reports Describes the status byte various registers queues and other information Describes reference material such as an ASCII character code table IM 760301 17E Conventions Used This
195. ata buffer becomes 3 4 full and X on is sent when the received data CA RTS is set to False when received data buffer is only 3 4 full and is set to True when received data buffer is only 1 4 full uondo e eyieiul zez su buffer is only this instrument OFF OFF NO NO XON XON XON XON XON RS XON RTS CS RS CTS RTS OFF OFF Data Transmission Control There is no handshaking between the WT3000 and the PC The X OFF and X ON signals are treated as data and the CS signal is ignored Data Reception Control There is no handshaking between the WT3000 and the PC When the received buffer becomes full all overflow data are discarded RS True fixed XON XON Data Transmission Control Software handshaking is performed between the WT3000 and the PC When an OFF code is received while sending data to the PC the WT3000 stops the data transmission When the WT3000 receives the next code the WT3000 resumes the data transmission The CS signal received from the PC is ignored Data Reception Control Software handshaking is performed between the WT3000 and the PC When the free area of the receive buffer decreases to 64 bytes the WT3000 sends an X OFF code When the free area increases to 192 bytes it sends an X ON code RS True fixed IM 760301 17E 2 5 2 4 Combination of Handshaking Methods XON RS CS RS Data Transmission Conirol Software handshaking
196. ation or queries the current setting 6 77 MEASure COMPensation V3A3 Turns ON OFF the compensation for the two wattmeter method or queries the current setting 6 77 MEASure COMPensation WIRing Queries all settings related to the wiring computation 6 77 MEASure COMPensation WIRing ELEMent x Sets the wiring compensation of the element or queries the current setting 6 77 MEASure DMeasure Queries all settings related to the delta computation 6 77 MEASure DMeasure SIGMA Sets the delta computation mode for wiring unit XA or queries the current setting 6 78 MEASure DMeasure SIGMB Sets the delta computation mode for wiring unit XB or queries the current setting 6 78 MEASure EFFiciency Queries all settings related to the efficiency computation 6 78 MEASure EFFiciency ETA x Sets the efficiency equation or queries the current setting 6 78 MEASure EFFiciency UDEF x Sets the user defined parameter used in the efficiency equation or queries the current setting 6 78 MEASure FREQuency Queries all settings related to frequency measurement 6 79 MEASure FREQuency ITEM lt x gt Sets the frequency measurement item or queries the current setting 6 79 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt Queries all settings related to user defined functions 6 79 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt EXPRession Sets the equation of the user defined function or queries the current setting 6 79 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt STATe Enables ON or Disables OFF the user defi
197. ax COMMunicate OVERlap Function Sets the commands that will operate as overlap commands or queries the current setting COMMunicate OVERlap Register COMMunicate OVERlap Register 0 to 65535 see the command diagram for COMMunicate WAIT on page 6 25 COMMUNICATE OVERLAP 65535 COMMUNICATE OVERLAP gt COMMUNICATE OVERLAP 96 Description In the above example all bits are set to 1 to make all overlap commands applicable However bits fixed to O are not set to 1 Thus the response to the query indicates 1 for bits 5 and 6 only Forthe description regarding how to synchronize the program using COMMunicate OVER1lap see page 5 7 Inthe above example bits 5 and 6 are set to 1 to make all overlap commands applicable see the figure for the COMMunicate WAIT command page 6 Syntax Example COMMunicate OPSE Register 0 to 65535 see the command diagram for COMMunicate WAIT on page 6 25 COMMUNICATE OPSE 65535 COMMUNICATE OPSE gt 96 Description In the above example all bits are set to 1 to make all overlap commands applicable However bits fixed to 0 are not set to 1 Thus the response to the query indicates 1 for bits 5 and 6 only Example 25 COMMunicate REMote Function Sets remote or local ON is remote mode Syntax COMMunicate REMote Boolean COMMunicate REMote Example COMMUNICATE REMOTE ON COMMUNICATE
198. ble with the flicker measurement function FL option The contents and order of the numeric data that are output are in the following fixed format To modify the output contents and order use the sNUMeric FLICker FUNCtion commands Output contents and order of numeric data For function names see the description for NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion ITEM lt x gt Numbers refer to elements gt UN1 FU1 DC1 DMAX1 DT1 PST1 PLT1 UN2 gt FU2 DC2 DMAX2 gt DT2 PST2 PLT2 output only for 2 to 4 element models UN3 FU3 gt DC3 gt DMAX3 DT3 gt PST3 PLT3 output only for to 4 element models UN4 FU4 DC4 DMAX4 DT4 PST4 gt PLT4 output only for 4 element models For 1 element models 8 data from TIME to PLT1 are output For 2 element models 15 data from TIME to PLT2 are output For 3 element models 22 data from TIME to PLT3 are output For 4 element models 29 data from TIME to PLT4 are output If the parameters are specified the numeric data of the specified observation period is output NUMeric Function Syntax Example Description f the parameters are omitted the measured data of the current observation period being measured is output When in measurement complete status the measured data of the overall observation period Result is output For the format of individual numeric data see the description
199. c NORMal ITEM lt x gt NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt NUMeric 1 lt gt x 1 to 255 item number NONE No output item Function U 1I P S Q See the function selection list 1 of DISPlay group on page 6 44 Element lt NRf gt SIGMA SIGMB lt NRf gt 1104 Order TOTal DC lt NRf gt lt 1 to 100 1 U 1 TOTAL NUMERIC 1 gt 1 U 1 TOTAL f Order is omitted is set Element or Order is omitted from response to functions that do not need them Sets the number of the numeric data that is transmitted by s NUMeric NORMal VALue or queries the current setting NUMeric NORMal NUMber lt NRf gt ALL NUMeric 1 NUMber lt 1 to 255 ALL NUMERIC NORMAL NUMBER 15 NUMERIC NORMAL NUMBER gt NUMERIC NORMAL NUMBER 15 Description If the parameter is omitted for the s NUMeric NORMal VALue command the numeric data from 1 to the specified value is output in order By default the number of numeric data is set to 15 NUMeric NORMal PRESet Function Syntax Example Presets the output item pattern of numeric data NUMeric NORMal PRESet lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1
200. c LIST NUMber lt NRf gt 1 to 64 ALL NUMERIC LIST NUMBER 5 NUMERIC LIST NUMBER gt NUMERIC LIST NUMBER 5 This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option f the parameter is omitted for the sNUMeric LIST VALue command the numeric list data from 1 to the specified value is output in order By default the number of numeric data is set to 1 LIST ORDer Sets the maximum output order of the numeric list data of harmonic measurement or queries the current setting NUMeric LIST ORDer lt NRf gt ALL NUMeric LIST ORDer lt NRf gt 1 to 100 ALL NUMERIC LIST ORDER 100 NUMERIC LIST ORDER NUMERIC LIST ORDER 100 This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option LIST PRESet Sets the output items of harmonic measurement numeric list data to a preset pattern NUMeric LIST PRESet lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 4 NUMERIC LIST PRESET 1 This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option For details on the output items that are preset see 2 Preset Pattern of the Numeric List Data Output Items of Harmonic Measurement see page 6 100 By default output it
201. ce Function Syntax Example Sets the synchronization source for Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting CBCycle SYNChronize SOURce U lt x gt I lt x gt EXTernal CBCycle SYNChronize SOURce x 1 to 4 element EXTernal External clock input Ext CBCYCLE SYNCHRONIZE SOURCE 01 CBCYCLE SYNCHRONIZE SOURCE gt CBCYCLE SYNCHRONIZE SOURCE 01 CBCycle TIMEout Function Syntax Example Sets the timeout value for Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting CBCycle TIMEout lt NRf gt CBCycle TIMEout lt NRf gt 0 to 3600 seconds 0 No timeout CBCYCLE TIMEOUT 10 CBCYCLE TIMEOUT gt CBCYCLE TIMEOUT 10 CBCycle TRIGger Function Syntax Example Queries all settings related to triggers or queries the current setting CBCycle TRIGger CBCYCLE TRIGGER gt CBCYCLE TRIGGER MODE AUTO SOURCE U1 SLOPE RISE LEVEL 0 0 Description This is the same query as with the DISPlay WAVE TRIGger command 1 TRIGger LEVel Function Syntax Example Sets the trigger level or queries the current setting CBCycle TRIGger LEVel lt NRf gt CBCycle TRIGger LEVel lt NRf gt 100 0 to 100 0 CBCYCLE TRIGGER LEVEL 0 CBCYCLE TRIGGER LEVEL gt CBCYCLE TRIGGER LEVEL 0 0 Description This is the same setting or query as with the sDISPlay WAVE TRIGger LEVel command
202. cerent eer e Y ere eee en sampling SAV stc det e en Se aan scale value display Tolle scaling constant OF trerid repe screen display Screen screen image data saving of a pitas SDOC and DOL ee RETE E i i qe sending sequential commands sese 5 7 serial polling 6 104 7 4 Service request enable register 6 115 7 2 setup parameter file sese setup parameter list Short term flicker value short term flicker value mn simple header reete SINGLE pcm software 2 5 SPD irc Ur CER b bees 1 6 CAPELL Ie 1 6 Spoed ME 6 81 split screen 6 41 standard event enable register 6 114 7 2 standard event register 6 114 7 2 7 5 Star to Delta conversion 6 78 Start order 6 30 Status Dylan aa cl 7 3 Status byte register 2 4122 111 6 116 STATUS group RE pere eee es 6 103 STATUS reports 7 1 Steady state range 2 6 53 STORe group 6 105 SUING
203. cription This command is valid only when the built in printer B5 option is installed HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB Function Turns ON OFF the output of each element A B when printing the numeric data list on the built in printer Syntax HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal ELEMent x SIGMA SIGMB Boolean HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal ELEMent x SIGMA SIGMB lt gt 1 to 4 Example HCOPY PRINTER LIST NORMAL ELEMENT1 ON HCOPY PRINTER LIST NORMAL ELEMENT1 gt HCOPY PRINTER LIST NORMAL ELEMENT1 1 Description This command is valid only when the built in printer B5 option is installed HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal SIGMA is valid on models with two or more elements To turn the output ON wiring unit must exist by setting the wiring system beforehand using the INPut WIRing command HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal SIGMB is valid on models with four elements To turn the output ON wiring unit XB must exist by setting the wiring system beforehand using the INPut J WIRing command HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal PRESet x Function Presets the output ON OFF pattern of the element functions when printing the numeric data list on the built in printer Syntax HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal PRESet lt x gt x 1 to 2 preset pattern number Example HCOPY PRINTER LIST NORMAL PRESET1 Description This command is valid only when the b
204. ction Syntax Example Queries all settings related to output of numeric list data of Cycle by Cycle measurement NUMeric CBCycle NUMERIC CBCYCLE gt NUMERIC CBCYCLE ITEM 0 1 START 1 END 100 Description Only available with the Cycle by Cycle measurement function CC option NUMeric CBCycle END Function Syntax Example Sets the output end cycle of the numeric list data output by NUMeric CBCycle VALue or queries the current setting NUMeric CBCycle END NRf NUMeric CBCycle END lt NRf gt 1 to 3000 cycle number NUMERIC CBCYCLE END 100 NUMERIC CBCYCLE END gt NUMERIC CBCYCLE END 100 Description Only available with the Cycle by Cycle measurement function CC option NUMeric CBCycle ITEM Function Syntax Example Sets the numeric list data output items function and element of Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting NUMeric CBCycle ITEM lt Function gt lt Element gt NUMeric CBCycle ITEM Function FREQ U 1 P S Q LAMBda SPEed TORQue PM PKU PKI PKSPeed PKTorque Element NR SIGMA SIGMB lt NRf gt 1 to 4 NUMERIC CBCYCLE ITEM U 1 NUMERIC ITEM gt 0 1 Description Only available with the Cycle by Cycle function CC option When Function FREQ SPEed TORQue PM PKSPeed PKTorque Element need not be specifi
205. ction Collectively sets the current range of all elements belonging to wiring unit ZB Syntax INPut CURRent RANGe SIGMA SIGMB Current EXTernal Voltage With the standard power element models 760301 01 through 760304 04 When the crest factor is set to 3 Current 500 mA 1 2 5 10 20 30 A for direct current input Voltage 50 100 200 500 mV 1 2 5 10 V for external current sensor input When the crest factor is set to 6 Current 250 500 mA 1 2 5 5 10 15 A for direct current input Voltage 25 50 100 250 500 mV 1 2 5 5 V for external current sensor input With the low current range power element models 760301 10 through 760304 40 When crest factor is set to 3 Current 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 mA 1 2 A with direct current input Voltage 50 100 200 500 mV 1 2 5 10 V with external current sensor input When crest factor is set to 6 Current 2 5 5 10 25 50 100 250 500 mA 1 A with direct current input Voltage 25 50 100 250 500 mV 1 2 5 5 V with external current sensor input Example INPUT CURRENT RANGE SIGMA 30A Description INPut CURRent RANGe SIGMA is valid only on models with 2 to 4 elements INPut CURRent RANGe SIGMB is valid only on models with 4 elements This command is invalid if the wiring unit SA SB does not exist as a result of the wiring system set
206. current mode of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent MODE ALL RMS MEAN DC RMEAN Example INPUT CURRENT RMS INPut CURRent MODE ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets the current mode of the element or queries the current setting INPut CURRent MODE ELEMent lt x gt RMS MEAN DC RMEAN INPut CURRent MODE ELEMent lt x gt x 1 to 4 element INPUT CURRENT 1 RMS INPUT CURRENT 1 gt INPUT CURRENT 1 RMS Syntax Example INPut CURRent MODE SIGMA SIGMB Function Syntax Example Description INPut Function Syntax Example INPut Function Syntax Example Collectively sets the current mode of all elements belonging to wiring unit ZB INPut CURRent MODE SIGMA SIGMB RMS MEAN DC RMEAN INPUT CURRENT MODE SIGMA RMS INPut CURRent MODE SIGMA is valid only on models with 2 to 4 elements INPut CURRent MODE SIGMB is valid only on models with 4 elements This command is invalid if the wiring unit SA SB does not exist as a result of the wiring system setting INPut WIRing CURRent RANGe Queries the current ranges of all elements INPut CURRent RANGe INPUT CURRENT RANGE INPUT CURRENT RANGE ELEMENT1 30 0E 00 ELEMENT2 30 0 00 ELEMENT3 30 0 00 ELEMENT4 30 0E 00 CURRent RANGe
207. current setting 6 20 Manually sets the rated maximum and minimum values for the D A output items or queries the current setting 6 20 Queries all settings related to the Cycle by Cycle measurement function 6 21 Sets the number of cycles for Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting 6 21 Queries all settings related to the Cycle by Cycle display 6 21 Sets the cursor position of the Cycle by Cycle display or queries the current setting 6 21 Sets the displayed items function and element of the Cycle by Cycle display or queries the current setting 6 21 Sets the number of the displayed page of the Cycle by Cycle display or queries the current setting 6 21 Queries all settings related to the filter for Cycle by Cycle measurement 6 22 Queries all settings related to the line filter for Cycle by Cycle measurement 6 22 Collectively sets the line filters of all elements for Cycle by Cycle measurement 6 22 CBCycle FILTer LINE ELEMent x Sets the line filter of individual elements for Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting 6 22 CBCycle FILTer LINE MOTor Sets the motor input line filter for Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting 6 22 CBCycle RESet Resets Cycle by Cycle measurement 6 22 CBCycle STARt Starts Cycle by Cycle measurement 6 22 IM 760301 17E 6 1 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page
208. e MEASURE COMPENSATION V3A3 MEASURE COMPENSATION V3A3 MEASURE COMPENSATION V3A3 1 Description This command is valid only on models with 3 to 4 elements This command is valid only on models with the delta computation function DT option This command is valid when the wiring System INPut WIRing is set to MEASure COMPensation WIRing Function Queries all settings related to the wiring compensation Syntax MEASure COMPensation WIRing Example MEASURE COMPENSATION WIRING gt MEASURE COMPENSATION WIRING ELEMENT1 OFF ELEMENT2 OFF ELEMENT3 OFF ELEMENT4 OFF MEASure COMPensation WIRing ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets the wiring compensation of the element or queries the current setting Syntax MEASure COMPensation WIRing ELEMent lt x gt OFF U I I U MEASure COMPensation WIRing ELEMent lt x gt x 1 to 4 element Example MEASURE COMPENSATION WIRING ELEMENT1 OFF MEASURE COMPENSATION WIRING ELEMENT1 gt MEASURE COMPENSATION WIRING ELEMENT1 OFF DMeasure Function Queries all settings related to the delta computation Syntax DMeasure Example MEASURE DMEASURE gt MEASURE DMEASURE SIGMA OFF SIGMB OFF Description This command is valid only on models with the delta computation function DT option IM 760301 17E 6 77 6 16 5
209. e Action Page 161 Invalid block data lt Block data gt is not allowed 5 6 chapter 6 168 Block data not allowed lt Block data gt is not allowed 5 6 chapter 6 171 Invalid expression Equations cannot be used Chapter 6 178 Expression data not allowed Equations cannot be used Chapter 6 181 Invalid outside macro definition Macro functions defined in IEEE488 2 are not supported Error in Communication Execution 200 to 299 Code Messages Corrective Action Page 221 Setting conflict Check the relevant settings Chapter 6 222 Data out of range Check the range Chapter 6 223 Too much data Check the length of the data Chapter 6 224 Illegal parameter value Check the range Chapter 6 241 Hardware missing Check the installed options 260 Expression error Equations cannot be used 270 Macro functions defined in 488 2 not supported 272 Macro execution error Macro functions defined in IEEE488 2 are not supported 273 Illegal macro label Macro functions defined in IEEE488 2 are not supported 275 Macro definition too long Macro functions defined in 488 2 not supported 276 Macro recursion error Macro functions defined in IEEE488 2 are not supported 277 Macro redefinition not allowed Macro functions defined in IEEE488 2 are not supported 278 Macro header not found Macro functions defined in IEEE488 2 are not suppor
210. e Ctrl menu 3 Press the Device soft key and select USB Only the communication interface selected here is enabled The WT3000 does not accept commands that are transmitted to other unselected communication interfaces 4 Press the cursor keys to set the ID value Device Device system GP IB Overview GP IB RS232 Network USB 3 4 IM 760301 17E 3 4 Setting the USB Conirol Explanation You can control the WT3000 from a PC using the USB interface YOKOGAWA s dedicated USB connection device driver and library software TMCTL must be installed on the PC in addition to entering the settings described above Setting the ID Value Set the ID value of the WT3000 within the following range 1 to 127 You can connect multiple devices to a controller using the USB interface If multiple devices are connected in a single USB system the ID value is used by the controller to identify each device Therefore a unique ID value must be assigned to each device within a single system Note Do not change the ID value while communicating via the USB interface IM 760301 17E uondo e ejyieui asn Chapter4 Ethernet Interface Option 4 1 Names and Functions of Parts Front Panel REMOTE indicator Turns ON when the WT3000 is in the remote mode controlled via communications LOCAL key Press this key to clear the remote mode controlled via communications and e
211. e MEMory CONVert ABORt Function Abort converting the stored data from the memory to the file Syntax 5 MEMory CONVert ABORt Example STORE MEMORY CONVERT ABORT STORe MEMory CONVert EXECute Function Executes the converting of the stored data from the memory to the file Syntax STORe MEMory CONVert EXECute Example STORE MEMORY CONVERT EXECUTE Description The convert destination file is set using the STORe FILE command When file conversion is executed the WT3000 accesses the file twice To confirm the completion of the file conversion use the COMMUNICATE WAIT 64 command checks the change in bit 6 ACS of the condition register and check the completion of the file access of the WT3000 twice An example is indicated below STATUS EESR Clear the extended event register STORE MEMORY CONVERT EXECUTE Start the file conversion COMMUNICATE WAIT 64 Wait for the conversion to finish the first time STATUS EESR Clear the extended event register COMMUNICATE WAIT 64 Wait for the conversion to finish the second time STATUS EESR Clear the extended event register STORe MEMory INITialize Function Executes the initialization of the storage memory Syntax STORe MEMory INITialize Example STORE MEMORY INITIALIZE STORe MODE Function Sets the data storage recall or queries the current setting Syntax STORe MODE STORe RECall STORe MODE
212. e in which NUMeric FORMat is set NUMERIC FLICKER INFORMATION NUMBER 7 JTOTAL TOTAL ITEM2 JDC 1 ALL ITEM3 JDMAX 1 ALL ITEM4 JDT 1 ALL ITEM5 JPST 1 ALL ITEM6 JPLT 1 ITEM7 JTOTAL 1 to FLOat Description Only available with the flicker measurement NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION VALUE 4 number of bytes four digits data byte sequence Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option When lt NRf gt is specified only the numeric data for that item is output function FL option Forthe values of sNUMeric FLICker INFOrmation ITEM lt x gt only the number of numeric data output items specified in sNUMeric FLICker FUNCtion INFOrmation NUMber are output IM 760301 17E 6 87 6 18 NUMeric Group NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation CLEar Function Clears sets to NONE the output items of flicker judgment results variable format Syntax NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation CLEar ALL NRf NRf ALL Clears all items 1st lt NRf gt 1 to 32 item number to start clearing 2nd lt NRf gt 1 to 32 item number to stop clearing Example NUMERIC FLICKER INFORMATION CLEAR ALL Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option If the 2nd lt NRf gt is omitted the output items from the start clear number to the last item 32 are cleared NUM
213. e standard event register to 1 upon the completion of the specified overlap command OPC OPC Description For the description regarding how to OPC Function Syntax Example synchronize the program using OPC see page 5 8 The CoMMunicate OPSE command is used to specify the overlap command If oPC is not the last command of the message the operation is not guaranteed OPeration Complete ASCII code 1 is returned when the specified overlap command is completed OPC OPC gt 1 Description For the description regarding how to OPT Function Syntax Example synchronize the program using OPC see page 5 8 The CoMMunicate OPSE command is used to specify the overlap command f oPC is not the last command of the message the operation is not guaranteed OPTion Queries the installed options OPT OPT gt G6 B5 DT FQ DA V1 C2 C7 C5 CC FL Description The presence or absence of the following is returned harmonic measurement G5 harmonic computation function G6 built in printer B5 delta computation DT frequency measurement addition FQ 20chDA output DA VGA output V1 RS 232 communications C2 USB port for PC C12 Ethernet C7 USB port for peripherals C5 Cycle by Cycle function CC and flicker measurement FL If none of the options is installed an ASCII code 0 is returned The query must be the last query of
214. eak over information of each element is mapped as shown below A sum of decimal values of each bit is returned for the response For example if the response is 16 for example peak over is occurring at U3 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 Tq Sp 0 0 14 U4 IS U3 I2 U2 91 Sp Rotating speed Tq Torque INPut SCALing Function Queries all settings related to scaling Syntax INPut SCALing Example INPUT SCALING INPUT SCALING STATE ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 INPUT SCALING VT ELEMENT1 1 0000 ELEMENT2 1 0000 ELEMENT3 1 0000 ELEMENT4 1 0000 INPUT SCALING CT ELEMENT1 1 0000 ELEMENT2 1 0000 ELEMENT3 1 0000 ELEMENT4 1 0000 INPUT SCALING SFACTOR ELEMENT1 1 0000 ELEMENT2 1 0000 ELEMENT3 1 0000 ELEMENT4 1 0000 INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor Function Queries the VT ratio CT ratio power factor of all elements Syntax INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor Example INPUT SCALING VT gt INPUT SCALING VT ELEMENT1 1 0000 ELEMENT2 1 0000 ELEMENT3 1 0000 ELEMENT4 1 0000 INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor ALL Function Collectively sets the VT ratio CT ratio power factor of all elements Syntax INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor ALL lt NR gt lt NRf gt 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example INPUT SCALING VT ALL 1 INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets t
215. easurement display screen When in measurement complete status same as ALL 6 86 IM 760301 17E 6 18 Overall observation period Result row of the numeric list in the flicker measurement display screen lt NRf gt 1 to 99 Specified observation period Element or Period is omitted from the response to the output items in the table above for which specification of Element or Period is not required NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion NUMber Function Syntax Example Sets the number of measured flicker data output by NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion VALue or queries the current setting NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion NUMber NRf ALL NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion NUMber lt NRf gt 1 to 32 ALL NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION NUMBER 8 NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION NUMBER gt NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION NUMBER 8 Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option f parameters are omitted from sNUMeric FLICker FUNCtion VALue numeric data from 1 to specified value is output in order The initial setting for the number of numeric data is 8 NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion VALue Function Syntax Example Queries the measured flicker data variable format NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion VALue lt NRf gt NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion VALue f lt NRf gt is omitted numeric data from the item number in NUMeric FLICker
216. ed Element is omitted from the response When Element is omitted Element 1 is set SPEed TORQue PM PRSPeed PKTorque is only available with the motor version NUMeric CBCycle STARt Function Syntax Example Sets the output start cycle of the numeric list data output by NUMeric CBCycle VALue or queries the current setting NUMeric CBCycle STARt NRf NUMeric CBCycle STARt lt NRf gt 1 to 3000 cycle number NUMERIC CBCYCLE START 1 NUMERIC CBCYCLE START gt NUMERIC CBCYCLE START 1 Description Only available with the Cycle by Cycle measurement function CC option 6 84 IM 760301 17E 6 18 NUMeric CBCycle VALue Function Queries the numeric list data from Cycle by Cycle measurement Syntax NUMeric CBCycle VALue lt Function gt lt Element gt NUMeric CBCycle VALue Function FREO U r P s o rAMBda SPEed TORQue PM PKU PKSPeed PKTorque lt Element gt lt NR gt SIGMA SIGMB lt NRf gt 1 to 4 Example Example when parameters specified For NUMeric CBCycle STARt 1 END 100 NUMERIC CBCYCLE VALUE U 1 gt 100 001E 00 100 002E 00 100 003E 00 100 004E 00 ommitted 100 099E 00 100 100E 00 Example when parameters omitted For NUMeric CBCycle ITEM U 1 NUMERIC CBCYCLE VALUE gt 100 001E 00 100 002E 00 100 003E 00 100 004E 00 ommitted 100 099E 00 100 100
217. ed in hexadecimal octal or binary as well as a decimal number It is used when each bit of the value has a particular meaning It is expressed in one of the following forms Form Example lt NRf gt 1 H lt Hexadecimal value made up of the digits 0 to 9 and A to F gt HOF Q lt Octal value made up of the digits 0 to 7 gt 0777 B lt Binary value made up of the digits 0 and 1 gt B001100 lt Register gt is not case sensitive Response messages are always expressed as lt 1 gt lt Character Data gt lt Character Data gt is a specified string of character data a mnemonic It is mainly used to indicate options and is chosen from the character strings given in For interpretation rules refer to Header Interpretation Rules on page 5 4 Form Example AUTO 1 As with the header the COMMunicate VERBose command can be used to select whether to return the response in the full form or in the abbreviated form The COMMunicate HEADer setting does not affect the character data Boolean Boolean is data that indicates ON or OFF It is expressed in one of the following forms Form Example ON OFF lt NR gt ON OFF 1 0 When Boolean is expressed in the lt NRf gt form OFF is selected if the rounded integer value is 0 and ON for all other cases Aresponse message is always returned with a 1 if the value is ON and
218. ed computation function G6 option CURSor FFT TRACe lt x gt Function Sets the cursor target on the FFT waveform display or queries the current setting CURSor FFT TRACe lt x gt FFT lt x gt CURSor FFT TRACe lt x gt x of TRACe lt x gt 1 or 2 1 C1 2 C2 x x of FFT lt x gt 1 or 2 FFT CURSOR FFT TRACE FFT1 CURSOR FFT TRACE1 gt 1 FFT1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option Syntax Example CURSor FFT lt gt DX Y x DY Function Queries the cursor measurement value on the FFT waveform display FFT lt gt DX lt gt DY lt gt X axis value of the cursor position 1 X X2 Xx DX X axis value between cursors AX Y lt x gt Y axis value of the cursor position Y1 Y Y2 Yx DY Y axis value between cursors AY lt x gt 1 2 1 C1 2 C2 CURSOR FFT Y1 gt 78 628E 00 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option If the cursor display is not turned ON in the FFT waveform display NAN Not A Number is returned Syntax Example CURSor TRENd Function Queries all settings related to the cursor measurement of the trend display CURSor TRENd CURSOR TREND gt CURSOR TREND STATE 1 TRACE1 1 TRACE2 2 POSITION1 100 P
219. ed to the motor output Pm 6 81 MOTor SCALing Sets the scaling factor used for motor output computation or queries the current setting 6 81 MOTor UNIT Sets the unit to be added to the motor output computation result or queries the current setting 6 81 MOTor POLE Sets the motor s number of poles or queries the current setting 6 81 MOTor SPEed Queries all settings related to the rotating speed 6 81 MOTor SPEed AUTO Turns ON OFF the voltage auto range of the rotating speed signal input analog input format or queries the current setting 6 81 MOTor SPEed PRANge Sets the range of the rotating speed pulse input format or queries the current setting 6 82 MOTor SPEed PULSe Sets the pulse count of the rotating speed signal input pulse input or queries the current setting 6 82 MOTor SPEed RANGe Sets the voltage range of the rotating speed signal input analog input format or queries the current setting 6 82 MOTor SPEed SCALing Sets the scaling factor for rotating speed computation or queries the current setting 6 82 MOTor SPEed TYPE Sets the input type of the rotating speed signal input or queries the current setting 6 82 MOTor SPEed UNIT Sets the unit to be added to the rotating speed computation result or queries the current setting 6 82 MOTor SSPeed Sets the frequency measurement source used to compute the synchronous speed SyncSp or queries the current setting 6 82 MOTor SYNChronize Sets
220. efined parameter used in the efficiency equation or queries the current setting Syntax MEASure EFFiciency UDEF lt x gt NONE P x PA PB PM NONE lt gt PA PB PM NONE P lt x gt PA PB PM NONE P lt x gt PA PB PM MEASure EFFiciency UDEF x x of UDEF lt x gt 1 to 2 Udef1 to Udef2 NONE No parameters x of P x 1 to 4 element PA only on models with 2 to 4 elements PB PZB only on models with 4 elements PM Pm motor output motor version MV only Example MEASURE EFFICIENCY UDEF1 P1 P2 P3 MEASURE EFFICIENCY UDEF1 gt MEASURE EFFICIENCY UDEF1 P1 P2 P3 Description Set the parameters in the order parameter 1 parameter 2 parameter 3 and parameter 4 Parameters 2 to 4 can be omitted Omitted parameters are set to NONE Parameters are omitted when all of the subsequent parameters are NONE for parameters 2 to 4 in the response to a query 6 78 IM 760301 17E 6 16 MEASure Group MEASure FREQuency Function Queries all settings related to frequency measurement Syntax MEASure FREQuency Example MEASURE FREQUENCY gt MEASURE FREQUENCY ITEM1 01 2 11 Description This command is invalid on models with the frequency measurement add on FQ option because the frequency can be measured simultaneously on all input elements MEASure FREQuency lt gt Function Sets the frequency measurement
221. ems of Pattern 2 is selected IM 760301 17E 6 93 6 18 NUMeric Group NUMeric LIST SELect Function Syntax Example Sets the output component of the numeric list data of harmonic measurement or queries the current setting NUMeric LIST SELect EVEN ODD ALL NUMeric LIST SELect NUMERIC LIST SELECT ALL NUMERIC LIST SELECT gt NUMERIC LIST SELECT ALL Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option The selections are as shown below EVEN Outputs the components of TOTal DC and even order harmonic ODD Outputs the components of TOTal DC and odd order harmonic ALL Outputs all components NUMeric LIST VALue Function Syntax Example Description Queries the numeric list data of harmonic measurement NUMeric LIST VALue lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 64 item number Example when lt NRfs is specified NUMERIC LIST VALUE 1 gt 103 58E 00 0 00E 00 103 53E 00 0 09E 00 2 07E 00 0 04E 00 omitted 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 up to 102 items of data Example when NHf is omitted when NUMeric LIST NUMber is 5 NUMERIC LIST VALUE gt 103 58E 00 0 00E 00 103 53E 00 0 09E 00 2 07E 00 0 04E 00 omitted 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 up to 102 5 510 items of data Example in which NUMeric FORMat is set to FLOat NUMERIC LIST VALUE gt 6 n
222. ents belonging to wiring unit gt INPut VOLTage AUTO SIGMA SIGMB lt Boolean gt INPUT VOLTAGE AUTO SIGMA INPut VOLTage AUTO SIGma is valid only on models with 2 to 4 elements INPut VOLTage AUTO SIGMB is valid only on models with 4 elements This command is invalid if the wiring unit SA SB does not exist as a result of the wiring system setting INPut WIRing IM 760301 17E 6 71 6 14 INPut Group INPut VOLTage Function Queries the voltage mode of all elements Syntax INPut VOLTage MODE Example INPUT VOLTAGE MODE gt INPUT VOLTAGE MODE ELEMENT1 RMS ELEMENT2 RMS ELEMENT3 RMS ELEMENT4 RMS INPut VOLTage MODE ALL Function Collectively sets the voltage mode of all elements Syntax INPut VOLTage MODE ALL RMS MEAN DC RMEAN Example INPUT VOLTAGE MODE ALL RMS INPut VOLTage MODE ELEMent x Function Sets the voltage mode of the element or queries the current setting Syntax INPut VOLTage MODE ELEMent x RMS MEAN DC RMEAN INPut VOLTage MODE ELEMent x x 1 to 4 element Example INPUT VOLTAGE MODE ELEMENT1 RMS INPUT VOLTAGE 1 gt INPUT VOLTAGE 1 RMS INPut VOLTage MODE SIGMA SIGMB Function Collectively sets the voltage mode of all elements belonging to wiring unit XA EB Syntax INPut VOLTage MODE SIGMA
223. eric NORMal ALL Boolean Example STORE NUMERIC NORMAL ALL ON STORe 1 ELEMent x SIGMA SIGMB Function Turns ON OFF the output of each element A B when storing the numeric data Syntax STORe NUMeric NORMal ELEMent x SIGMA SIGMB Boolean STORe NUMeric NORMal ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB x 1104 Example STORE NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT1 STORE NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT1 gt STORE NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT1 1 Description STORe NUMeric NORMal SIGMA is valid on models with two or more elements To turn the output ON wiring unit must exist by setting the wiring system beforehand using the INPut WIRing command STORe NUMeric NORMal SIGMB is valid on models with four elements To turn the output ON wiring unit XB must exist by setting the wiring system beforehand using the INPut WIRing command STORe NUMeric NORMal PRESet x Function Presets the output ON OFF pattern of the element function for storing the numeric data Syntax STORe NUMeric NORMal PRESet x x 1 to 2 preset pattern number Example STORE NUMERIC NORMAL PRESET1 Description For details on the storage pattern when preset is executed see the User s Manual IM760301 01E STORe NUMeric 1 lt Function gt Function Turns ON OFF the output of the function when storing the numerical data or querie
224. eric NORMal CLEar Function Clears the numeric data output item sets NONE Syntax NUMeric NORMal CLEar ALL lt gt lt gt ALL Clear all items 1st lt NRf gt 1 to 255 Item number to start clearing 2nd lt NRf gt 1 to 255 Item number to end clearing Example NUMERIC NORMAL CLEAR ALL Description If the 2nd lt NRf gt is omitted the output items from the start clear number to the last item 255 are cleared NUMeric NORMal DELete Function Deletes the output items of numeric data Syntax NUMeric NORMal DELete NRf lt NR gt 151 lt NRf gt 1 to 255 Item number to start deleting 2nd lt NRf gt 1 to 255 Item number to end deleting Example NUMERIC NORMAL CLEAR 1 Deletes and shift ITEM2 and subsequent items forward NUMERIC NORMAL CLEAR 1 3 Deletes to and shift ITEM4 and subsequent items forward Description The subsequent output items fill the positions of deleted output items and empty sections at the end are set to NONE f the 2nd NHf is omitted only the output item of the delete start number is deleted NUMeric NORMal ITEM x Function Syntax Example Description If Element is omitted element 1 is set NORMal NUMber Function Syntax Example Sets the numeric data output items function element and harmonic order or queries the current setting NUMeri
225. eric FLICker INFOrmation DELete Function Deletes the output items of flicker judgment results variable format Syntax NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation DELete lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1st lt NRf gt 1 to 32 item number to start deleting 2nd lt NRf gt 1 to 32 item number to stop deleting Example NUMERIC FLICKER INFORMATION DELETE 1 Deletes ITEM1 and shifts ITEM2 and subsequent items forward NUMERIC FLICKER INFORMATION DELETE 1 3 Deletes ITEM1 3 and shifts ITEM4 and subsequent items forward Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option Output items subsequent to the deleted output items are shifted in order into the deleted items position and NONE is set in the open positions on the end If the 2nd lt NRf gt is omitted only the output item of the start delete number is deleted NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation ITEM lt x gt Function Sets the output items function element and observation period of flicker judgment results variable format or queries the current setting Syntax NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation ITEM lt x gt NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Period gt NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation ITEM lt x gt x 1 to 32 item number NONE No output items Function JTOTal JDC JDMAX JDT JPST JPLT Element NR TOTal lt NRf gt 1 to 4 Period NR ALL lt NRf gt 1 to 99
226. eries the current setting Syntax FLICker FREQuency lt gt FLICker FREQuency lt NRf gt 50 60 target frequency Hz Example FLICKER FREQUENCY 50 FLICKER FREQUENCY gt FLICKER FREQUENCY 50 FLICker INITialize Function Initializes flicker measurement Syntax FLICker INITialize Example FLICKER INITIALIZE FLICker INTerval Function Sets the time per measurement of the short term flicker value Pst or queries the current setting Syntax FLICker INTerval NRf NRf FLICker INTerval lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 30 to 15 00 measurement time minutes seconds Example FLICKER INTERVAL 10 00 FLICKER INTERVAL gt FLICKER INTERVAL 10 00 Description This setting is available with normal flicker measurement FLICker MEASurement FLICker The time per measurement of dmax caused by manual switching FLICker MEASurement DMAX is fixed at 1 min 00 sec The setting resolution for the measurement time is 2 seconds When an odd number of Seconds is set it is rounded up to the next second FLICker JUDGe Function Finishes measurement of dmax caused by manual switching and performs judgment Syntax FLICker JUDGe Example FLICKER JUDGE Description This command can be executed with measurement of dmax caused by manual switching FLICker MEASurement DMAX An error occurs if used during normal flicker measurement FLICker MEASurement FLICker FLICker MEASurement Function Set
227. eries the current setting 6 110 SYSTem LCD COLor Queries all settings related to the display colors of the LCD monitor 6 110 SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh Queries all settings related to the display colors of the graphic items 6 110 SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh BACKground GRATicule CURSor U x lt gt Sets the display color of the background graticule cursor voltage waveform current waveform or queries the current setting 6 110 SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh MODE Sets the display color mode of the graphic items or queries the current setting 6 110 IM 760301 17E 6 15 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page SYSTem LCD COLor TEXT Queries all settings related to the display colors of the text items 6 111 SYSTem LCD COLor TEXT LETTer BACKground BOX SUB SELected Sets the display color of the text Menu Fore menu background Menu Back selected menu Select Box pop up menu Sub Menu selected key Selected Key or queries the current setting 6 111 SYSTem LCD COLor TEXT MODE Sets the display color mode of the text items or queries the current setting 6 111 SYSTem SLOCk Sets whether to continue the SHIFT key ON state or queries the current setting 6 111 SYSTem TIME Sets the time or queries the current setting 6 111 SYSTem USBKeyboard Sets the USB keyboard type or queries the current setting 6 111 WAVeform Group WAVeform Queries all settings related to the wavefor
228. eter file 6 47 FILE MDIRectory Creates a directory 6 48 FILE PATH Queries the absolute path of the current directory 6 48 FILE SAVE Queries all settings related to the saving of files 6 48 FILE SAVE ABORt Aborts file saving 6 48 FILE SAVE ACQuisition Queries all settings related to the file saving of the waveform sampling data 6 48 FILE SAVE ACQuisition EXECute Saves the waveform sampling data to a file 6 48 FILE SAVE ACQuisition TRACe Sets the waveform sampling data to be saved to a file or queries the current setting 6 48 FILE SAVE ACQuisition TYPE Sets the format of the waveform sampling data to be saved or queries the current setting 6 48 FILE SAVE ANAMing Sets whether to automatically name the files to be saved or queries the current setting 6 48 FILE SAVE COMMent Sets the comment to be added to the file to be saved or queries the current setting 6 48 FILE SAVE NUMeric Queries all settings related to the saving of numeric data files 6 49 FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle Queries all settings related to Cycle by Cycle measurement items saved to numeric data files or queries the current setting 6 49 FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle ALL Collectively turns ON OFF the output of all elements and functions when saving numeric data from Cycle by Cycle measurement to a file 6 49 FILE SAVE NUMeric CBCycle ELEMent x SIGMA SIGMB Turns ON OFF the output of each element B when saving
229. f screen image data You can make the same settings and inquiries as when IMAGE SAVE and MENU SHIFT IMAGE SAVE on the front panel is used IMAGe Function Queries all settings related to the saving of screen image data Syntax IMAGe Example IMAGE gt IMAGE FORMAT TIFF COLOR OFF COMMENT THIS IS TEST SAVE ANAMING 1 NAME IMAGe ABORt Function Aborts the saving of the screen image data Syntax IMAGe ABORt Example IMAGE ABORT IMAGe COLor Function Sets the color tone of the screen image data to be saved or queries the current setting Syntax IMAGe COLor OFF Example IMAGE COLOR OFF IMAGE COLOR gt IMAGE COLOR OFF Description This command is valid when the format IMAGe FORMat is not PSCRipt IMAGe COMMent Function Sets the comment displayed at the bottom of the screen or queries the current setting Syntax IMAGe COMMent lt String gt COMMent lt String gt 25 characters or less However only the first 20 characters are displayed Example IMAGE COMMENT THIS IS TEST IMAGE COMMENT gt IMAGE COMMENT THIS IS TEST IMAGe COMPression Function Enables or disables the data compression of screen image data in BMP format or queries the current setting Syntax IMAGe COMPression Boolean COMPression IMAGE COMPRESSION ON IMAGE COMPRESSION gt
230. form that was described earlier It is expressed in one of the following forms Form Example lt NRf gt lt Multiplier gt lt Unit gt 5MV lt NRf gt lt Unit gt 5E 3V lt NRf gt lt Multiplier gt 5M lt NRf gt 5E 3 lt Multiplier gt lt Multipliers gt which can be used are indicated below Symbol Word Multiplier EX Exa 1018 Peta 1015 T Tera 1012 G Giga 10 MA Mega 109 K Kilo 103 Milli 103 U Micro 10 N Nano 10 10212 Femto 10715 Unit Units that can be used are indicated below Symbol Word Meaning V Volt Voltage A Ampere Current 5 HZ Hertz Frequency MHZ Megahertz Frequency e lt Multiplier gt and Unit are not case sensitive U is used to indicate micro u is used for Mega to distinguish it from Milli However is interpreted as milliampere for current In addition megahertz is expressed as MHZ Therefore the M Milli multiplier cannot be used for frequencies f both lt Multiplier gt and Unit are omitted the default unit V A S or HZ is used Response messages are always expressed in the lt NR3 gt form Response messages are returned using the default unit without the lt Multiplier gt or Unit IM 760301 17E 5 5 940Jog 5 4 Data lt Register gt lt Register gt indicates an integer and can be express
231. fy the file name without the extension This command is an overlap command IM 760301 17E 6 49 6 8 FILE Group FILE SAVE 1 1 Function Queries all settings related to the items saved to numeric data files Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL gt FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 SIGMA 0 SIGMB 0 U 1 I 1 P 1 5 1 0 1 LAMBDA 1 PHI 1 FU 1 FI 1 UPPEAK 0 UMPEAK 0 IPPEAK 0 0 CFU 0 CFI 0 PC 0 0 WH 0 WHP 0 WHM 0 AH 0 AHP 0 AHM 0 WS 0 WQ 0 1 0 ETA2 0 0 4 0 1 0 F2 0 F3 0 F4 0 5 0 F6 0 F7 0 F8 0 F9 0 F10 0 11 0 F12 0 F13 0 F14 0 15 0 16 0 F17 0 F18 0 F19 0 20 0 FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal ALL Function Collectively turns ON OFF the output of all element functions when saving the numerical data file Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal ALL lt Boolean gt Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL ALL ON FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB Function Turns ON OFF the output of each element B when saving the numeric data to file Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB Boolean FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB x 1 to 4 Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT1 ON FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT 1 gt FILE SAVE
232. g of the built in printer Syntax HCOPy PRINter FEED Example HCOPY PRINTER FEED Description This command is valid only when the built in printer B5 option is installed This command is an overlap command HCOPy PRINter FORMat Function Sets the contents to be printed on the built in printer or queries the current setting Syntax HCOPy PRINter FORMat HCOPy LIST HCOPy PRINter FORMat HCOPy Screen image data LIST Numeric data list Example HCOPY PRINTER FORMAT HCOPY HCOPY PRINTER FORMAT gt HCOPY PRINTER FORMAT HCOPY Description This command is valid only when the built in printer B5 option is installed 6 60 IM 760301 17E 6 11 Group HCOPy PRINter LIST Function Queries all settings related to the printing of the numeric data list on the built in printer Syntax HCOPy PRINter LIST Example HCOPY PRINTER LIST gt HCOPY PRINTER LIST INFORMATION 1 NORMAL ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 SIGMA 0 SIGMB 0 U 1 I 1 1 5 1 0 1 LAMBDA 1 PHI 1 FU 1 FI 1 UPPEAK 0 UMPEAK 0 IPPEAK 0 IMPEAK 0 CFU 0 CFI 0 PC 0 TIME 0 WH 0 WHP 0 WHM 0 AH 0 0 0 WS 0 WO 0 1 0 ETA2 0 ETA3 0 ETA4 0 F1 0 F2 0 F3 0 F4 0 F5 0 F6 0 F7 0 F8 0 F9 0 10 0 F11 0 F12 0 F13 0 14 0 F15 0 F16 0 17 0 18 0 19 0 20 0 Description This command is valid only when the built in printer B5 option is installed HCOPy PRINter LIST INFOrmation Function Sets w
233. gger slope or queries the current setting 6 43 DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SOURce Sets the trigger source or queries the current setting 6 43 DISPlay WAVE U lt x gt lt gt SPEed TORQue Turns ON OFF the waveform display or queries the current setting 6 43 DISPlay WAVE VZoom Queries all settings related to the vertical zoom factor of the waveform 6 43 DISPlay WAVE VZoom UALL IALL Collectively sets the vertical zoom factor of the waveform voltage current of all elements 6 43 IM 760301 17E 6 5 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page DISPlay WAVE VZoom U lt x gt I lt x gt Sets the vertical zoom factor of the waveform voltage current of the element or queries the current setting 6 43 FILE Group FILE Queries all settings related to the file operation 6 47 FILE CDIRectory Changes the current directory 6 47 FILE DELete IMAGe PNG JPEG Deletes the screen image data file 6 47 FILE DELete NUMeric ASCii FLOat Deletes the numeric data file 6 47 FILE DELete SETup Deletes the setup parameter file 6 47 FILE DELete WAVE BINary ASCii FLOat Deletes the waveform display data file 6 47 FILE DRIVe Sets the target drive 6 47 FILE FORMat EXECute Formats the PC card 6 47 PILE FREE Queries the free space on the target drive 6 47 FILE LOAD ABORt Aborts the file loading 6 47 FILE LOAD SETup Loads the setup param
234. gs related to the printing on the network printer Syntax HCOPy NETPrint Example HCOPY NETPRINT HCOPY NETPRINT FORMAT BJ 180 COLOR 0 Description This command is valid only on models with the Ethernet interface C7 option HCOPy NETPrint COLor Function Turns ON OFF color printing on the network printer or queries the current setting Syntax HCOPy NETPrint COLor lt Boolean gt NETPrint COLor Example HCOPY NETPRINT COLOR OFF HCOPY NETPRINT COLOR gt HCOPY NETPRINT COLOR 0 Description This command is valid only on models with the Ethernet interface C7 option NETPrint FORMat Function Sets the printer description language for printing on a network printer or queries the current setting Syntax HCOPy NETPrint FORMat PCL5 LIPS3 BJ lt NR gt HCOPy NETPrint FORMat lt NRf gt 180 300 or 360 dpi resolution Example HCOPY NETPRINT FORMAT BJ 180 HCOPY NETPRINT FORMAT gt HCOPY NETPRINT FORMAT BJ 180 Description Set lt NRf gt only when BJ is selected This command is valid only on models with the Ethernet interface C7 option HCOPy PRINter Function Queries all settings related to printing on the built in printer Syntax HCOPy PRINter Example HCOPY PRINTER gt HCOPY PRINTER FORMAT HCOPY Description This command is valid only when the built in printer B5 option is installed HCOPy PRINter FEED Function Executes paper feedin
235. he number of data is determined by the data update interval RATE setting length rate sec x 200000 When the measurement mode is FFT the number of data is determined by the setting for the number of FFT computation points DISPlay FFT POINt as follows 1 When ACQuisition TRACe is lt gt length point 2 1 10001 or 100001 2 When ACQuisition TRACe is not FFT lt x gt length point 20000 or 200000 Ina mode other than MATH or FFT an error occurs since there is no acquisition data and 0 is returned ACQuisition SEND Function Queries the waveform sampling data specified by ACQuisition TRACe Syntax ACQuisition SEND Example When ACQuisition FORMat is set to ASCii ACQUISITION SEND gt lt NR3 gt lt NR3 gt e When ACQuisition FORMat is set to FLOat ACQUISITION SEND gt 8 number of bytes 8 digits data byte sequence Description The format of the waveform sampling data that is output varies depending on the sACQuisition FORMat setting as follows 1 When ascii is specified The physical value is output in the lt NR3 gt format The data of each point is delimited by acomma 2 When FLOat is specified The physical value is output in IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format The output byte order of the data of each point follows the order that is set using the sACQuisition BYTeorder command The WT3000 outputs the wa
236. he VT ratio CT ratio power factor of the element or queries the current setting Syntax INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor ELEMent lt x gt NRf INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor ELEMent lt x gt x 1 to 4 element lt NRf gt 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example INPUT SCALING VT ELEMENT1 1 INPUT SCALING VT ELEMENT1 gt INPUT SCALING VT ELEMENT1 1 0000 INPut SCALing STATe Function Queries the scaling ON OFF states of all elements Syntax INPut SCALing STATe Example INPUT SCALING STATE gt INPUT SCALING STATE ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 INPut SCALing STATe ALL Function Collectively turns ON OFF the scaling of all elements Syntax INPut SCALing STATe ALL Boolean Example INPUT SCALING STATE ALL OFF 6 70 IM 760301 17E 6 14 INPut Group INPut SCALing STATe ELEMent lt x gt Function Syntax Example Turns ON OFF the scaling of the element or Function queries the current setting INPut SCALing STATe Syntax ELEMent lt x gt lt Boolean gt Example INPut SCALing STATe ELEMent lt x gt x 1 to 4 element INPUT SCALING STATE ELEMENT1 OFF INPUT SCALING STATE ELEMENT1 gt INPUT SCALING STATE ELEMENT1 0 INPut SYNChronize Function Syntax Example INPut Function Syntax Example INPut Function Syntax Example INPut Function Syntax Ex
237. he current setting Syntax HARMonics PLLSource U lt x gt I lt x gt EXTernal SAMPle HARMonics PLLSource lt x gt 1 to 4 element EXTernal External clock input Ext Clk Sampling clock input Smp Clk Example HARMONICS PLLSOURCE 01 HARMONICS PLLSOURCE gt HARMONICS PLLSOURCE 01 Description is selectable only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option If SAMPIe is selected it is used in wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode In other measurement modes EXTernal is used EXTernal is also returned in response to a query HARMonics PLLWarning Function Queries all settings related to the warning messages of the PLL source Syntax HARMonics PLLWarning Example HARMONICS PLLWARNING gt HARMONICS PLLWARNING STATE 1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option HARMonics PLLWarning STATe Function Sets whether to generate a warning message when the PLL source is not applied or queries the current setting Syntax HARMonics PLLWarning STATe Boolean HARMonics PLLWarning STATe Example HARMONICS PLLWARNING STATE ON HARMONICS PLLWARNING STATE gt HARMONICS PLLWARNING STATE 1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option This setting is valid only in wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode HA
238. he mapping of the voltage current rotating speed torque waveform computation waveform to the split screen or queries the current setting DISPlay WAVE MAPPing U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue MATH x lt NRf gt DISPlay WAVE MAPPing U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue MATH lt x gt x of U lt x gt lt gt 1 to 4 element lt x gt of MATH lt x gt 1 to 2 MATH lt NRf gt 0 to 3 DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING U1 0 DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING U1 gt DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING U1 0 Description This command is valid when the waveform mapping method DISPlay WAVE 1 is set to USER SPEed TORQue are valid only on the motor version MV lt gt is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option DISPlay WAVE POSition Function Syntax Example Queries all settings related to the vertical position level of the center position of the waveform DISPlay WAVE POSition DISPLAY WAVE POSITION DISPLAY WAVE POSITION U1 0 000 U2 0 000 U3 0 000 04 0 000 11 0 000 I2 0 000 I3 0 000 I4 0 000 DISPlay WAVE POSition UALL IALL Function Syntax Example Collectively sets the vertical position level of the center position of the waveform voltage current of all elements DISPlay WAVE POSition UALL IALL NRf lt NRf gt 130 000 to 130 000 DISPLAY WAVE POSITION UALL 0 D
239. he speed or torque of the motor input is overrange Bit15 POV ElementX Input Peak Over Set to 1 when peak over input exceeding the peak is detected in any of the elements IM 760301 17E 7 7 7 8 7 4 Extended Event Register The transition filter parameters detect changes in the specified bit numerical suffix 1 to 16 of the condition register in the following manner and overwrite the extended event register RISE FALL The specified bit of the extended event register is set to 1 when the bit of the condition register changes from 0 to 1 The specified bit of the extended event register is set to 1 when the bit of the condition register changes from 1 to 0 BOTH The specified bit of the extended event register is set to 1 when the bit of the condition register changes from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 NEVer Always 0 IM 760301 17E 75 Output Queue and Error Queue Output Queue The output queue is provided to store response messages to queries For example if you send the WAVeform SEND command which requests the output of acquired data the data is stored in the output queue until it is read As shown below data are stored order and read from the oldest ones first The output queue is emptied in the following cases in addition to when read out is performed When a new message is received from the controller When a deadlock occurs see page 5 2 When a device clear comma
240. hen storing the waveform display data or queries the current setting Syntax STORe WAVE U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue lt Boolean gt STORe WAVE U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue lt X gt 1 to 4 Example STORE WAVE U1 ON STORE WAVE U1 gt STORE WAVE U1 1 Description SPEed TORQue valid only on the motor version 6 108 IM 760301 17E 6 22 5 5 commands this group deal with the system You can make the same settings and inquiries as when MISC on the front panel is used SYSTem Function Queries all settings related to the system Syntax SYSTem Example 5 5 SYSTEM LANGUAGE MESSAGE ENGLISH MENU ENGLISH SYSTEM FONT GOTHIC KLOCK 0 SLOCK 0 LCD BRIGHTNESS 2 COLOR GRAPH MODE DEFAULT SYSTEM LCD COLOR TEXT MODE PRESET1 SYSTem CLOCk Function Sets all date time related settings or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem CLOCk Example SYSTEM CLOCK gt SYSTEM CLOCK DISPLAY 1 TYPE MANUAL SYSTem CLOCk DISPlay Function Turns ON OFF the date time display or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem CLOCk DISPlay Boolean SYSTem CLOCk DISPlay SYSTEM CLOCK DISPLAY ON SYSTEM CLOCK DISPLAY gt SYSTEM CLOCK DISPLAY 1 Example SYSTem CLOCk SNTP Function Sets all SNTP based date time related settings or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SNTP Example SYSTEM
241. hether to add setup parameters when printing the numeric data list on the built in printer or queries the current setting Syntax HCOPy PRINter LIST INFOrmation lt Boolean gt HCOPy PRINter LIST INFOrmation Example HCOPY PRINTER LIST INFORMATION ON HCOPY PRINTER LIST INFORMATION gt HCOPY PRINTER LIST INFORMATION 1 Description This command is valid only when the built in printer B5 option is installed HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal Function Queries all settings related to the printed items of the numeric data list using the built in printer Syntax HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal Example HCOPY PRINTER LIST NORMAL gt PRINTER LIST NORMAL ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 SIGMA 0 SIGMB 0 U 1 I 1 1 5 1 0 1 LAMBDA 1 PHI 1 FU 1 FI 1 UPPEAK0 UMPEAK 0 IPPEAK 0 0 CFU 0 CFI 0 PC 0 TIME 0 0 WHP 0 WHM 0 AH 0 0 0 WS 0 WO 0 1 0 ETA2 0 4 0 F1 0 F2 0 0 F4 0 F5 0 F6 0 F7 0 F8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 14 0 F15 0 F16 0 17 0 18 0 F19 0 F20 0 Description This command is valid only when the built in printer B5 option is installed HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal ALL Function Collectively turns ON OFF the output of all element functions when printing the numeric data list on the built in printer Syntax HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal ALL Boolean Example HCOPY PRINTER LIST NORMAL ALL ON Des
242. how to synchronize the program using COMMunicate WAIT see page 5 9 COMMunicate WAIT Function Creates the response that is returned when the specified event occurs Syntax COMMunicate WAIT Register Register 0 to 65535 extended event register see page 7 7 Example COMMUNICATE WAIT 65535 gt 1 Operation pending status register Overlap enable register When bit 5 PRN 1 Built in printer operation not complete When bit 6 ACS 1 Access to the medium not complete IM 760301 17E 6 25 6 6 CURSor Group The commands in this group deal with cursor measurements You can make the same settings and inquiries as when CURSOR SHIFT MEASURE on the front panel is used CURSor Function Queries all settings related to the cursor measurement Syntax CURSor Example CURSOR gt CURSOR WAVE STATE 0 TRACE U1 TRACE2 1 MAX 5 1 10 0 03 POSITION2 40 0E 03 CURSOR BAR STATE 0 POSITION1 1 POSITION2 15 CURSOR TREND STATE 0 TRACE1 1 TRACE2 2 1 100 POSITION2 900 CURSor BAR Function Queries all settings related to the cursor measurement of the bar graph display Syntax CURSor BAR Example CURSOR BAR CURSOR BAR STATE 1 POSITION1 1 POSITION2 15 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the
243. ing 6 105 STORe DIRection Sets the store destination or queries the current setting 6 105 STORe FILE Queries all settings related to the saving of the stored data 6 105 STORe FILE ANAMing Sets whether to automatically name the files when saving the stored data or queries the current setting 6 105 STORe FILE COMMent Sets the comment to be added to the file when saving the stored data or queries the current setting 6 105 STORe FILE NAME Sets the name of the file when saving the stored data or queries the current setting 6 105 STORe FILE TYPE Sets the data format when saving the stored data or queries the current setting 6 105 STORe INTerval Sets the store interval or queries the current setting 6 106 STORe ITEM Sets the stored item or queries the current setting 6 106 STORe MEMory Queries all settings related to the storage memory 6 106 STORe MEMory ALERt Sets whether to display a confirmation message when clearing the storage memory or queries the current setting 6 106 IM 760301 17E 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page ABORt Abort converting the stored data from the memory to the file 6 106 CONVert EXECute Executes the converting of the stored data from the memory to the file 6 106 STORe MEMory INITialize Executes the initialization of the storage memory 6 106 STORe MODE Sets the data storage recall or que
244. inuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions The figures given in this manual may differ from those that actually appear on your screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP IP software have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from University of California USB Interface and Ethernet Interface 5th Edition March 2006 YK The items below are needed on the PC to use the communication functions via the USB interface DLMT series library TMCTL USB connection device driver between the PC and WT3000 The item below is needed on the PC to use the communication functions via the Ethernet interface DL WT series library TMCTL The library and driver above can be downloaded from the following Web page http www yokogawa com tm Rights Reserved Copyright 2004 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 760301 17E Trademarks Revisions Microsoft Internet Explorer MS DOS Windows Windows NT and Windows XP are either registered tradem
245. ion 6 79 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt UNIT 22 6 79 lt gt 2 6 79 MEASure FUNCtionex STATe esee 6 79 6 79 MEASu re PC IEGQ 6 80 gt 6 80 MEASure PC MEAS re PEIASe niii mene eveniet 0 6 80 MEASure SQFormula 6 80 MEASure SYNChronize 2 6 80 MEASUre nere e erar teretes 6 76 SMOTOn FILTET 6 81 MOTor FILTer LINE MOTor PM SCALing 2 0 irte ce eter eee eov eee te ennt 6 81 MOTor POLES eire rete MOTor SPEed AUTO MOTor SPEed PRANge MO Tor SPEed PULS eri MOTor SPEed SCALing 6 82 MOTor SPEed TYPE 6 82 5 6 82 MOTor SPEed 6 81 MOTor SSPeed Sync SPeed 6 82 MOTor SYNChronize sess 6 82 6 83
246. ion mark is appended to the highest level command of group Execution of an upper level query allows all settings that can be specified in the group to be received at once Some query groups which are comprised of more than three hierarchical levels can output all the lower level settings Example INTEGrate lt PMT gt gt INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL ACAL 0 TIMER 0 0 0 lt RMT gt The response to an upper level query can be transmitted as a program message back to the instrument In this way the settings that existed when the upper level query was made can be restored However some upper level queries do not return setup information that is not currently in use It is important to remember that not all the group s information is necessarily returned as part of a response Header Interpretation Rules The instrument interprets the header that is received according to the rules below Mnemonics not case sensitive Example CURSor can also be written as cursor Or CUrsor The lower case section of the header can be omitted Example CURSor can also be written as CURSO or CURS The question mark at the end of a header indicates that it is a query The question mark cannot be omitted Example The shortest abbreviation for CURSor is CURS Ifthe x value at the end of a mnemonic is omitted it is interpreted as a 1 Example If ELEMent lt x gt is written as ELEM
247. isition SEND ACQuisition HOLD Function Sets whether to hold ON or release OFF all the waveform sampling data or queries the current setting Syntax ACQuisition HOLD Boolean ACQuisition HOLD Example ACQUISITION HOLD ON ACQUISITION HOLD gt ACQUISITION HOLD 1 Description This command is valid when the measurement mode is set to MATH or FFT Otherwise an error occurs e When ACQuisition HOLD is turned ON the WT3000 stops sampling the waveform sampling data and holds all of the waveform sampling data at that point internally Be sure to set ACQuisition HOLD to ON before executing ACQuisition SEND For example if you wish to retrieve the waveform sampling data of U1 and 11 at the same point do the following ACQuisition HOLD ON ACQuisition TRACe 01 ACQuisition SEND Receive the waveform sampling data of U1 ACQuisition TRACe I1 ACQuisition SEND Receive the waveform sampling data of 11 ACQuisition HOLD OFF Toretrieve new waveform sampling data set ACQuisition HOLD to OFF to resume sampling and then set ACQuisition HOLD to ON again IM 760301 17E 6 2 ACQuisition Group ACQuisition LENGth Function Queries the total number of points of the waveform sampling specified by sACQuisition TRACe Syntax ACQuisition LENGth Example ACQUISITION LENGTH 100000 Description When the measurement mode is MATH t
248. item or queries the current setting MEASure FREQuency ITEM x U lt x gt I lt x gt FREQuency ITEM lt x gt x of ITEM lt x gt 1 or 2 Freq 1 or Freq 2 x of U lt x gt lt gt 1 to 4 element MEASURE FREQUENCY 1 01 MEASURE FREQUENCY 1 gt MEASURE FREQUENCY 1 01 Description This command is invalid on models with the frequency measurement add on FQ option because the frequency can be measured simultaneously on all input elements Syntax Example MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt Function Queries all settings related to user defined functions Syntax MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt x 1 to 20 F1 to F20 Example MEASURE FUNCTION1 gt MEASURE FUNCTION1 STATE 1 EXPRESSION UMN E1 UNIT V MEASure FUNCtioncx EXPRession Function Sets the equation of the user defined function or queries the current setting MEASure FUNCtioncx EXPRession String MEASure FUNCtioncx EXPRession x 1 to 20 F1 to F20 String Up to 50 characters MEASURE FUNCTION1 EXPRESSION UMN E1 MEASURE FUNCTION1 EXPRESSION gt MEASURE FUNCTION1 EXPRESSION UMN E1 Syntax Example MEASure Function Syntax Example MEASure Function Syntax Example Description MEASure Function Syntax Example Description MEASure Function Syntax Example FUNCtion lt x gt STATe
249. itted the judgment result of the overall observation period Result is output the same output occurs as when the ALL parameters are specified For the format of individual numeric data see the description for NUMeric FLICker INFOrmation VALue NUMeric FLICker PERiod Function Syntax Example Queries the observation period number currently being measured during flicker measurement NUMeric FLICker PERiod NUMERIC FLICKER PERIOD gt 5 Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option Returns the observation period numbers marked with an asterisk in the No column of the numeric list in the flicker measurement Screen If no asterisks are displayed such as after a reset or during initialization 0 is returned 6 90 IM 760301 17E 6 18 NUMeric Function Syntax Example Description FLICker VALue Queries the measured flicker data fixed format NUMeric FLICker VALue lt NRf gt ALL NUMeric FLICker VALue lt NRf gt 1 to 99 observation period number ALL Overall observation period Result Example in which NUMeric FORMat is set to ASCii NUMERIC FLICKER VALUE 1 gt 600 229 75E 00 50 000E 00 1 52E 00 1 56E 00 3E 00 Example in which NUMeric FORMat is set to FLOat NUMERIC FLICKER VALUE gt 4 number of bytes four digits data byte sequence Only availa
250. ker PERiod command Syntax Example FLICker DMAX Function Sets all settings related to the maximum relative voltage change dmax or queries the current setting Syntax FLICKer DMAX Example FLICKER DMAX gt FLICKER DMAX STATE 1 LIMIT 4 00 FLICker DMAX LIMit Function Sets the limit of the maximum relative voltage change dmax or queries the current setting Syntax FLICker DMAX LIMit lt NRf gt FLICker DMAX LIMit lt NRf gt 1 00 to 99 99 limit Example FLICKER DMAX LIMIT 4 00 FLICKER DMAX LIMIT gt FLICKER DMAX LIMIT 4 00 FLICker DMAX STATe Function Turns ON OFF judgment of the maximum relative voltage change dmax or queries the current setting Syntax FLICker DMAX STATe Boolean FLICker DMAX STATe Example FLICKER DMAX STATE ON FLICKER DMAX STATE gt FLICKER DMAX STATE 1 FLICker Function Syntax Example FLICker Function Syntax Example FLICker Function Syntax Example FLICker Function Syntax Example Description FLICker Function Syntax Example DMIN Sets all settings related to the steady state range dmin or queries the current setting FLICker DMIN FLICKER DMIN gt FLICKER DMIN LIMIT 0 10 DMIN LIMit Sets the limit of the steady state range dmin or queries the current setting FLICker DMIN LIMit lt NRf gt FLICker DMIN LIMit lt NRf gt 0 10 00 to 9 99 limit FLICKER DMIN
251. l elements belonging to wiring unit 6 72 INPut WIRing Sets the wiring system or queries the current setting 6 73 INTEGrate Group INTEGrate Queries all settings related to the integration 6 74 INTEGrate ACAL Turns ON OFF the auto calibration or queries the current setting 6 74 INTEGrate MODE Sets the integration mode or queries the current setting 6 74 INTEGrate RESet Resets the integrated value 6 74 INTEGrate RTIMe Queries the integration start and stop times for real time integration mode 6 74 INTEGrate RTIMe STARt END Sets the integration start stop time for real time integration mode or queries the current setting 6 74 INTEGrate STARt Starts the integration 6 74 INTEGrate STATe Queries the integration condition 6 74 INTEGrate STOP Stops the integration 6 74 INTEGrate TIMer Sets the integration timer time or queries the current setting 6 75 MEASure Group MEASure Queries all settings related to the computation 6 76 MEASure AVERaging Queries all settings related to averaging 6 76 MEASure AVERaging COUNt Sets the averaging coefficient or queries the current setting 6 76 MEASure AVERaging STATe Turns ON OFF averaging or queries the current setting 6 76 MEASure AVERaging TYPE Sets the averaging type or queries the current setting 6 77 MEASure COMPensation Queries all settings related to the compensation computation 6 77 MEASure COMPensation EFFiciency Turns ON OFF the efficiency compens
252. lf test is successful 1 if it is not t takes approximately 90 s for the test to complete When receiving a response from the WT3000 set the timeout to a relatively large value WAI WAIt Function Syntax Example Description Holds the subsequent command until the completion of the specified overlap operation WAI WAI Forthe description regarding how to synchronize the program using WAI see page 5 7 The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to specify the overlap command 6 116 IM 760301 17E Chapter7 Status Reports 7 1 Status Reports Status Reports The figure below shows the status report that is read by serial polling This status report is an extended version of the status report defined in IEEE 488 2 1992 i 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Service request enable register Il i amp n i MSS 7 6 ESBMAVEESEAV 1 0 status byte register Ras 4 4 4 Y Occurrence of a service 2 request Output Error queue
253. ls with the delta computation function DT option The selections are the same as the sMEASure DMeasure SIGMA command The wiring system of wiring unit determines the selectable modes Example MEASure EFFiciency Function Queries all settings related to the efficiency computation Syntax MEASure EFFiciency Example MEASURE EFFICIENCY gt 1 PB PA 2 OFF ETA4 OFF UDEF1 P1 UDEF2 P1 MEASure EFFiciency ETA lt x gt Function Sets the efficiency equation or queries the current setting Syntax MEASure EFFiciency ETA lt x gt OFF P lt x gt PA PB PM UDEF lt x gt P lt x gt PA PB PM UDEF lt x gt MEASure EFFiciency ETA lt x gt x of ETA lt x gt 1 to 4 n1 to n4 OFF No computation the denominator is ignored lt gt of P lt x gt 1 to 4 element PA only on models with 2 to 4 elements PB PZB only on models with 4 elements PM Pm motor output motor version MV only lt x gt of UDEF lt x gt 1 to 2 Udef1 to Udef2 Example MEASURE EFFICIENCY ETA1 PB PA MEASURE EFFICIENCY ETA1 gt MEASURE EFFICIENCY ETAl PB PA Description Set the numerator and then the denominator The numerator can be omitted The numerator is set to 1 when omitted The numerator is omitted when the numerator is 1 in the response to a query MEASure EFFiciency UDEF lt x gt Function Sets the user d
254. lters of all elements 6 69 INPut FILTer LINE ELEMent lt x gt Sets the line filter of the element or queries the current setting 6 69 INPut INDependent Turns ON OFF the independent setting of input elements or queries the current setting 6 69 INPut MODUle Queries the input element type 6 70 INPut NULL Turns ON OFF the NULL function or queries the current setting 6 70 INPut POVer Queries the peak over information 6 70 INPut SCALing Queries all settings related to scaling 6 70 INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor Queries the scaling constant of all elements 6 70 INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor ALL Collectively sets the scaling constants of all elements 6 70 INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor ELEMent x Sets the scaling constant of the element or queries the current setting 6 70 INPut SCALing STATe Queries the scaling ON OFF states of all elements 6 70 INPut SCALing STATe ALL Collectively turns ON OFF the scaling of all elements 6 70 INPut SCALing STATe ELEMent x Turns ON OFF the scaling of the element or queries the current setting 6 71 INPut SYNChronize Queries the synchronization source of all elements 6 71 INPut SYNChronize ALL Collectively sets the synchronization source of all elements 6 71 INPut SYNChronize ELEMent x Sets the synchronization source of the element or queries the current setting 6 71 INPut SYNChronize SIGMA SIGMB Collectively sets the synchroniza
255. m LCD COLor 2 24 04 800 6 110 SS YS TEM LODY indes eei ee tide ete esaet voe 6 110 SYSTemiSLOGK erre 6 111 29 Y9 TOM 6 111 SYSTem USBKeyboard 2 6 111 SYS Temi uicit vitis eerte ee HE e eee PV URS 6 109 WAVeform BY Teorder WAVeltormm END 4 iit cde de ed WAVeform FORMat n 5 WAVetorm iHlOLD rente neret WAVeform LENGIth 6 112 WAVeltorm SENDY 6 113 5 6 113 WAVetorm S TARE o 6 113 2 6 113 WAVeform TRIGger WAVeform ien eit eco ee 1 lt gt 6 67 INPut CURRent AUTO SIGMA SIGMB 6 67 INPut CURRent AUTO 2 6 66 INPut CURRent AUTOF ALL eene INPut CURRent MODE ELEMent lt x gt INPut CURRent MODE SIGMA SIGMB 6 67 1 6 67 INPut CURRent RANGe ELEMent lt x gt 6 68 INPut CURRent RANGe SIGMA SIGMB
256. m LCD COLor TEXT LETTer BACKground BOX SUB SELected lt NRf gt 0 to 7 Example SYSTEM LCD COLOR TEXT LETTER 7 7 7 SYSTEM LCD COLOR TEXT LETTER gt SYSTEM LCD COLOR TEXT LETTER 7 7 7 Description Set the color in the order R G and B This command is valid when the display color mode of text items SYSTem LCD COLor TEXT is set to USER SYSTem LCD COLor TEXT MODE Function Sets the display color mode of the text items or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem LCD COLor TEXT MODE PRESet lt x gt USER SYSTem LCD COLor TEXT MODE lt gt 1103 Example SYSTEM LCD COLOR TEXT MODE PRESET1 SYSTEM LCD COLOR TEXT MODE gt SYSTEM LCD COLOR TEXT MODE PRESET1 SYSTem SLOCk Function Sets whether to continue the SHIFT key ON state or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem SLOCk lt Boolean gt SYSTem SLOCk Example SYSTEM SLOCK OFF SYSTEM SLOCK gt SYSTEM SLOCK 0 SYSTem TIME Function Sets the time or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem TIME String SYSTem TIME String HH MM SS HH hour minute SS second Example 5 5 14 30 00 SYSTEM TIME gt 14 30 00 SYSTem USBKeyboard Function Sets the USB keyboard type language or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem USBKeyboard JAPANese ENGLish SYSTem USBKeyboard Example SYSTEM USBKEYBOARD JAPANESE SYSTEM US
257. m display NAN Not A Number is returned 6 28 IM 760301 17E 6 7 DISPlay Group The commands in this group deal with the screen display You can make the same settings and inquiries as when the keys in the DISPLAY area and the ITEM amp ELEMENT area on the front panel are used DISPlay Function Queries all settings related to the screen display Syntax DISPlay Example Example when the display mode DISPlay MODE is NUMeric numeric display DISPLAY gt DISPLAY MODE NUMERIC Response to DISPlay NUMeric with the first DISPLAY section removed DISPLAY INFORMATION STATE 0 PAGE 1 Example when the display mode 3DISPlay MODE is WAVE waveform display DISPLAY DISPLAY MODE WAVE Response to DISPlay WAVE with the first DISPLAY section removed DISPLAY INFORMATION STATE 0 PAGE 1 Example when the display mode 3DISPlay MODE is NWAVe DISPLAY gt DISPLAY MODE NWAVE Response to DISPlay NUMeric with the first DISPLAY section removed Same as the response to DISPlay WAVE DISPLAY INFORMATION STATE 0 PAGE 1 Description Returns all settings corresponding to the display mode DISPlay MODE DISPlay BAR Function Queries all settings related to the bar graph Syntax DISPlay BAR Example DISPLAY BAR gt DISPLAY BAR FORMAT SINGLE ITEM1 U 1 ITEM2 1 ITEM3 P 1 ORDER 1 100 Descriptio
258. m display data output 6 112 WAVeform BYTeorder Sets the output byte order of the waveform display data FLOAT format that is transmitted by WAVeform SEND or queries the current setting 6 112 WAVeform END Sets the output end point of the waveform display data that is transmitted by WAVeform SEND or queries the current setting 6 112 WAVeform FORMat Sets the format of the waveform display data that is transmitted by WAVeform SEND or queries the current setting 6 112 WAVeform HOLD Sets whether to hold ON or release OFF all the waveform display data or queries the current setting 6 112 WAVeform LENGth Queries the total number of points of the waveform specified by WAVeform TRACe 6 112 WAVeform SEND Queries the waveform display data specified by WAVeform TRACe 6 113 WAVeform SRATe Queries the sample rate of the retrieved waveform 6 113 WAVeform STARt Sets the output start point of the waveform display data that is transmitted by WAVeform SEND or queries the current setting 6 113 WAVeform TRACe Sets the target waveform for the commands in the WAVeform group or queries the current setting 6 113 WAVeform TRIGger Queries the trigger position of the retrieved waveform 6 113 Common Command Group CAL Executes zero calibration zero level compensation same operation as pressing CAL SHIFT SINGLE and queries the result 6 114 CLS Clears the standard event register e
259. mple The pin numbers are for the 9 pin connector In general use a cross cable OFF OFF XON RTS XON RS CTS RTS CS RS PC WT3000 PC WT3000 PC WT3000 SD 3 3 SD SD 3 3 SD SD 3 3 SD RD 2 lt gt RD 2 22 2 RD 2 222 2 mp RS 7 7 RS RS 7 7 RS RS 7 7 RS CS 8 8 CS CS 8 8 cs cs cs SG 5 5 6 SG 5 5 6 SG 5 _15 2 4 1 760301 17 2 4 Combination of Handshaking Methods When using the RS 232 interface for transferring data it is necessary for equipment on both sides to agree on a set of rules to ensure the proper transfer of data The set of rules is called handshaking Because there are various handshaking methods that can be used between the WT3000 and the PC one must make sure that the same method is chosen by both the WT3000 and the PC You can choose any of the four methods in the table below Handshake format Descriptions Handshake Method Data Sending Control control Data Receiving Control control method when sending data to a computer method when receiving data from a computer Software Handshake Hardware Handshake Sending stops when X off is received and sending is resumed when X on is received Sending stops when CB CTS is handshake False and sending is resumed when CB is True Software Handshake Hardware Handshake X off is sent when received d
260. ms are displayed in order by the item number The number expresses the number of items that is displayed on a single screen page ALL All functions are displayed in order by element SINGle One list display item is listed by Separating the data into even and odd orders DUAL Two list display items are listed in order by harmonic order e SINGle DUAL are selectable only models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST Function Syntax Example Queries all settings related to the numeric display list display DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST 1 U 1 ITEM2 I 1 CURSOR ORDER HEADER 1 ORDER 1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option 6 36 IM 760301 17E 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST CURSor Function Sets the cursor position on the numeric display list display or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST CURSor HEADer ORDer DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST CURSor The cursor moves to the header section data concerning all the harmonics left side of the screen ORDer The cursor moves to the data section Numeric data of each harmonic right side of the scree
261. n Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST CURSOR ORDER DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST CURSOR DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST CURSOR ORDER Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST HEADer Function Sets the cursor position in the header section on the numeric display list display or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST HEADer lt gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST HEADer lt NRf gt 1 to 98 Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST HEADER 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST HEADER DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST HEADER 1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option This command is valid when the cursor position 3DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST CURSor on the numeric display list display is HEADer DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ITEM x Function Sets the displayed items function and element on the numeric display list display or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST lt gt lt Function gt lt Element gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST lt gt lt gt 1 or 2 item number Function U 1I P S Q LAMBda See the function selection list 2 on page 6 46
262. n This command is valid when the format of the waveform display data to be saved FILE SAVE WAVE TYPE is FLOat When it is BINary ASCii all waveforms of which the display is turned ON are saved SPEed TORQue are valid only on the motor version MV lt gt is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option FILE SAVE WAVE TYPE Function Sets the format of the waveform display data to be saved or queries the current setting Syntax FILE SAVE WAVE TYPE BINary ASCii FLOat FILE SAVE WAVE TYPE Example FILE SAVE WAVE TYPE BINARY FILE SAVE WAVE TYPE gt FILE SAVE WAVE TYPE BINARY IM 760301 17E 6 51 6 9 FLICker Group The FLICker group contains commands related to flicker measurement These commands allow you to enter and query the same settings that are available under ITEM in the Flicker Items menu and under FORM in the Flicker Form menu on the front panel Note that the commands in this group are only available with the flicker measurement function FL option FLICker Function Queries all settings related to flicker FLICker DC LIMit measurement Function Sets the limit of the relative steady state voltage Syntax FLICker change dc or queries the current setting Example FLICKER gt FLICKER Syntax FLICker DC LIMit lt gt MEASUREMENT FLICKER ELEMENT1 1 FLICker DC LIMit
263. n or the harmonic measurement function G5 option When multiple bar graphs are displayed the cursor measurement values of each bar graph are returned in order If the cursor display is not turned ON on the bar graph Not A Number is returned CURSor FFT Function Queries all settings related to the cursor measurement on the FFT waveform display Syntax CURSor FFT Example CURSOR FFT gt CURSOR FFT STATE 0 TRACE1 FFT1 TRACE2 FFT2 POSITION1 100 POSITION2 900 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option CURSor FFT POSition lt x gt Function Sets the cursor position on the FFT waveform display or queries the current setting Syntax CURSor FFT POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor FFT POSition lt x gt lt X gt 1 2 1 C1 2 C2 x lt NRf gt 0 to 1001 Example CURSOR FFT POSITION1 20 CURSOR FFT POSITION1 gt CURSOR FFT POSITION1 20 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option 6 26 IM 760301 17E 6 6 CURSor Group CURSor FFT STATe Function Turns ON OFF the cursor display on the FFT waveform display or queries the current setting Syntax CURSor FFT STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor FFT STATe Example CURSOR FFT STATE OFF CURSOR FFT STATE gt CURSOR FFT STATE 0 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanc
264. n This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option DISPlay BAR FORMat Function Sets the display format of the bar graph or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay BAR FORMat SINGle DUAL TRIad DISPlay BAR FORMat Example DISPLAY BAR FORMAT SINGLE DISPLAY BAR FORMAT gt DISPLAY BAR FORMAT SINGLE Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt Function Sets the bar graph item function and element or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt lt Function gt lt Element gt DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt x 1 to item number Function U r P s o raMBda See the function selection list 2 on page 6 46 Element 1 to 4 Example DISPLAY BAR ITEM1 0 1 DISPLAY BAR ITEM1 gt DISPLAY BAR ITEM1 0 1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option IM 760301 17E 6 29 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay BAR ORDer Function Syntax Example Sets the start and end orders of the bar graph or queries the current setting DISPlay BAR ORDer lt gt lt gt DISPlay BAR O
265. n the WT3000 receives a COMMunicate REMote OFF command from the PC the WT3000 switches to the local mode regardless of the local lockout condition The REMOTE indicator is turned OFF Key operations are enabled Settings entered in remote mode are retained even when the WT3000 switches to local mode Note The RS 232 interface cannot be used simultaneously with other communication interfaces GP IB USB or Ethernet RS 232 Interface Specifications Electrical characteristics Connection Transmission mode Synchronization Baud rate Start bit Data length Parity Stop bit Connector Hardware handshaking Software handshaking Received buffer length Conforms to EIA 574 9 pin EIA 232 RS 232 Point to point Full duplex Start stop synchronization 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 Fixed to 1 bit 7 or 8 bits Even odd or no parity 1 or 2 bits DELC J9PAF 13L6 JAE or equivalent Select whether to fix the CA and CB signals to TRUE or use the signals for flow control Select whether to use the X ON and X OFF signals to control the transmission data or both transmission and reception data X ON ASCII 11H X OFF ASCII 13H 256 bytes 2 2 IM 760301 17E 2 3 Connection via the RS 232 Interface When you connect the WT3000 to a PC you must set the WT3000 so that the handshaking method baud rate data format and other parameters match those on the PC side For
266. nction element and harmonic order of numeric data or queries the current setting 6 95 NUMeric NORMal NUMber Sets the number of the numeric data that is transmitted by s NUMeric NORMal VALue or queries the current setting 6 95 NUMeric NORMal PRESet Presets the output item pattern of numeric data 6 95 NUMeric NORMal VALue Queries the numeric data 6 96 RATE Group RATE Sets the data update rate or queries the current setting 6 102 STATus Group STATus Queries all settings related to the communication status function 6 103 STATus CONDition Queries the contents of the condition register 6 103 STATus EESE Sets the extended event enable register or queries the current setting 6 103 STATus EESR Queries the content of the extended event register and clears the register 6 103 STATus ERRor Queries the error code and message information top of the error queue 6 103 STATus FILTer lt x gt Sets the transition filter or queries the current setting 6 103 STATus QENable Sets whether to store messages other than errors to the error queue ON OFF or queries the current setting 6 103 STATus QMESsage Sets whether to attach message information to the response to the STATus ERRor query or queries the current setting 6 103 STATus SPOL1 Executes serial polling 6 104 STORe Group STORe Queries all settings related to store and recall 6 105 STORe COUNt Sets the store count or queries the current sett
267. nction Sets constant N for the equation used to compute the long term flicker value or queries the current setting Syntax FLICker PLT NVALue lt NRf gt FLICker PLT NVALue lt NRf gt 1 to 99 constant N FLICKER PLT NVALUE 12 FLICKER PLT NVALUE gt FLICKER PLT NVALUE 12 Example FLICker PLT STATe Function Turns ON OFF judgment of the long term flicker value Plt or queries the current setting Syntax FLICker PLT STATe lt Boolean gt FLICker PLT STATe Example FLICKER PLT STATE ON FLICKER PLT STATE gt FLICKER PLT STATE 1 FLICker PST Function Queries all settings related to the short term flicker value Pst Syntax FLICker PST Example FLICKER PST gt FLICKER PST STATE 1 LIMIT 1 00 FLICker PST LIMit Function Sets the limit for the short term flicker value or queries the current setting Syntax FLICker PST LIMit lt NRf gt FLICker PST LIMit lt NRf gt 0 10 to 99 99 limit Example FLICKER PST LIMIT 1 00 FLICKER PST LIMIT gt FLICKER PST LIMIT 1 00 FLICker PST STATe Function Turns ON OFF judgment of the short term flicker value Pst or queries the current setting Syntax FLICker PST STATe lt Boolean gt FLICker PST STATe Example FLICKER PST STATE ON FLICKER PST STATE gt FLICKER PST STATE 1 FLICker RESet Function Resets measured flicker data Syntax FLICker RESet Example FLICKER RESET FLICker STARt Functi
268. nction gt lt Element gt CBCycle DISPlay ITEM lt x gt x 1 to 5 item number Function FREQ U 1 P S Q LAMBda SPEed TORQue PM Element lt NRf gt SIGMA SIGMB lt NRf gt 1 to 4 CBCYCLE DISPLAY ITEM1 U 1 CBCYCLE DISPLAY ITEM1 gt CBCYCLE DISPLAY ITEM1 U 1 When Function FREQ SPEed TORQue PM Element need not be specified Element is omitted from the response When Element is omitted Element 1 is set SPEed TORQue PM is only available with the motor version You can make the same setting or query with the DISPlay CBCycle ITEM x command DISPlay PAGE Sets the number of the displayed page of the Cycle by Cycle display or queries the current setting CBCycle DISPlay PAGE lt NRf gt CBCycle DISPlay PAGE lt NRf gt 1 to 150 page number CBCYCLE DISPLAY PAGE 1 CBCYCLE DISPLAY PAGE gt CBCYCLE DISPLAY PAGE 1 When a page number is set the cursor moves to the top of the specified page You can make the same setting or query with the DISPlay CBCycle CURSor command IM 760301 17E 6 21 6 4 CBCycle FILTer Function Queries all settings related to the filter for Cycle by Cycle measurement Syntax CBCycle FILTer Example CBCYCLE FILTER gt CBCYCLE FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 50 0E 03 ELEMENT2 50 0E 03 ELEMENT3 50 0E
269. nd DCL or SDC is received When the instrument is power cycled The output queue cannot be emptied using the CLS command To see whether the output queue is empty or not check bit 4 MAV of the status byte D1 Di D2 D1 Error Queue The error queue stores the error No and message when an error occurs For example if the controller sends an incorrect program message the error number and message 113 Undefined header are stored in the error queue when the error is displayed The contents of the error queue can be read using the STATus ERRor query As with the output queue the messages are read from the oldest ones first When the error queue overflows the last message is replaced by the message 350 Queue overflow The error queue is emptied in the following cases in addition to when read out is performed When a CLS command is received When the instrument is power cycled suodey snieis see whether the error queue is empty not check bit 2 EAV of the status byte IM 760301 17E 7 9 Appendix 1 ASCII Character Codes The following table shows the ASCII character codes 1 2 3 4 5 0 20 40 0 60 16 100 0 120 16 140 0 160 16 10 16 20 32 30 48 40 64 50 80 60 96 70 112 1 21 41 1 61 17 101 1 121 17 141 11161 17 1 4 11 17 21
270. ned function or queries the current setting 6 79 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt UNIT Sets the unit to be added to the computation result of the user defined function or queries the current setting 6 79 IM 760301 17E 6 11 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page MEASure MHOLd Enables ON or Disables OFF MAX HOLD function used in the user defined function or queries the current setting 6 79 MEASure PC Queries all settings related to the computation of Pc Corrected Power 6 79 MEASure PC IEC Sets the equation used to compute Pc Corrected Power or queries the current setting 6 80 MEASure PC P lt x gt Sets the parameter used to compute Pc Corrected Power or queries the current setting 6 80 MEASure PHASe Sets the display format of the phase difference or queries the current setting 6 80 MEASure SAMPling Sets the sampling frequency or queries the current setting 6 80 MEASure SQFormula Sets the equation used to compute S apparent power and Q reactive power or queries the current setting 6 80 MEASure SYNChronize Sets the synchronized measurement mode or queries the current setting 6 80 MOTor Group MOTor Queries all settings related to the motor evaluation function 6 81 MOTor FILTer Queries all settings related to the input filter 6 81 MOTor FILTer LINE Sets the line filter or queries the current setting 6 81 MOTor PM Queries all settings relat
271. ned header Check the header Chapter 6 114 Header suffix out of range Check the header Chapter 6 120 Numeric data error A number is required in the lt NRf gt form 5 5 123 Exponent too large Use a smaller exponent for lt NR3 gt format 5 5 chapter 6 124 Too many digits The value must be less than equal to 255 digits 5 5 chapter 6 128 Numeric data not allowed Enter in a format other than lt NRf gt format 5 5 chapter 6 131 Invalid suffix Check the unit of the lt Voltage gt lt Current gt 5 5 lt Time gt and lt Frequency gt 134 Suffix too long Check the unit of the lt Voltage gt lt Current gt 5 5 lt Time gt and lt Frequency gt 138 Suffix not allowed No units are allowed other than lt Voltage gt 5 5 lt Current gt lt Time gt and lt Frequency gt 141 Invalid character data Select character data from the selections Chapter 6 available in 144 Character data too long Check the spelling of the character strings in Chapter 6 Toss ees vsus 148 Character data not allowed Write in a data form other than Chapter 6 150 String data error Enclose String in double quotation or single 5 6 quotation marks 151 Invalid string data String is too long or contains characters which Chapter 6 cannot be used 158 String data not allowed Enter in a data format other than String Chapter 6 App 2 IM 760301 17E Appendix 2 Error Messages Code Messages Correctiv
272. nics IEC OBJect ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB HARMonics IEC OBJect x 1 to 4 element Example HARMONICS IEC OBJECT ELEMENTI HARMONICS IEC OBJECT gt HARMONICS IEC OBJECT ELEMENT1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option HARMonics IEC UGRouping IGRouping Function Sets the voltage current grouping of the IEC harmonic measurement or queries the current setting Syntax HARMonics IEC UGRouping IGRouping OFF 1 2 HARMonics IEC UGRouping IGRouping Example HARMONICS IEC UGROUPING OFF HARMONICS IEC UGROUPING gt HARMONICS IEC UGROUPING OFF Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option For details on the grouping corresponding to OFF see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E HARMonics ORDer Function Sets the maximum and minimum orders to be measured or queries the current setting Syntax HARMonics ORDer lt NRf gt lt NRf gt HARMonics ORDer 1st lt NRf gt 0 or 1 minimum order to be measured 2nd lt NRf gt 1 to 100 maximum order to be measured Example HARMONICS ORDER 1 100 HARMONICS ORDER gt HARMONICS ORDER 1 100 IM 760301 17E 6 57 6 10 HARMonics Group HARMonics PLLSource Function Sets the PLL source or queries t
273. nquiries as MOTOR SET SHIFT SCALING on the front panel is used However the commands in this group are valid only on the motor version MV MOTor Function Queries all settings related to the motor evaluation function Syntax MOTor Example gt MOTOR SPEED TYPE ANALOG RANGE 20 0E 00 AUTO 0 SCALING 1 0000 UNIT rpm MOTOR TORQUE TYPE ANALOG RANGE 20 0 00 AUTO 0 SCALING 1 0000 UNIT Nm MOTOR PM SCALING 1 0000 UNIT W MOTOR FILTER LINE OFF MOTOR SYNCHRONIZE NONE POLE 2 SSPEED 11 MOTor FILTer Function Queries all settings related to the input filter Syntax MOTor FILTer Example MOTOR FILTER gt MOTOR FILTER LINE OFF MOTor FILTer LINE Function Sets the line filter or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor FILTer LINE OFF Frequency MOTor FILTer LINE OFF Line filter OFF Frequency 100 Hz 50 kHz line filter ON cutoff frequency Example MOTOR FILTER LINE OFF MOTOR FILTER LINE gt MOTOR FILTER LINE OFF MOTor PM Function Queries all settings related to the motor output Pm Syntax MOTor PM Example gt MOTOR PM SCALING 1 0000 UNIT W MOTor PM SCALing Function Sets the scaling factor used for motor output computation or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor PM SCALing lt NRf gt MOTor PM SCALing lt NRf gt 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example MOTOR PM SCALING 1 MOTOR PM SCALING gt
274. nt setting 6 39 DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing Queries all settings related to the scaling of the trend 6 39 DISPlay TRENd lt gt SCALing MODE Sets the scaling mode of the trend or queries the current setting 6 40 DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing VALue Sets the upper and lower limits of the manual scaling of the trend or queries the current setting 6 40 DISPlay TRENd TDIV Sets the horizontal axis T div of the trend or queries the current setting 6 40 DISPlay TRENd T x Turns ON OFF the trend or queries the current setting 6 40 DISPlay VECTor Queries all settings related to the vector display 6 40 DISPlay VECTor NUMeric Turns ON OFF the numeric data display for the vector display or queries the current setting 6 40 3 DISPlay VECTor OBJect Sets the wiring unit to be displayed during vector display or queries the 3 current setting 6 40 S DISPlay VECTor UMAG IMAG Sets the zoom factor for the vector display or queries the current setting 6 41 9 DISPlay WAVE Queries all settings related to the waveform display 6 41 S DISPlay WAVE ALL Collectively turns ON OFF all waveform displays 6 41 2 DISPlay WAVE FORMat Sets the display format of the waveform or queries the current setting 6 41 3 DISPlay WAVE GRATicule Sets the graticule grid type or queries the current setting 6 41 i DISPlay WAVE INTerpolate Sets the interpolation method of the waveform or queries the current setting 6 4
275. nter the local mode in which key operations are enabled W T 3 00 0 anarvzen EH ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE 6 0 4 n Em c9 r1 71 CODO auro MODE 0 DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Ls a wave LOCAL sane LCD amp m sms muse usse mco pess MISC key LL Press this key to configure communications BS a H 2 o 5 amp 3 o 5 o o E o 2 Rear Panel Ethernet port 100BASE TX Port used to connect to the controller PC via the network or by a one to one connection For the connection procedure see section 5 1 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E MAX Tama O aeu n On A A
276. o remote mode When Switching from Remote to Local Mode Pressing the LOCAL key when the WT3000 is in the remote mode causes the instrument to switch to the local mode However this is not possible when the COMMunicate LOCKout ON command is received from the PC while Local Lockout mode is active Local mode is activated when the COMMunicate REMote OFF command is received regardless of Local Lockout The REMOTE indicator is turned OFF Key operations are enabled Settings entered in remote mode are retained even when the WT3000 switches to local mode Note The USB interface cannot be used simultaneously with other communication interfaces GP IB RS 232 and Ethernet USB Interface Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to USB Rev 1 1 Connector Type B connector receptacle Number of ports 1 Power supply Self powered PC system supported controller such as a PC running Windows 98 SE Windows Me Windows 2000 or Windows XP that is equipped with a USB port as standard a separate device driver is required for the connection with a PC IM 760301 17E 3 3 Connection the USB Interface Connector and Signal Names 2 1 pA 3 4 Pin No Signal Name 1 VBus 45V 2 Data 3 D Data 4 GND Ground Precautions to Be Taken When Making Connections Connect the USB cable b
277. o the commands in this group COMMunicate Function Queries all settings related to communications Syntax COMMunicate Example COMMUNICATE gt COMMUNICATE HEADER 1 OPSE 96 OVERLAP 96 VERBOSE 1 COMMunicate HEADer Function Sets whether to add a header to the response to a query example DISPLAY MODE NUMERIC or not add the header example NUMERIC Syntax COMMunicate HEADer Boolean COMMunicate HEADer Example COMMUNICATE HEADER ON COMMUNICATE HEADER gt COMMUNICATE HEADER 1 COMMunicate LOCKout Function Sets or clears local lockout Syntax COMMunicate LOCKout lt Boolean gt COMMunicate LOCKout Example COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT gt COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT 1 Description This command is dedicated to the optional RS 232 USB or Ethernet interface An interface message is available for the GP IB interface COMMunicate OPSE Operation Pending Status Enable register Function Sets the overlap command that is used by the OPC OPC and WAI commands or queries the current setting Syntax COMMunicate OPSE lt Register gt COMMunicate OPSR Operation Pending Status Register Function Queries the value of the operation pending status register COMMunicate OPSR Example COMMUNICATE OPSR gt 0 Description For details on the operation pending status register see the figure for the COMMunicate WAIT command page 6 25 Synt
278. of ITEM and Formula Compensation and Measure menus of WIRING on the front panel are used MEASure Function Syntax Example Queries all settings related to the computation MEASure MEASURE MEASURE AVERAGING STATE 0 TYPE EXPONENT COUNT 2 MEASURE FREQUENCY 1 01 ITEM2 I1 MEASURE SAMPLING AUTO SQFORMULA TYPE1 PC IEC 1976 P1 0 5000 2 0 5000 MEASURE EFFICIENCY ETA1 2 PA PB ETA3 OFF ETA4 OFF UDEF1 P1 UDEF2 P1 MEASURE FUNCTIONI STATE 0 EXPRESSION UMN E1 UNIT V MEASURE FUNCTION2 STATE 0 EXPRESSION UMN E2 UNIT V MEASURE FUNCTION3 STATE 0 EXPRESSION UMN E3 UNIT V MEASURE FUNCTION4 STATE 0 EXPRESSION UMN E4 UNIT V MEASURE FUNCTIONS STATE 0 EXPRESSION U E1 ORT UNIT V MEASURE FUNCTION6 STATE 0 EXPRESSION I E1 ORT UNIT A MEASURE FUNCTION7 STATE 0 EXPRESSION U E1 ORT UNIT V MEASURE FUNCTIONS STATE 0 EXPRESSION I E1 ORT UNIT A MEASURE FUNCTIONS STATE 0 EXPRESSION U E1 ORT UNIT V MEASURE FUNCTION10 STATE 0 EXPRESSION I E1 ORT UNIT A MEASURE FUNCTION11 STATE 0 EXPRESSION U E1 ORT UNIT V MEASURE FUNCTION12 STATE 0 EXPRESSION I E1 ORT UNIT A MEASURE FUNCTION13 STATE 0 EXPRESSION U E1 ORT UNIT V MEASURE FUNCTION14 STATE 0 EXPRESSION I E1 ORT UNIT 15 STATE 0 EXPRESSION U E1 ORT UNIT V MEASURE FUNCTION16 STATE 0 EXPRE
279. on TIME ASCII lt NR1 gt format units of seconds example for 1 hour 1 00 00 3600 FLOAT IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format in units of seconds example for 1 hour 1 00 00 0x45610000 Peakinformation PKU PKSPeed PKTorque for Cycle by Cycle measurement ASCII FLOAT lt NR1 gt format IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format No peak 0 0 00000000 0 Positive peak f d Ox3F800000 1 Negative peak 127 0 40000000 2 Positive and negative peak a 0x40400000 3 Note If the main unit s peak over detection function makes a detection during the measurement period 4 is added to the numbers above No items NONE ASCII NAN Not A Number FLOAT Ox7E951BEE 9 91 37 Other than above ASCII NR3 format mantissa maximum significant digits 6 exponent 2 digits example 123 456 45E 00 FLOAT IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format 2 Error Data Data does not exist display ASCII NAN Not Number FLOAT 0x7E951BEE 9 91E 37 Overrange display O L Overflow display O F Data over display Error ASCII INF INFinity FLOAT Ox7E94F56A 9 9E 37 Note For the 180 Lead Lag display of the phase difference PHI of elements 1 to 4 the values are output in the range between 180 000 to 180 000 with lead D and lag
280. on Starts flicker measurement Syntax FLICker STARt Example FLICKER START FLICker STATe Function Queries the status of flicker measurement Syntax FLICker STATe Example FLICKER STATE gt RESET Description The contents of the response as follows 3 RESet Reset status 5 INITialize Initializing 9 READy Measurement start wait state o STARt Measuring 2 COMPlete Measurement stopped judgment S results displayed 3 4 FLICker UN o Function Queries all settings related to rated voltage Un Syntax FLICker UN Example FLICKER UN gt FLICKER UN MODE AUTO VALUE 230 00 FLICker UN MODE Function Sets the assignment method for rated voltage Un or queries the current setting Syntax FLICker UN MODE AUTO SET FLICker UN MODE AUTO Use the voltage value measured upon start of measurement SET Use the predefined value FLICker UN VALue Example FLICKER UN MODE AUTO FLICKER UN MODE gt FLICKER UN MODE AUTO IM 760301 17E 6 55 6 9 FLICker Group FLICker UN VALue Function Sets the predefined value of rated voltage Un or queries the current setting Syntax FLICker UN VALue lt NRf gt FLICker UN VALue lt NRf gt 0 01 to 999 99 predefined value V Example FLICKER UN VALUE 230 00 FLICKER UN VALUE gt FLICKER UN VALUE 230 00 6 56 IM 760301 17E 6 10 HARMonics Group The commands in this group deal with harmonic measurement You can make
281. on all devices on the bus to serial polling mode The controller polls the devices in order SPD Serial Poll Disable Clears the serial polling mode of the talker function on all devices on the bus PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure is not supported What Is an Interface Message Interface messages are also referred to as interface commands or bus commands They are commands that are issued by the controller They are classified as follows Uni Line Messages A single control line is used to transmit uni line messages The following three types are available IFC Interface Clear REN Remote Enable DY Identify 1 6 IM 760301 17E 1 6 Responses to Interface Messages Multi Line Messages Eight data lines are used to transmit multi line messages The messages are classified as follows Address Commands These commands are valid when the instrument is designated as a listener or as a talker The following five types are available Commands that are valid on an instrument that is designated as a listener GTL Go To Local SDC Selected Device Clear PPC Parallel Poll Configure GET Group Execute Trigger Commands that are valid on an instrument that is designated as a talker TCT Take Control Universal Commands These commands are valid on all instruments regardless of the listener and talker designations The following five types are available In addition listener address talker address
282. perate as overlap commands or queries the current setting 6 24 COMMunicate REMote Sets remote or local 6 24 COMMunicate STATus Queries line specific status 6 25 COMMunicate VERBose Sets the response messages to full form or abbreviated form or queries the current setting 6 25 COMMunicate WAIT Waits for a specified extended event 6 25 COMMunicate WAIT Creates the response that is returned when the specified event occurs 6 25 CURSor Group CURSor Queries all settings related to the cursor measurement 6 26 CURSor BAR Queries all settings related to the cursor measurement of the bar graph display 6 26 CURSor BAR POSition lt x gt Sets the cursor position order on the bar graph display or queries the current setting 6 26 CURSor BAR STATe Turns ON OFF the cursor display on the bar graph or queries the current setting 6 26 CURSor BAR lt gt DY Queries the cursor measurement value on the bar graph display 6 26 CURSor FFT Queries all settings related to the cursor measurement on the FFT waveform display 6 26 CURSor FFT POSition lt x gt Sets the cursor position on the FFT waveform display or queries the current setting 6 26 CURSor FFT STATe Turns ON OFF the cursor display on the FFT waveform display or queries the current setting 6 27 CURSor FFT TRACe lt x gt Sets the cursor target on the FFT waveform display or queries the current setting 6 27 CURSor FFT X lt x gt DX Y lt x g
283. period of time timeout time The available settings are 0 to 3600 or Infinite The default value is Infinite Note To apply new settings the WT3000 must be power cycled IM 760301 17E Chapter5 Before Programming 5 1 Messages Messages and Queries Messages are used to exchange information between the controller and the instrument Messages sent from the controller to the WT3000 are called program messages Program messages that request a response to be sent from the WT3000 to the controller are called queries Messages that the controller receives from the WT3000 are called response messages If a query is included in a program message the WT3000 sends a response message after receiving the program message A single response message is always returned in response to a single program message Program Messages The program message format is shown below lt PMT gt lt Program message unit gt lt Program Message Unit gt A program message consists of one or more program message units each unit corresponds to one command The instrument executes the received commands in order Each program message unit is separated by a semicolon For details regarding the format of the program message unit see the next section Example INPut CFACtor 3 INDependent OFF lt PMT gt Unit Unit lt gt PMT is program message terminator following three types
284. play 6 35 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL Queries all settings related to the numeric display all display 6 35 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL CURSor Sets the cursor position on the numeric display all display or queries the current setting 6 35 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL ORDer Sets the displayed harmonic order on the harmonic measurement function display page of the numeric display all display or queries the current setting 6 36 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL PAGE Sets the page number on the numeric display all display or queries the current setting 6 36 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal FORMat Sets the numeric display format or queries the current setting 6 36 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST Queries all settings related to the numeric display list display 6 36 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST CURSor Sets the cursor position on the numeric display list display or queries the current setting 6 37 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST HEADer Sets the cursor position in the header section on the numeric display list display or queries the current setting 6 37 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ITEM lt x gt Sets the displayed items function and element on the numeric display list display or queries the current setting 6 37 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ORDer Sets the harmonic order cursor position of the data section on the numeric display list display or queries the current setting 6 37 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4
285. queue 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Standard event enable register EE A D 6 2 5 4 o 2 4 E 4 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Standard event register 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Extended event enable register 4 OR A 1 5 14 1 3 12 11 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Extended event register A A A 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Transit filter 15 14 13 12 1110987654321 0 Condition filter 760301 17 7 1 7 1 Status Reports Overview of the Registers and Queues Name Function Writing Reading Status byte Serial polling RQS STB MSS Service request enable register SRE SRE Status byte mask Standard event register ESR Changes in device status Standard event enable register ESE ESE Standard event register mask Extended event register STATus EESR Changes in device status Extended event enable register STATus EESE STATus EESE Extended event register mask Condition register STATus CONDition Current device status Transition filter STATus FILTer lt x gt STATus FILTer lt x gt Conditions that change the extended event register Output queue All query commands Stores a response message to a query Error queue STATus ERRor Stores the error
286. r keys to select Baud Rate Selecting the Data Format Handshaking and Terminator 4 Press the Format data format Rx Tx handshaking or Terminator soft key and select the setting for the respective item Remote Ctrl M Device System Overview RS232 By Baud Rate 19200 Initialize Settinas I 1 Remote Control Format 8 NO 1 Date Time contig Selftest 2 8 IM 760301 17E 2 6 Setting the RS 232 Control Explanation Enter the following settings when using a controller to set information that can be specified through key operation on the WT3000 or when outputting setup parameters or output waveform data to the controller Baud Rate Select the baud rate from the following 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 Data Format Select the combination of data length parity and stop bit from the following 8 NO 1 7 EVEN 1 7 ODD 1 or 7 NO 2 Handshaking Method Select the transmit data control and receive data control from the following NO NO XON XON XON RTS or CTS RTS Terminator Select the terminator from below On the WT3000 menu select the terminator that is used when transmitting data from the WT3000 Use Lf or Cr Lf for the terminator for receiving data on the WT3000 Cr Lf or Cr Lf IM 760301 17E 2 9 uondo 552 54 Chapter3 USB Interface Option 3 4 Names of Parts
287. rd event enable register see page 7 5 ESR standard Event Status Register Function Queries the standard event register and clears the register Syntax ESR Example ESR gt 32 Description A sum of decimal values of each bit is returned You can check what type of events occurred when an SRQ is generated For example if a value of 32 is returned this indicates that the standard event register is set to 00100000 In this case you can see that the SRQ occurred due to a command syntax error Aquery using ESR will clear the contents of the standard event register For details on the standard event register See page 7 5 IDN IDeNtify Function Queries the instrument model Syntax IDN Example IDN gt YOKOGAWA 760304 04 SV 0 F4 01 Description The information is returned in the following form Manufacturer Model Serial No Firmware version Model is in the format model 6 digits element configuration 2 digits version The combination of model and element can be one of the following 760301 01 760302 02 760303 03 760304 04 760301 10 760302 20 760303 30 760304 40 The version name is SV for the standard version and MV for the motor version n actuality Serial No is not returned always 0 6 114 IM 760301 17E 6 24 Common Command Group OPC Function Syntax Example OPeration Complete Sets bit 0 OPC bit of th
288. register If bit 0 of the condition register is 1 the measured data is being updated If itis 0 the measured data can be queried 5 8 IM 760301 17E 5 5 Synchronization with the Controller Using the Extended Event Register The changes in the condition register can be reflected in the extended event register page 7 7 Example STATus FILTerl FALL STATus EESE 1 EESR SRE 8 lt gt Read the response to STATus EESR Loop Wait for a service request NUMeric NORMal VALue lt PMT gt Read the response to NUMeric 1 VALue STATus EESR lt PMT gt Read the response to STATus EESR Return to LOOP STATus FILTerl FALL command sets the transition filter so that bit O FILTer1 of the extended event register is set to 1 when bit 0 of the condition register changes from 1 to 0 The STATus EESE 1 command is used to reflect only bit O of the extended event register to the status byte The STATus EESR command is used to clear the extended event register SRE 8 command is used to generate a service request solely on the cause of the extended event register The NUMeric NORMal VALue command is not executed until a service request is generated Using the COMMunicate WAIT command The CoMMunicate WAIT command halts communications until a specific event is generated Example STATus FILTerl FALL STATus EESR lt PMT gt
289. rement mode display value Example DISPLAY MODE NUMERIC DISPLAY MODE gt DISPLAY MODE NUMERIC Description BAR VECTor NBAR WBAR BTRend selectable only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option MATH FFT WFFT IECHarm are selectable only models with the advanced computation function G6 option CBCycle can only be selected with the Cycle by Cycle function CC option FLICker can only be selected with the flicker measurement function FL option DISPlay NUMeric Function Queries all settings related to the numeric display Syntax DISPlay NUMeric Example DISPLAY NUMERIC gt same as the response to DISPlay NUMeric NORMal DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Function Queries all settings related to the numeric display Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Example Example in which the numeric display format DISPlay NUMeric NORMal FORMat is set to VAL4 4 value display DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL FORMAT VAL4 VAL4 ITEM1 U 1 TOTAL 2 I 1 TOTAL ITEM3 P 1 TOTAL 5 ETA3 ITEM36 ETA4 CURSOR 1 Example in which the numeric display format DISPlay NUMeric 1 is set to ALL all display DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL FORMAT ALL ALL CU
290. ric NORMal VALue or NUMeric LIST VALue all the numeric data at that point can be held internally As long as NUMeric HOLD is ON the numeric data is held even when the numeric data on the screen is updated For example if you wish to retrieve various types of numeric data of each element at the same point do the following NUMeric HOLD ON NUMeric NORMal ITEMI U 1 TOTAL ITEM2 I 1 TOTAL data items of element 1 NUMeric NORMal VALue Receive the numeric data of element 1 NUMeric NORMal ITEMI U 2 TOTAL ITEM2 I 2 TOTAL setthe numeric data items of element 2 NUMeric NORMal VALue Receive the numeric data of element 2 omitted NUMeric NORMal ITEMI U 4 TOTAL ITEM2 I 4 TOTAL setthe numeric data items of element 4 NUMeric NORMal VALue Receive the numeric data of element 4 NUMeric HOLD OFF If ON is specified when NUMeric HOLD is ON the numeric data is cleared once and the most recent numeric data is held internally This method can be used when retrieving numeric data continuously no need to set NUMeric HOLD to OFF each time set the numeric NUMeric LIST Function Queries all settings related to the numeric list data output of harmonic measurement Syntax NUMeric LIST Example NUMERIC LIST gt NUMERIC LIST NUMBER 1 ORDER 100 SELECT ALL ITEM1 U 1 Description This command is valid only on models with
291. ric CBCycle END Sets the output end cycle of the numeric list data output by NUMeric CBCycle VALue or queries the current setting 6 84 NUMeric CBCycle ITEM Sets the numeric list data output items function and element of Cycle by Cycle measurement or queries the current setting 6 84 NUMeric CBCycle STARt Sets the output start cycle of the numeric list data output by NUMeric CBCycle VALue or queries the current setting 6 84 NUMeric CBCycle VALue Queries the numeric list data from Cycle by Cycle measurement 6 85 NUMeric FLICker Queries all settings related to output of numeric data from flicker measurement 6 85 NUMeric FLICker COUNt Queries the number of the measurement within the specified observation period at which flicker measurement stops 6 85 NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion Queries all settings related to output of measured flicker data variable format 6 85 NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion CLEar Clears the output items of measured flicker data variable format 6 86 NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion DELete Deletes the output items of measured flicker data variable format 6 86 NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion ITEM lt x gt Sets output items function element and observation period of measured flicker data variable format or queries the current setting 6 86 NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion NUMber Sets the number of measured flicker data output by NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion VALue or queries the current setting 6 87 NUMeric
292. ries the current setting 6 106 STORe NUMeric Queries all settings related to the storing of numeric data 6 107 NUMeric NORMal Queries all settings related to the stored items of numeric data 6 107 STORe NUMeric NORMal ALL Collectively turns ON OFF the output of all element functions when storing the numeric data 6 107 STORe NUMeric NORMal ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB Turns ON OFF the output of each element XA XB when storing the numeric data 6 107 STORe NUMeric NORMal PRESet x Presets the output ON OFF pattern of the element function for storing the numeric data 6 107 STORe NUMeric NORMal Function Turns ON OFF the output of the element when storing the numeric data or queries the current setting 6 107 STORe RECall Sets the data number to be recalled or queries the current setting 6 108 STORe RTIMe Queries the store reservation time for real time store mode 6 108 STORe RTIMe STARt END Sets the store start stop reservation time for real time store mode or queries the current setting 6 108 STORe SMODe Sets the store mode or queries the current setting 6 108 3 STORe STARt Starts the data store operation 6 108 3 STORe STOP Stops the data store operation 6 108 STORe WAVE Queries all settings related to the storing of waveform display data 6 108 9 STORe WAVE ALL Collectively turns ON OFF the output of all waveforms when storing the S waveform display data
293. ription Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option Ifthe 2nd lt NRf gt is omitted the output items from the start clear number to the last item 32 are cleared NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion DELete Function Deletes the output items of measured flicker data variable format Syntax NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion DELete lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1st lt NRf gt 1 to 32 item number to start deleting 2nd lt NRf gt 1 to 32 item number to stop deleting Example NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION DELETE 1 Deletes ITEM1 and shifts 2 and subsequent items forward NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION DELETE 1 3 Deletes ITEM1 to 3 and shifts ITEM4 and subsequent items forward Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option Output items subsequent to the deleted output items are shifted in order into the deleted items position and NONE is set in the open positions on the end If the 2nd lt NRf gt is omitted only the output item of the start delete number is deleted NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion ITEM lt x gt Function Sets output items function element and observation period of measured flicker data variable format or queries the current setting Syntax NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion lt gt NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Period gt NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion ITEM lt x gt x 1 to 32 item number NONE No output
294. ription This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option FILE SAVE ACQuisition EXECute Function Saves the waveform sampling data to a file Syntax FILE SAVE ACQuisition EXECute Filename Example FILE SAVE ACQUISITION EXECUTE ACQ1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option Specify the file name without the extension This command is an overlap command FILE SAVE ACQuisition TRACe Function Sets the waveform sampling data to be saved to a file or queries the current setting Syntax FILE SAVE ACQuisition TRACe U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue MATH lt x gt FFT lt x gt FILE SAVE ACQuisition TRACe x of U lt x gt lt gt 1 to 4 element x of MATH lt x gt 1 to 2 MATH x of FFT lt x gt 1 or 2 FFT Example FILE SAVE ACQUISITION TRACE 01 FILE SAVE ACQUISITION TRACE gt FILE SAVE ACQUISITION TRACE 01 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option This command is valid when the format of the waveform sampling data to be saved FILE SAVE ACQuisition TYPE is FLOat When it is BINary ASCii all waveform sampling data of which the waveform display is turned ON are saved SPEed TORQue are valid only on the motor version MV FILE SAVE ACQuisition Function Set
295. ronize SIGMA SIGMB 6 71 INPut SYNChronize 6 71 INPut SYNChronize ALL INPut VOLTage AUTO ELEMent lt x gt INPut VOLTage AUTO SIGMA SIGMB 6 71 INPut VOLTage AUTO 2 6 71 1 6 71 INPut VOLTage MODE ELEMent lt x gt 6 72 INPut VOLTage MODE SIGMA SIGMB 6 72 2 6 72 1 INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent lt x gt INPut VOLTage RANGe SIGMA SIGMB INPut VOLTage RANGEC 6 72 INPut VOLTage RANGe ALL eene 6 72 INPutEVOLTage 2 teneis 6 71 INP ut WIRING siue 6 73 6 114 1 760301 17 Index 9 Index 10 IM 760301 17E
296. rument s functions There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group CAL CALibrate Function Executes zero calibration zero level compensation same operation as pressing CAL SHIFT SINGLE and queries the result Syntax CAL Example CAL gt 0 Description If the calibration terminates normally 0 is returned If an error is detected 1 is returned CLS CLear Status Function Clears the standard event register extended event register and error queue Syntax CLS Example CLS Description If the cLS command is located immediately after the program message terminator the output queue is also cleared For details on the register and queue see chapter 7 ESE standard Event Status Enable register Function Sets the standard event enable register or queries the current setting Syntax ESE lt gt ESE lt NRf gt 0 to 255 Example ESE 251 ESE gt 251 Description Specify the value as a sum of decimal values of each bit For example specifying ESE 251 will cause the standard enable register to be set to 11111011 In this case bit 2 of the standard event register is disabled which means that bit 5 ESB of the status byte register is not set to 1 even if a query error occurs The default value is ESE 0 all bits disabled Aquery using ESE Will not clear the contents of the standard event enable register For details on the standa
297. s 6 digits data byte sequence Description The number of bytes of Block data is 2 6 number of data points 1 delimiter For details on Block data see page 5 6 IM 760301 17E 6 65 6 14 INPut Group The commands in this group deal with the measurement condition of the input element You can make the same settings and inquiries as when the keys in the measurement condition setup area area enclosed in light blue SCALING LINE FILTER FREQ FILTER SHIFT LINE FILTER SYNC SOURCE and NULL SHIFT SYNC SOURCE on the front panel are used INPut INPut CFACtor Function Queries all settings related to the input element Function Sets the crest factor or queries the current Syntax INPut setting Example INPUT gt INPUT CFACTOR 3 Syntax INPut CFACtor lt gt WIRING P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 INPut CFACtor INDEPENDENT 0 VOLTAGE RANGE lt NRf gt or 6 ELEMENT1 1 000E 03 Example INPUT CFACTOR 3 ELEMENT2 1 000E 03 INPUT CFACTOR gt INPUT CFACTOR 3 ELEMENT3 1 000E 03 ELEMENT4 1 000E 03 INPUT VOLTAGE INPut CURRent AUTO ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 Function Queries all settings related to the current ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 INPUT measurement VOLTAGE MODE 1 RMS Syntax INPut CURRent ELEMENT2 RMS ELEMENT3 RMS Example INPUT CURRENT gt INPUT CURRENT ELEMENT4 RMS INPUT CURRENT RANGE RANGE ELEMENT1 30 0
298. s the current setting Syntax STORe NUMeric 1 lt Function gt lt Boolean gt STORe NUMeric NORMal Function Function u r P s Q the function selection list 1 of DISPlay group on page 6 44 Example STORE NUMERIC NORMAL U ON STORE NUMERIC NORMAL U gt STORE NUMERIC NORMAL U 1 IM 760301 17E 6 107 6 21 5 STORe RECall Function Sets the data number to be recalled or queries the current setting Syntax STORe RECall lt NRf gt STORe RECall lt NRf gt 1 to 999999 Example STORE RECALL 1 STORE RECALL gt STORE RECALL 1 STORe RTIMe Function Queries the store reservation time for real time store mode Syntax STORe RTIMe Example STORE RTIME STORE RTIME START 2005 1 1 0 0 0 END 2005 1 1 1 0 0 STORe RTIMe STARt END Function Sets the store start stop reservation date time for real time store mode or queries the current setting Syntax STORe RTIMe STARt END lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NR gt lt NR gt lt NR gt lt NRf gt STORe RTIMe STARt END lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 2001 1 1 0 0 0 to 2099 12 31 23 59 59 1st lt NRf gt 2001 to 2099 year 2nd lt NRf gt 1 to 12 month 3rd lt NRf gt 1 to 31 day 4th lt NRf gt 0 to 23 hour 5th lt NRf gt
299. s the flicker measurement method or queries the current setting Syntax FLICker MEASurement FLICker DMAX FLICker MEASurement FLICker Normal flicker measurement DMAX measurement of dmax caused by manual switching Example FLICKER MEASUREMENT FLICKER FLICKER MEASUREMENT gt FLICKER MEASUREMENT FLICKER FLICker MOVe Function Moves the observation period number for measurement of dmax caused by manual switching Syntax FLICker MOVe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 24 observation period number of destination Example FLICKER MOVE 1 Description The command re executes measurement if dmax measurement of certain observation periods is not made correctly This command can be executed with measurement of dmax caused by manual switching FLICker MEASurement DMAX An error occurs if used during normal flicker measurement FLICker MEASurement FLICker FLICker PLT Function Queries all settings related to the long term flicker value Syntax FLICker PLT Example FLICKER PLT gt FLICKER PLT STATE 1 LIMIT 0 65 NVALUE 12 6 54 IM 760301 17E 6 9 FLICker Group FLICker PLT LIMit Function Sets the limit of the long term flicker value Plt or queries the current setting FLICker PLT LIMit lt NRf gt FLICker PLT LIMit lt NRf gt 0 10 to 99 99 limit FLICKER PLT LIMIT 0 65 FLICKER PLT LIMIT gt FLICKER PLT LIMIT 0 65 Syntax Example FLICker PLT NVALue Fu
300. s the format of the waveform sampling data to be saved or queries the current setting Syntax FILE SAVE ACQuisition BINary ASCii FLOat FILE SAVE ACQuisition Example FILE SAVE ACQUISITION TYPE FLOAT FILE SAVE ACQUISITION TYPE gt FILE SAVE ACQUISITION TYPE FLOAT Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option FILE SAVE ANAMing Function Sets whether to automatically name the files to be saved or queries the current setting Syntax FILE SAVE ANAMing lt Boolean gt FILE SAVE ANAMing Example FILE SAVE ANAMING FILE SAVE ANAMING gt FILE SAVE ANAMING 1 FILE SAVE COMMent Function Sets the comment to be added to the file to be saved or queries the current setting Syntax FILE SAVE COMMent String FILE SAVE COMMent lt String gt Up to 25 characters Example FILE SAVE COMMENT CASE1 FILE SAVE COMMENT gt FILE SAVE COMMENT CASE1 6 48 IM 760301 17E 6 8 FILE Group FILE SAVE NUMeric Function Queries all settings related to the saving of numeric data files Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC gt FILE SAVE NUMERIC TYPE ASCII NORMAL ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 ELEMENT4 0 SIGMA 0 SIGMB 0 U 1 1 P 1 S 1 0 1 LAMBDA 1 PHI 1 FU 1 FI 1 UPPEAK 0 UMPEAK 0 IPPEAK 0 IMPEAK 0 CFU 0 0 PC 0 TIME 0 WH 0 WHP 0 WHM 0 AH 0 AHP 0 AHM 0 WS 0 WO
301. see Setting the Ethernet Control in the next section Connecting the WT3000 and the PC For the procedure of connecting the WT3000 to a PC see section 5 1 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E IM 760301 17E 4 3 uondo gt 4 3 Setting the Ethernet Control Procedure A DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT TES SH CAL v l ITEM Form USER wes LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above 9 WOTOR FRED the soft keys SET FILTER mcm in the procedural explanation below the phrase press the M cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 in the User s Manual IM760301 01E MENU Selecting the Ethernet Control 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Remote Control soft key to display the Remote Ctrl menu 3 Press the Device soft key and select Network Only the communication interface selected here is enabled The WT3000 does not accept commands that are transmitted
302. ssage must be received before the next program message can be sent If the next program message is sent before the response message is received in its entirety an error occurs The response message that was not received is discarded Ifthe controller tries to receive a response message when there is none an error occurs If the controller tries to receive a response message before the transmission of the program message is complete an error occurs program message containing multiple message units is sent and the message contains incomplete units the instrument attempts to execute the ones that are believed to be complete However these attempts may not always be successful In addition if the message contains queries the responses may not be returned Deadlock The instrument can store in its buffer program and response messages of length 1024 bytes or more The number of available bytes varies depending on the operating conditions When both the transmit and receive buffers become full at the same time the instrument can no longer continue its communication operation This state is called a deadlock In this case operation can be resumed by discarding the program message Deadlock will not occur if the program message including the lt gt is kept below 1024 bytes Furthermore deadlock never occurs if a program message does not contain a query 5 2 IM 760301 17E 5 2 Commands 5 2 Commands
303. ssion During block data transmission the output queue is expanded according to the size A list of program data elements that can be used in equations and their nesting limitations No equations can be used Syntax of the responses to queries See the example of the commands given in chapter 6 IM 760301 17E App 5 xipueddy H 3 488 2 1992 10 11 12 15 20 Communication between devices that do not follow the response syntax None Size of the response data block 1 to 308922 bytes A list of supported common commands See section 6 24 Common Command Group Device condition after a successful calibration Measurement execution condition The maximum length of block data that can be used for the DDT trigger macro definition Not supported The maximum length of the macro label for defining macros the maximum length of block data that can be used for the macro definition and the process when recursion is used in macro definitions Macro functions are not supported Reply to the IDN query See section 6 24 Common Command Group The size of the storage area for protected user data for PUD and PUD commands PUD and PUD are not supported The length of the RDT and RDT resource names and RDT are not supported The change in the status due to RST LRN and SAV RST See section 6 24 Common Command Group LRN
304. ster is 1 It is also possible to check what type of event has occurred inside the instrument by reading the contents of the standard event register Reading from the Standard Event Register The contents of the standard event register can be read by the ESR command After the register is read it is cleared Clearing the Standard Event Register The standard event register is cleared in the following three cases When the contents of the standard event register are read using the ESR command When cLs Command 15 Received When the instrument is power cycled 7 6 IM 760301 17E 7 4 Extended Event Register Reading the extended event register tells you whether changes in the condition register reflecting internal conditions have occurred A transition filter can be applied which allows you to decide which events are reported to the extended event register FILTer lt x gt gt 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 Condition register 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 7 4 3 1 0 STATus CONDition OVRM 0 0 OVR4 OVR3 OVR2 OVR1 Fov SRB ITG uPD Transition filter 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 76 54321 0 STATus FILTer lt x gt RISE FALL BOTH NEVer yy Y v Y v 15 14 13 12 11 10 lt lt o gt lt lt Extended event register STATus EESR
305. t 1 to 4 lt NRf gt 0 to 7 Example SYSTEM LCD COLOR GRAPH BACKGROUND 0 0 0 SYSTEM LCD COLOR GRAPH BACKGROUND gt SYSTEM LCD COLOR GRAPH BACKGROUND 0 0 0 Description Set the color in the order R G and B This command is valid when the display color mode of graphic items SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh MODE is set to USER SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh MODE Function Sets the display color mode of the graphic items or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh MODE DEFault USER SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh MODE Example SYSTEM LCD COLOR GRAPH MODE DEFAULT SYSTEM LCD COLOR GRAPH MODE gt SYSTEM LCD COLOR GRAPH MODE DEFAULT 6 110 IM 760301 17E 6 22 5 5 SYSTem LCD COLor TEXT Function Queries all settings related to the display colors of the text items Syntax SYSTem LCD COLor TEXT Example SYSTEM LCD COLOR TEXT gt SYSTEM LCD COLOR TEXT MODE USER LETTER 7 7 7 BACKGROUND 2 2 6 BOX 0 0 7 SUB 3 3 3 SELECTED 0 4 7 SYSTem LCD COLor TEXT LETTer BACKground BOX SUB SELected Function Sets the display color of the text Menu Fore menu background Menu Back selected menu Select Box pop up menu Sub Menu selected key Selected Key or queries the current setting Syntax SYSTem LCD COLor TEXT LETTer BACKground BOX SUB SELected lt gt lt gt lt gt SYSTe
306. t DISPLAY WAVE TLABEL 0 DISPlay WAVE TRIGger Function Syntax Example Queries all settings related to the trigger DISPlay WAVE TRIGger DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER gt DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER MODE AUTO SOURCE U1 SLOPE RISE LEVEL 0 0 DISPlay WAVE TRIGger LEVel Function Syntax Example Sets the trigger level or queries the current setting DISPlay WAVE TRIGger LEVel lt NRf gt DISPlay WAVE TRIGger LEVel lt NRf gt 100 0 to 100 0 96 The resolution is 0 1 DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER LEVEL 0 DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER LEVEL gt DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER LEVEL 0 0 Description Set the value in terms of a percentage of the full scale value displayed on the screen 6 42 IM 760301 17E 6 7 DISPlay Group DISPlay WAVE TRIGger MODE Function Sets the trigger mode or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay WAVE TRIGger MODE AUTO NORMal DISPlay WAVE TRIGger MODE Example DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER MODE AUTO DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER MODE gt DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER MODE AUTO DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SLOPe Function Sets the trigger slope or queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SLOPe RISE FALL BOTH DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SLOPe Example DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER SLOPE RISE DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER SLOPE gt DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER SLOPE RISE DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SOURCe Function Sets the trigger source or queries the current setting Syntax
307. t lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 0 10 to 99 59 59 1st lt NRf gt 0 to 99 hour 2nd lt NRf gt 0 to 59 minute 3rd lt NRf gt 0 to 59 second HCOPY AUTO INTERVAL 0 0 10 HCOPY AUTO INTERVAL gt HCOPY AUTO INTERVAL 0 0 10 Syntax Example HCOPy AUTO STARt END Function Syntax Example Description Sets the start stop reservation time of the auto print or queries the current setting HCOPy AUTO STARt END lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt HCOPy AUTO STARt END lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 2001 1 1 0 0 0 to 2099 12 31 23 59 59 1st lt NRf gt 2001 to 2099 year 2nd lt NRf gt 1 to 12 month 3rd lt NRf gt 1 to 31 day 4th lt NRf gt 0 to 23 hour 5th lt NRf gt 0 to 59 minute 6th lt NRf gt 0 to 59 second HCOPY AUTO START 2005 1 1 0 0 0 HCOPY AUTO START gt HCOPY AUTO START 2005 1 1 0 0 0 This setting is valid when the synchronization mode HCOPy AUTO SYNChronize is set to timer synchronized printing HCOPy AUTO STATe Function Syntax Example Turns ON OFF the auto print or queries the current setting HCOPy AUTO STATe Boolean HCOPy AUTO STATe HCOPY AUTO STATE ON HCOPY AUTO STATE gt HCOPY AUTO STATE 1
308. t DY Queries the cursor measurement value on the FFT waveform display 6 27 CURSor TRENd Queries all settings related to the cursor measurement of the trend display 6 27 CURSor TRENd POSition lt x gt Sets the cursor position on the trend or queries the current setting 6 27 CURSor TRENd STATe Turns ON OFF the cursor display on the trend display or queries the current setting 6 27 CURSor TRENd TRACe lt x gt Sets the cursor target on the trend or queries the current setting 6 27 CURSor TRENd X lt x gt lt gt DY Queries the cursor measurement value on the trend display 6 27 IM 760301 17E 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CURSor WAVE Queries all settings related to the cursor measurement on the waveform display 6 28 CURSor WAVE PATH Sets the cursor path on the waveform display or queries the current setting 6 28 CURSor WAVE POSition lt x gt Sets the cursor position on the waveform display or queries the current setting 6 28 CURSor WAVE STATe Turns ON OFF the cursor display on the waveform display or queries the current setting 6 28 CURSor WAVE TRACe lt x gt Sets the cursor target on the waveform display or queries the current setting 6 28 CURSor WAVE X lt x gt DX PERDt lt gt DY Queries the cursor measurement value on the waveform display 6 28 DISPlay Group DISPlay Queries all settings related to the screen display 6 29
309. ta of all points are output as 0 0x00000000 WAVeform SRATe Function Queries the sample rate of the retrieved waveform Syntax WAVeform SRATe Example WAVEFORM SRATE gt 200 000E 03 WAVeform STARt Function Sets the output start point of the waveform display data that is transmitted by WAVeform SEND or queries the current setting Syntax WAVeform STARt lt gt WAVeform STARt lt NRf gt 0 to 1001 Example WAVEFORM START 0 WAVEFORM START gt WAVEFORM START 0 WAVe form TRACe Function Sets the target waveform for WAVeform SEND or queries the current setting Syntax WAVeform TRACe U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue MATH lt x gt WAVeform TRACe x of U lt x gt lt gt 1 to 4 element x of MATH lt x gt 1 to 2 MATH Example WAVEFORM TRACE 01 WAVEFORM TRACE gt WAVEFORM TRACE 01 Description SPEed TORQue are valid only on the motor version MV WAVeform TRIGger Function Queries the trigger position of the retrieved waveform Syntax WAVeform TRIGger Example WAVEFORM TRIGGER gt 0 Description Since the trigger position is always at the beginning of the waveform display data 0 is returned IM 760301 17E 6 113 6 24 Command Group commands the common group defined in the 488 2 1992 and are independent of the inst
310. tails on the SRE command see chapter 6 IM 760301 17E 7 3 suodey snieis 7 2 Status Byte Operation of the Status Byte A service request is issued when bit 6 of the status byte becomes 1 Bit 6 is set to 1 when any of the other bits becomes a 1 when the corresponding bit of the service request enable register is also set to 1 For example if an event occurs and any of the bits of the logical AND of the standard event register and the corresponding enable register becomes a 1 then bit 5 ESB is set to 1 In this case if bit 5 of the service request enable register is 1 bit 6 MSS is set to 1 thus requesting service from the controller It is also possible to check what type of event has occurred by reading the contents of the status byte Reading from the Status Byte The following two methods are provided for reading the status byte Inquiry Using the STB Query Making an inquiry using the STB query sets bit 6 to MSS This causes the MSS to be read After completion of the read out none of the bits in the status byte will be cleared Serial Polling Execution of a serial polling changes bit 6 to RQS This causes RQS to be read After completion of the read out only RQS is cleared It is not possible to read MSS using serial polling Clearing the Status Byte No method is provided for forcibly clearing all the bits in the status byte The bits that are cleared for each operation are shown below When a Query
311. ted Error in Communication Query 400 to 499 Code Messages Corrective Action Page 410 Query INTERRUPTED Check transmission reception order 5 2 420 Query UNTERMINATED Check transmission reception order 5 2 430 Query DEADLOCKED Limit the length of the program message including 5 2 lt PMT gt to 1024 bytes or less 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite not specify a query after the or OPT response command Error in System Operation 912 to 914 Code Messages Corrective Action Page 912 Fatal error in Communication driver Servicing required 760301 17 3 xipueddy Appendix 2 Error Messages Warning 5 Code Messages Corrective Action Page 5 OPC exists in message Place the OPC OPC command at the end of the program message Other Errors 350 390 Code Messages Corrective Action Page 350 Queue overflow Read the error queue 7 9 390 Overrun error RS 232 only Lower the baud rate Note Code 350 indicates overflow of error queue This code is returned as a response to the STATus ERRor query it does not appear on the screen App 4 IM 760301 17E Appendix 3 IEEE 488 2 1992 The GP IB interface of the instrument conforms to the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard This standard specifies that the following 23 points be stated in the document This section describes these points 1 2 Of the IEEE 488
312. the MSS bit itself and therefore is ignored The default value is SRE 0 all bits disabled Aquery using SRE will not clear the contents of the service request enable register For details on the service request enable register see page 7 3 IM 760301 17E 6 115 6 24 5 STatus Byte Function Syntax Example Description Queries the status byte register STB STB gt 4 The sum of the bits is returned as a decimal value Since the register is read without executing serial polling bit 6 is a MSS bit not RQS For example if a value of 4 is returned this indicates that the status byte register is set to 00000100 In this case you can see that the error queue is not empty an error occurred Aquery using STB will not clear the contents of the status byte register For details on the status byte register see page 7 3 TRG TRiGger Function Syntax Example Description Executes single measurement the same operation as when SINGLE is pressed TRG TRG The multi line message GET Group Execute Trigger also performs the same operation as this command TST TeST Function Syntax Example Description Performs a self test and queries the result TST TST gt 0 The self test involves internal memory tests 0 is returned if the se
313. the controller Naturally the full form of the header can also be used For this the CoMMunicate VERBose command is used The sections enclosed by braces 11 are also omitted in the abbreviated form 5 4 IM 760301 17E 5 4 Data 5 4 Data Data A data section comes after the header A space must be included between the header and the data The data contains conditions and values Data is classified as below Data Description lt Decimal gt A value expressed as a decimal number Example VT ratio setting gt INPUt SCALing VT ELEMent1 100 lt Voltage gt lt Current gt A physical value lt Time gt lt Frequency gt Example Voltage range setting gt INPUt VOLTage RANGE ELEMent1 100V lt Register gt Register value expressed as binary octal decimal or hexadecimal Example Extended event register value gt STATUS EESE HFE lt Character Data gt Predefined character string mnemonic Can be selected from Example Trigger mode selection gt DISPlay WAVE TRIGger AUTO NORMa1 Indicates ON and OFF Set using ON OFF or a value Example Data hold ON gt HOLD ON lt Boolean gt lt String data gt An arbitrary character string Example User defined function gt MEASure FUNCtion1 EXPRession URMS E1 Indicates a file name Example Save file name gt FILE SAVE SETup EXECute CASE1 Arbitrary 8 bit dat
314. the numeric data to be saved or queries the current setting Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric TYPE ASCii FLOat FILE SAVE NUMeric Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC TYPE ASCII FILE SAVE NUMERIC TYPE gt FILE SAVE NUMERIC TYPE ASCII FILE SAVE SETup EXECute Function Saves of the setup parameter file Syntax FILE SAVE SETup EXECute lt Filename gt Example FILE SAVE SETUP EXECUTE SETUP1 Description Specify the file name without the extension This command is an overlap command FILE SAVE WAVE Function Queries all settings related to the saving of waveform display data files Syntax FILE SAVE WAVE Example FILE SAVE WAVE gt FILE SAVE WAVE TYPE BINARY 6 50 IM 760301 17E 6 8 FILE Group FILE SAVE WAVE EXECute Function Executes the saving of the waveform display data file Syntax FILE SAVE WAVE EXECute lt Filename gt Example FILE SAVE WAVE EXECUTE WAVE1 Description Specify the file name without the extension This command is an overlap command FILE SAVE WAVE TRACe Function Sets the waveform to be saved or queries the current setting Syntax FILE SAVE WAVE TRACe U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue MATH lt x gt FILE SAVE WAVE TRACe x of U lt x gt lt gt 1 to 4 element lt x gt of MATH lt x gt 1 to 2 MATH Example FILE SAVE WAVE TRACE U1 FILE SAVE WAVE TRACE gt FILE SAVE WAVE TRACE 01 Descriptio
315. the same settings and inquiries as when the HRM SET on the front panel is used However the commands in this group are valid only when the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option is installed HARMonics Function Queries all settings related to harmonic measurement Syntax HARMonics Example HARMONICS gt HARMONICS FBAND NORMAL PLLSOURCE 01 ORDER 1 100 THD TOTAL OBJECT ELEMENT1 UGROUPING OFF IGROUPING OFF HARMONICS PLLWARNING STATE 1 HARMonics FBANd Function Sets the frequency bandwidth of the harmonic measurement or queries the current setting Syntax HARMonics FBANd 1 WIDE HARMonics FBANd Example HARMONICS FBAND NORMAL HARMONICS FBAND gt HARMONICS FBAND NORMAL Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option For details on the frequency bandwidth corresponding to NORMal1 WIDE see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E HARMonics IEC Function Queries all settings related to IEC harmonic measurement Syntax HARMonics IEC Example HARMONICS IEC gt HARMONICS IEC OBJECT ELEMENT1 UGROUPING OFF IGROUPING OFF Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option HARMonics IEC OBJect Function Sets the IEC harmonic measurement target or queries the current setting Syntax HARMo
316. the synchronization source used to compute the rotating speed and torque or queries the current setting 6 82 MOTor TORQue Queries all settings related to torque 6 82 MOTor TORQue AUTO Turns ON OFF the voltage auto range of the torque signal input analog input format or queries the current setting 6 83 MOTor TORQue PRANge Sets the range of the torque pulse input format or queries the current setting 6 83 MOTor TORQue RANGe Sets the voltage range of the torque signal input analog input format or queries the current setting 6 83 MOTor TORQue RATE Queries all settings related to the rated value of the torque signal pulse input format 6 83 MOTor TORQue RATE UPPer LOWer Sets the rated value upper limit lower limit of the torque signal pulse input format or queries the current setting 6 83 MOTor TORQue SCALing Sets the scaling factor for torque computation or queries the current setting 6 83 MOTor TORQue TYPE Sets the input type of the torque signal input or queries the current setting 6 83 6 12 IM 760301 17E 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page MOTor TORQue UNIT Sets the unit to be added to the torque computation result or queries the current setting 6 83 NUMeric Group NUMeric Queries all settings related to the numeric data output 6 84 NUMeric CBCycle Queries all settings related to output of numeric list data of Cycle by Cycle measurement 6 84 NUMe
317. thin the specified observation period at which flicker measurement stops Syntax NUMeric FLICker COUNt Example NUMERIC FLICKER COUNT gt 0 Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option Returns the number displayed on the right of the Count bar graph in the flicker measurement display screen NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion Function Queries all settings related to output of measured flicker data variable format Syntax NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion Example NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION gt NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION NUMBER 8 1 TIME ITEM2 UN 1 ITEM3 FU 1 ITEM4 DC 1 CURRENT ITEM5 DMAX 1 CURRENT ITEM6 DT 1 CURRENT ITEM7 PST 1 CURRENT ITEM8 PLT 1 Description Only available with the flicker measurement function FL option For the values of NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion ITEM lt x gt only the number of numeric data output items specified in sNUMeric FLICker FUNCtion NUMber are output 760301 17 6 85 6 18 NUMeric Group NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion CLEar Function Clears sets to NONE the output items of measured flicker data variable format Syntax NUMeric FLICker FUNCtion CLEar ALL lt NR gt lt NR gt ALL Clears all items 1st lt NRf gt 1 to 32 item number to start clearing 2nd lt NRf gt 1 to 32 item number to stop clearing Example NUMERIC FLICKER FUNCTION CLEAR ALL Desc
318. this group deal with file operations You can make the same settings and inquiries as when FILE on the front panel is used Function Queries all settings related to the file operation Syntax FILE Example FILE gt same as the response to FILE SAVE FILE CDIRectory Function Changes the current directory Syntax FILE CDIRectory lt Filename gt lt Filename gt Directory name Example FILE CDIRECTORY IMAGE Description Specify to move up to the parent directory FILE DELete IMAGe TIFF PSCRipt PNG JPEG Function Deletes the screen image data file Syntax FILE DELete IMAGe TIFF BMP PSCRipt PNG JPEG Filename Example FILE DELETE IMAGE TIFF IMAGI Description Specify the file name without the extension FILE DELete NUMeric ASCii FLOat Function Deletes the numeric data file Syntax FILE DELete NUMeric ASCii FLOat lt Filename gt Example FILE DELETE NUMERIC ASCII NUM1 Description Specify the file name without the extension FILE DELete SETup Function Deletes the setup parameter file Syntax FILE DELete SETup Filename Example FILE DELETE SETUP SETUP1 Description Specify the file name without the extension FILE DELete WAVE BINary ASCii FLOat Function Deletes the waveform display data file Syntax FILE DELete WAVE FLOat lt Filename gt Example FILE DELETE WAVE BINARY
319. ti neret re tired eere ETE 6 103 S TATUS FIETeESX Cere eoe Gne Ug 6 103 STATus QENable 1 6 103 SSTATUS QMESSage centenis 6 103 STATus SPOLI Serial Poll esses 6 104 IS TATUS deir eee e pete e pU Ee pa d 6 103 SSTORe GOUNL eire iere edes 6 105 STORe DIRection sese 6 105 STORe FILE ANAMing eene 6 105 STORe FIEE COMMent 5 irent emen 6 105 STORe FILE NAME STORe FI EZTYPE ueteri hei oti des STORE FILE i iint aee 6 105 STOR6e INTerval nove teet ote 6 106 STORE ITEM iiiter t 6 106 STORe MEMory ALERI 6 106 STORe MEMory CONVert ABORI 6 106 6 106 STORe MEMory INITialize SSTORe MEMOty caesi tede 6 106 Index 8 IM 760301 17E STORe MODE ds 6 106 STORe NUMeric NORMal 6 107 STORG NUMABriC 6 107 STORe NUMeric NORMal lt Function gt 6 107 5 6 107 5 lt gt 6 107 STORe NUMeric NORMal ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB e e pe aae STORe RECall STORe RTIMe STARI END
320. ting INPut WIRing 6 68 IM 760301 17E 6 14 INPut Group INPut CURRent SRATio Function Queries the current sensor scaling constants of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent SRATio Example INPUT CURRENT SRATIO gt INPUT CURRENT SRATIO ELEMENT1 10 0000 ELEMENT2 10 0000 ELEMENT3 10 0000 ELEMENT4 10 0000 INPut CURRent SRATio ALL Function Collectively sets the current sensor scaling constants of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent SRATio ALL lt NRf gt NHf 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example INPUT CURRENT SRATIO ALL 10 INPut CURRent SRATio ELEMent x Function Sets the current sensor scaling constant of the element or queries the current setting Syntax INPut CURRent SRATio ELEMent x NRf INPut CURRent SRATio ELEMent x x 1 to 4 element lt NRf gt 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example INPUT CURRENT SRATIO ELEMENT1 10 INPUT CURRENT SRATIO ELEMENT1 gt INPUT CURRENT SRATIO ELEMENT1 10 0000 INPut FILTer Function Queries all settings related to the filter Syntax INPut FILTer Example INPUT FILTER gt INPUT FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 OFF ELEMENT2 OFF ELEMENT3 OFF ELEMENT4 OFF INPUT FILTER FREQUENCY ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 4 0 INPut FILTer FREQuency Function Queries the frequency filter settings of all elements Syntax INPut FILTer FREQuency Example INPUT FILTER FREQUENCY gt INPUT FILTER FRE
321. ting Syntax INTEGrate MODE NORMal CONTinuous RNORmal1 RCONt inuous INTEGrate MODE NORMal Normal integration mode CONTinuous Continuous integration mode RNORmal Real time normal integration mode RCONtinuous Real time continuous integration mode Example INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL INTEGRATE MODE gt INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL INTEGrate RESet Function Resets the integrated value Syntax INTEGrate RESet Example INTEGRATE RESET INTEGrate RTIMe Function Queries the integration start and stop times for real time integration mode Syntax INTEGrate RTIMe lt x gt Example INTEGRATE RTIME gt INTEGRATE RTIME START 2005 1 1 0 0 0 END 2005 1 1 1 0 0 INTEGrate RTIMe STARt END Function Sets the integration start stop time for real time integration mode or queries the current setting Syntax INTEGrate RTIMe STARt END lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt INTEGrate RTIMe STARt END lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 2001 1 1 0 0 0 to 2099 12 31 23 59 59 1st lt NRf gt 2001 to 2099 year 2nd lt NRf gt 1 to 12 month 3rd lt NRf gt 1 to 31 day 4th lt NRf gt 0 to 23 hour 5th lt NRf gt 0 to 59 minute 6th lt NRf gt 0 to 59 second Example INTEGRATE START 2005 1 1 0 0 0 INTEGRATE RTIME START gt INTEGRATE
322. tion This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option The subsequent output items fill the positions of deleted output items and empty sections at the end are set to NONE f the 2nd lt NRf gt is omitted only the output item of the delete start number is deleted NUMeric LIST ITEM lt x gt Function Sets the output items function elements of the numeric list data of harmonic measurement or queries the current setting NUMeric LIST ITEM lt x gt NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt Syntax NUMeric LIST ITEM lt x gt x 1 to 64 item number NONE No output item Function u r P s o rAaMBda PHI PHIU PHII Z RS XS RP XP UHDF IHDF PHDF Element NR SIGMA SIGMB lt NRf gt 1 to 4 NUMERIC LIST ITEM1 U 1 NUMERIC LIST ITEM1 gt NUMERIC LIST ITEM1 U 1 Description This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option Example NUMeric Function Syntax Example Description NUMeric Function Syntax Example Description NUMeric Function Syntax Example Description LIST NUMber Sets the number of the numeric list data that is transmitted by NUMeric LIST VALue or queries the current setting NUMeric LIST NUMber lt NRf gt ALL NUMeri
323. tion source of all elements belonging to wiring unit EA B 6 71 INPut VOLTage Queries all settings related to the voltage measurement 6 71 INPut VOLTage AUTO Queries the voltage auto range setting ON OFF of all elements 6 71 INPut VOLTage AUTO ALL Collectively turns ON OFF the voltage auto range of all elements 6 71 INPut VOLTage AUTO ELEMent x Turns ON OFF the voltage auto range of the element or queries the current setting 6 71 INPut VOLTage AUTO SIGMA Collectively turns ON OFF the voltage auto range of all elements belonging to wiring unit B 6 71 INPut VOLTage MODE Queries the voltage mode of all elements 6 72 INPut VOLTage MODE ALL Collectively sets the voltage mode of all elements 6 72 INPut VOLTage MODE ELEMent x Sets the voltage mode of the element or queries the current setting 6 72 IM 760301 17E 6 1 List of Commands Command Function Page INPut VOLTage MODE SIGMA SIGMB Collectively sets the voltage mode of all elements belonging to wiring unit 6 72 INPut VOLTage RANGe Queries the voltage range of all elements 6 72 INPut VOLTage RANGe ALL Collectively sets the voltage range of all elements 6 72 INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent lt x gt Sets the voltage range of the element or queries the current setting 6 72 INPut VOLTage RANGe SIGMA 5 Collectively sets the voltage range of al
324. truments model GP IB port or card on the PC side For details see section 1 3 If a converter is used along the communication cable connecting the WT and PC for example a GP IB to USB converter malfunctions can occur For details consult with your Yokogawa dealer or representative Multiple cables can be used to connect multiple devices However no more than 15 devices including the controller can be connected on a single bus When connecting multiple devices each device must have its own unique address Use a cable of length 2 m or less for connecting the devices Make sure the total cable length does not exceed 20 m When communicating have at least two thirds of the devices turned ON When connecting multiple devices connect them in a star or linear configuration see the figure below Loop and parallel configurations are not allowed CAUTION When connecting or disconnecting communication cables make sure to turn OFF the PC and the WT3000 Otherwise erroneous operation or damage to the internal circuitry may result IM 760301 17E 1 5 Setting the GP IB Control Procedure Explanation DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT wr same LOCAL CAL INTEG a Cursor keys NUMERIC WAVE 4 P OTHERS v
325. ue ELEMent lt x gt x 1 to 4 gt ELEMENT2 Select from values MODE RMS MEAN DC gt MODE RMS given in Exclusive OR Can be omitted NUMeric 1 VALue gt NUMERIC VALUE IM 760301 17 Contents Structure of the iii Conventions Used in This iv Chapter 1 GP IB Interface Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 1 1 Names and Functions of Parts 1 1 12 Interface 1 2 13 Interface Specifications 2 40 424 0 10 1 3 1 4 Connecting the GP IB 22 0222040 0 00 nennen nennen nennen 1 4 1 5 Setting the GP IB Control 0 0 0 4 1 5 1 6 Responses to Interface 20020 11000000 nene nennen nnne 1 6 RS 232 Interface Option 2 1 Names and Functions 2 1 2 2 RS 232 Interface Functions and Specifications sene 2 2 2 3 Connection via the RS 232 Interface nennen 2 3 2 4 Combination of Handshaking Methods nennen 2 5 2 5 Combination of Data Formats mener 2 7 2 6 Setting the 5 232 Conttol i 2 8 USB Interface Option
326. uilt in printer B5 option is installed For details on the print pattern when preset is executed see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E IM 760301 17E 6 61 6 11 HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal Function Function Syntax Example urns ON OFF the output of the function when printing the numerical data list using the built in printer or queries the current setting HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal Function Boolean HCOPy PRINter LIST NORMal lt Function gt Function U I P S Q See the function selection list 1 of DISPlay group on page 6 44 HCOPY PRINTER LIST NORMAL U ON HCOPY PRINTER LIST NORMAL U gt PRINTER LIST NORMAL U 1 Description This command is valid only when the built in printer B5 option is installed 6 62 IM 760301 17E 6 12 HOLD Group The commands in this group deal with the hold function of output data You can make the same settings and inquiries as when HOLD on the front panel is used HOLD Function Sets the output data display communications etc hold or queries the current setting Syntax HOLD lt Boolean gt HOLD Example HOLD OFF HOLD gt HOLD 0 IM 760301 17E 6 63 6 13 The commands in this group deal with the saving o
327. um relative voltage change dmax or queries the S current setting 6 53 9 FLICker DMAX STATe Turns ON OFF judgment of the maximum relative voltage change dmax or 3 queries the current setting 6 53 D FLICker DMIN Queries all settings related to the steady state range dmin 6 53 2 FLICker DMIN LIMit Sets the limit of steady state range dmin or queries the current setting 6 53 FLICker DT Queries all settings related to the relative voltage change time d t 6 53 FLICker DT LIMit Sets the limit of the relative voltage change time d t or queries the current setting 6 53 FLICker DT STATe Turns ON OFF judgment of the relative voltage change time d t or queries the current setting 6 53 FLICker ELEMent x Sets the target element of flicker measurement or queries the current setting 6 54 FLICker FREQuency Sets the target frequency of flicker measurement or queries the current setting 6 54 FLICker INITialize Initializes flicker measurement 6 54 FLICker INTerval Sets the time per measurement for the short term flicker value Pst or queries the current setting 6 54 FLICker JUDGe Stops measurement of dmax caused by manual switching and executes judgment 6 54 FLICker MEASurement Sets the flicker measurement method or queries the current setting 6 54 FLICker MOVe Moves the observation period number for measurement of dmax caused by manual switching 6 54 FLICker PLT Queries all settings related to the long term flicker value
328. umber of bytes 6 digits data byte sequence This command is valid only on models with the advanced computation function G6 option or the harmonic measurement function G5 option A single numeric list data consists of up to 102 items of numeric data in the following order TOTal DC 1st order sNUMeric LIST ORDer If lt NRf gt is specified only the numeric list data of the item number is output up to 102 items of data If lt NRf gt is omitted the numeric list data of item numbers from 1 to 3 NUMeric LIST NUMber is output order up to 102 NUMeric LIST NUMber items of data For the format of the individual numeric data that is output see Numeric Data Format at the end of this group of commands see page 6 97 6 94 IM 760301 17E 6 18 NUMeric NORMal Function Queries all settings related to the numeric data output NUMeric NORMal NUMERIC NORMAL NUMERIC NORMAL NUMBER 15 1 U 1 TOTAL ITEM2 I 1 TOTAL ITEM3 P 1 TOTAL 4 S 1 TOTAL ITEM5 Q 1 TOTAL ITEM6 LAMBDA 1 TOTAL ITEM7 PHI 1 TOTAL ITEM8 FU 1 ITEM9 FI 1 ITEM10 UPPEAK 1 ITEM11 UMPEAK 1 ITEM12 IPPEAK 1 ITEM13 IMPEAK 1 ITEM14 CFU 1 ITEM15 CFI 1 Description For the values of NUMeric NORMal ITEM lt x gt the numeric data output items for the amount specified by NUMeric 1 output Syntax Example NUM
329. veform sampling data in the range specified by ACQuisition STARt END However data exceeding the waveform sampling data range 0 to the total number of data points 1 is not output This command is valid when the measurement mode is set to MATH or FFT and the waveform sampling data is held inside the WT3000 ACQuisition HOLD ON Otherwise an error occurs because there is no waveform sampling data The output is as follows 1 When ascii is specified Outputs NAN 2 When FLOat is specified Outputs 800000000 ACQuisition SRATe Function Queries the sampling rate of the retrieved data Syntax ACQuisition SRATe Example ACQUISITION SRATE gt 195 312 03 Description This command is valid when the measurement mode is set to MATH or FFT Otherwise an error occurs returns NAN because there is no waveform sampling data ACQuisition STARt Function Sets the output start point of the waveform display data that is transmitted by sACQuisition SEND or queries the current setting Syntax ACQuisition STARt NRf ACQuisition STARt lt NRf gt 0 to 3999999 Example ACQUISITION START 0 ACQUISITION START gt ACQUISITION START 0 Description Set the point in the range up to the total number of data points 1 The total number of data points can be queried using sACQuisition LENGth ACQuisition TRACe Function Sets the target trace of sACQuisition SEND
330. xample MOTOR SPEED SCALING 1 MOTOR SPEED SCALING gt MOTOR SPEED SCALING 1 0000 MOTor SPEed TYPE Function Sets the input type of the revolution signal input or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor SPEed TYPE ANALog PULSe MOTor SPEed TYPE Example MOTOR SPEED TYPE ANALOG MOTOR SPEED TYPE gt MOTOR SPEED TYPE ANALOG MOTor SPEed UNIT Function Sets the unit to add to the rotating speed computation result or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor SPEed UNIT String MOTor SPEed UNIT String Up to 8 characters Example MOTOR SPEED UNIT rpm MOTOR SPEED UNIT gt MOTOR SPEED UNIT rpm Description This command does not affect the computation result MOTor SSPeed Sync SPeed source Function Sets the frequency measurement source used to compute the synchronous speed SyncSp or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor SSPeed U lt x gt I lt x gt MOTor SSPeed x 1 to 4 element Example MOTOR SSPEED I1 MOTOR SSPEED MOTOR SSPEED I1 MOTor SYNChronize Function Sets the synchronization source used to compute the rotating speed and torque or queries the current setting Syntax MOTor SYNChronize U lt x gt I lt x gt EXTernal NONE MOTor SYNChronize x 1 to 4 element EXTernal External clock input Ext NONE No synchronization source Example MOTOR SYNCHRONIZE NONE MOTOR SYNCHRONIZE gt MOTOR SYNCHRONIZE NONE MOTor TORQue
331. xtended event register and error queue 6 114 ESE Sets the standard event enable register or queries the current setting 6 114 ESR Queries the standard event register 6 114 IDN Queries the instrument model 6 114 OPC Sets a 1 to bit bit of the standard event register bit upon the completion of the specified overlap command 6 115 OPC ASCII code 1 is returned when the specified overlap command is completed 6 115 Queries the installed options 6 115 PSC Sets whether to clear the registers at power on or queries the current setting 6 115 RST Executes the initialization of settings 6 115 SRE Sets the service request enable register or queries the current setting 6 115 STB Queries the status byte register 6 116 TRG Executes single measurement the same operation as when SINGLE is pressed 6 116 TST Performs a self test and queries the result 6 116 WAI Holds the subsequent command until the completion of the specified overlap operation 6 116 IM 760301 17E 6 2 ACQuisition Group The commands in this group deal with output of the waveform sampling data acquisition data There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group The commands in this group are valid only when the advanced computation function G6 option is installed ACQuisition Function Queries all settings related to the output of the waveform sampling data Syntax ACQuisition Example ACQUI
332. y WAVeform SEND or queries the current setting Syntax WAVeform FORMat ASCii FLOat WAVeform FORMat WAVEFORM FORMAT FLOAT WAVEFORM FORMAT gt WAVEFORM FORMAT FLOAT Description For the differences in the waveform display data output due to the format setting see the description for WAVeform SEND Example WAVeform HOLD Function Sets whether to hold ON or release OFF all the waveform display data or queries the current setting Syntax WAVeform HOLD Boolean WAVeform HOLD WAVEFORM HOLD ON WAVEFORM HOLD WAVEFORM HOLD 1 Description If wAVeform HOLD is turned ON before executing WAVeform SEND all the waveform data at that point can be held internally As long as WAVeform HOLD is ON the waveform data is held even when the waveform display on the screen is updated For example if you wish to retrieve the waveform display data of U1 and l1 at the same point do the following WAVeform HOLD ON WAVeform TRACe 01 WAVeform SEND Receive the waveform display data of U1 WAVeform TRACe I1 WAVeform SEND Receive the waveform display data of 11 WAVeform HOLD OFF If ON is specified when WAVeform HOLD is ON the waveform display data is cleared once and the most recent waveform data is held internally This method can be used when retrieving waveform display data continuously no need to set WAVeform HOLD to OFF each time Example
333. y inserting the connector firmly into the USB connector When connecting multiple devices using USB hubs connect the WT3000 to the USB hub that is closest to the controller Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable after the power is turned ON until the WT3000 boots up completely until the WT3000 is ready for operation approximately 20 to 30 If you do the WT3000 may malfunction IM 760301 17E 3 3 uondo gsn 3 44 Setting the USB Control Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT On A UPDATE WAVE U I P sun HOLD LOCAL CO OR mm CAL v l ITEM Form USER wes DDO LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET exit the menu during operation press ESC located above WOTOR FREQ the soft keys set FILTER 5 3 In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 in the User s Manual IM760301 01E MENU Selecting USB Conirol 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Remote Control soft key to display the Remot

WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer User`s Manual - Electro

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents